GREENWICH UNITARY DEVELOPMENT PLAN

Adopted 20 July 2006

Published by Greenwich Council Produced by Greenwich Strategic Planning Peggy Middleton House 50 Woolwich New Road London SE18 6HQ

Designed and Produced by Cook Hammond & Kell Whittington House 764-768 Holloway Road London N19 3JQ

Copyright Maps in this publication are reproduced with permission from Ordnance Survey with permission of the Controller of Her Majesty's Stationery Office. Greenwich Council licence 100019695 (2007). Unauthorised reproduction infringes Crown copyright and may lead to prosecution or civil proceedings.

FOREWORD BY THE LEADER OF THE COUNCIL
These are exciting times for Greenwich. Record inward investment, secured by Greenwich Council and our partners, is transforming the face of our borough. Step by step, we are reversing years of economic decline brought about by the demise of our traditional industries. As a result, the visible signs of regeneration lie all around us – in every part of our borough. Over the last year, we have made every effort to ensure that our priorities mirror your priorities. Around 35,000 residents seized the opportunity to tell us their vision for a future Greenwich at one of our Great Get Together consultation events. We have listened to what you told us. We are seeking to meet your aspirations with an ambitious plan that takes advantage of the once in a lifetime opportunity record amounts of inward investment have given us. You told us that transport was one of your main priorities.We agree.That’s why we are committed to securing new transport links that will open up job opportunities across the capital and attract new businesses to our borough. The North Greenwich stop on the Jubilee line has shown just how much of a catalyst transport links can be in terms of regeneration. It has become the most successful station on the Jubilee line extension and together with new and improved local bus services, our existing rail services and a commuter river service, it is helping our borough to become south east London’s transport hub. This unique position will soon be strengthened even further.Work is well underway on a new DLR station in Woolwich that will open in 2009. A Crossrail station in Abbey Wood will follow just a few years later. Our attempts to persuade people of the overwhelming economic case for opening a further Crossrail station in Woolwich continue apace. Like the thousands of local residents and businesses who supported our campaign, we understand that we cannot afford to miss out on the wider benefits this development would bring. You also told us that access to high quality and affordable housing is one of the biggest challenges we face today. Again we agree. That’s why we will continue to build on our proud record of substantial housing developments; delivering thousands of new and affordable homes on the Greenwich Peninsula, Woolwich Arsenal, Kidbrooke and across the borough. Not only have many of these developments brought former wasteland back into use, they have provided us with an opportunity to negotiate benefits such as schools and new health facilities that will benefit the whole of our community. And finally you told us that you wanted to see new life breathed into our three town centres. We agree. That’s why we have launched ambitious plans to build three new local service centers in Eltham, Woolwich and Greenwich. As well as acting as a catalyst for wider regeneration projects in each area, they will ensure that you can access a range of modern, first class services in your neighbourhood. All of this is part of our long-term vision to help us create a truly sustainable community within the Thames Gateway. It is set out in this, our new Unitary Development Plan (UDP), which is our development blueprint for the future.

FOREWORD

As I stated, none of this could have been possible without the many local people, community organisations and businesses who have fed in their views.Your input has helped us to identify areas for future development opportunities, in particular where new homes should be built and how we can continue to protect our open spaces and the natural environment. Together we can continue to ensure that Greenwich remains a great place in which we can all be proud to live, work, learn and visit.

FOREWORD

CONTENTS
Introduction...........................................................................................................................................................i

PART ONE
Vision .....................................................................................................................................................................1 The Council’s Strategy for Land Use and Development..........................................................................1 Borough Profile ...................................................................................................................................................4 Policy Context.....................................................................................................................................................7 Strategic Planning Policies ..............................................................................................................................14

PART TWO
1. COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES......................................................................................21 C1 Community Services ...............................................................................................................32 C2 Loss of Community Facilities ................................................................................................32 C3 Major Residential Developments .........................................................................................33 C4 Doctors Surgeries, Dentists etc...........................................................................................33 C5 Nursery Provision....................................................................................................................34 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY .......................................................................................................35 J1 Defined Industrial Areas .........................................................................................................39 J2 Aggregates and other ‘Open Yard’ Industries....................................................................41 J3 Charlton Business Park ..........................................................................................................41 J4 Town Centres ...........................................................................................................................42 J5 Employment Sites Outside Defined Employment Locations ........................................42 J6 Industrial and Business Developments ...............................................................................43 J7 B1 Uses.......................................................................................................................................44 J8 B8 Distributive Industries and Trade Wholesale Uses....................................................44 J9 Cultural and Creative Industries..........................................................................................45 J10 ‘Bad Neighbour’ Industries ....................................................................................................46 J11 Home Working .........................................................................................................................46 J12 Work/Live Units .......................................................................................................................46 J13 Quality Jobs ...............................................................................................................................47 J14 Training and Business Support..............................................................................................48 J15 Community Benefits................................................................................................................48 J16 Accessibility ...............................................................................................................................49 HOUSING .........................................................................................................................................................51 H1 New Housing ............................................................................................................................54 H2 Preventing the Loss of Housing............................................................................................55 H3 Effective Use of Dwellings......................................................................................................55

2.

3.

CONTENTS

............................................H4 H5/H6 H7 H8/H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16 H17 H18 H19/H20 H21 H22 4.............81 O14 Allotments..............................................64 Non Self-Contained Shared or Bedsitter Accommodation ......................................................................................................................65 Lifetime Homes ....96 E8 Energy Efficiency............80 O12 Park Facilities.......................................57 Housing Design...............83 O20 Green Corridors.......................69 OPEN SPACES ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................67 Wheelchair Standard Housing......................................................65 Sheltered Housing............................................73-75 O5 Green Chain..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................84 O23 Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites .......................94-95 E5 Light Pollution ...................................97 E9 Renewable Energy...................................................................................................................................82-83 O18/O19 Sites of Nature Conservation Importance.......................................................................................................................................................................................61 Children’s Play Areas .........................................................................................62 Housing Mix......85 O24/O25 Management of Wildlife Sites............................................................................................................................................................................................................................71 O1-O4 Metropolitan Open Land ..............58 Density.............................................................................................................76 O6 Green Belt...........77 O9 Public Open Space Deficiency Areas ...................................................................................................................98 5..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................62 Affordable Housing...........................................................84 O21 River Corridors .........................................................85 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION...............................................................................................................68 Travellers and Romany People...................................................................................77 O8 Other Open Spaces..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................60 Amenity Space and Gardens .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................93 E1-E4 Pollution.........................................95 E6/E7 Air Pollution ........................................................................................................................................................... Kidbrooke Development Area.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................77 O10 Community Benefits........................................................................................................................................79 O11 Sportsgrounds and Playing Fields ..............................................67-68 Supported Housing.........................................................................................................56 Conversions................................................................................. CONTENTS ...............82 O15-O17 Recreational Footpaths and Cycleways.............................................................................................59 Backland and Infill Development....................61 Housing Improvement ........84 O22 Species Protection ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................76 O7 Community Open Space......................................81 O13 Floodlighting ...............

.........................................114 D12 Satellite Antennae .........................................................................................................................125 D30/D31 Archaeology ..........................................................................................120 D23 Local List of Buildings of Architectural or Historic Interest ..99 Site Servicing................115 D13 Shopfronts and Signs...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................117 D16/D17 Conservation Areas...113 D9/D10 Residential Extensions ......................................................................................................................................................................102 Waste Inert Material............109-110 D3 Ecological Factors ...........111 D5 Parking and Access Arrangements...........................................................................120 D22 Buildings at Risk ........................120 D24 Historic Landscapes ....127 D33 Temporary Use of Vacant Land Awaiting Development ............107 D1/D2 Urban Design.....................................................................118 D21 Changes of Use of Listed Buildings..........................................................104 Safeguarding Existing Tidal and Fluvial Defences..................118 D19 External or Internal Alterations or Additions to Listed Buildings.............................................................................................................................................100 Waste Reduction.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................General Principles.............................................. 118 D18 Preservation of Listed Building...................118 D20 Setting and Proportions of a Listed Building ........................................................131 7..................................................................................................................................................................................... Reuse............................................................................................................129 M1 Development and Transport ..................................117....................................................................... Hazardous Materials.........................................................................................................................................114 D11 Telecommunications Development .....................................112 D7 Safety and Security in the Environment ................................................................................................................................................116 D15 Advertisements ................................................................................................................................100 Electromagnetic Fields..............................................................120 D25/D26 Strategic Views..................................................99 Contaminated Land ...............................123 D28 High Buildings ................112 D6 Access for People with Disabilities ............................124 D29 Areas of Special Character....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................103 Drainage and Flood Protection............................................................................................121 D27 Local Views ......................................................................................................................................................... Recovery and Disposal ......................................................................................................................................................................................125 D32 Environmental Improvements.........................111 D4 Improvements to the Urban and Natural Environment ...................................................................................................................................................127 MOVEMENT ........... CONTENTS .......................102 Minimise Waste at Source .................................................................................................................................................................E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 6..104 DESIGN & CONSERVATION .................................................116 D14 Street Furniture..............................................................................103 Development in Fluvial Flood Risk Areas ....................................................................................................................113 D8 Trees.........

.......................................159 TC4 ‘Island Site’ ..................................................................................................................................................150 Water Borne Freight .......141 Relocation of High Traffic Generators.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................141 Car Parking Standards.......................................140 Specific Improvements....................................144 Services Areas.......................141 Relationship of Development to the Road Hierarchy and Town Centres.....................133 Safeguarded and other Rail Schemes................145 Parking Strategies......142-143 Community Benefits..................................................................................................................................159 CONTENTS .158 TC2 Primary Shopping Centre ...........................................................................................................................................................146 Pedestrians.................................144 Off-Street Public Parking ..........................................................................................................................................138 General Criteria for Road Schemes ............................................................................140 New Housing Developments .................................131 Travel Plans .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Transport Assessment .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................149 Rail Freight...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Traffic Calming Measures .................................................135 Waterfront Transit ...........................................................................................139 Road Hierarchy ...............137 Heliports and Airports ...........................................................................150 Coaches...133 Accessible Public Transport...........151 TOWN CENTRES..............................................................................135 Transport Interchanges....133 Use of the River..............145 Cycling ..................................................................................................................................150 Areas of High Freight Accessibility........................................................................................148 People with Disabilities ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Access in Public Areas.................................................................................................................................................................................................................136 Retention and Improvement of Public Transport Facilities ..................................................................148 Restriction on Road Freight.....159 TC3 Other Key Uses .......................132-133 Major New Transport Developments.............................................M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23-M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40-42 8..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................137 Safeguarded Schemes........................................................................................................................................136 Accessibility ............................................................................................................................................132 Extension of the Public Transport Network .........................................155 Woolwich Town Centre TC1 Royal Arsenal ..150 Adverse Effect of Freight on the Environment ..................................................................................134 Bus Priority......................................................................................................................139 Environmental Areas .....................................................

........... TOURISM T1 T2 T3 T4 ..166 TC18 Non-retail (A1) Uses in Core and Fringe Frontages............................................................................................................188 W2 Thameside Policy Area ................................................................................................................191 W7 Support Facilities for Water-based Uses...........................................................180 10.................................................................................................................................167 TC21 Use of Premises Above Shops........................... WATERFRONT ......................177 Location and Criteria ........164 General Policies TC16 Key Town Centre Uses and the Sequential Approach............................................................................................................................................170 TC28 Hot Food Takeaway Outlets including Drive Through Restaurants...............190 W6 Floating Vessels.........................................................................................163 Eltham Town Centre TC13 Focus for South Greenwich.................................160 TC8 Historic Town Centre................................................................................................................ Cultural and Entertainment Facilities .....................................................................................................................................................................................161 TC9 The Multi-functional Role of Greenwich Town Centre .......................... Servicing and Parking ......................................................164 TC17 Protected Core and Fringe Shopping Frontages ..............................................................................................183 W1 Development Principles ...................................................... Leisure and Tourism ................................................................... Bed and Breakfast Accommodation and Guesthouses........................................................................................................160 Greenwich Town Centre TC7 World Heritage Site.170 TC27 Markets and Car Boot Sales .........................................160 Public Transport Links..................................................................................................................189 W4 Thamesmead ...................................................................180 Camping and Caravanning ..........169 TC25-TC26 Site Access.........................................163 TC15 Traffic Management...........171 TC29 Retail Facilities in Petrol Stations..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................TC5 TC6 Pedestrian and Cycle Access....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Streetscape and Environmental Quality.......................................................................162 TC12 Traffic Management and Transport Links .........................................................................................................................................................................................................167 TC20 Arts..................................................162 TC11 Market Development......................................................169 TC24 Civic Spaces...............168 TC22 Town Centre Living...............................................................................190 W5 Safeguarded Wharves........................................166 TC19 Essential Local Facilities in Neighbourhood Parades and Freestanding Premises..............................................168 TC23 Environmental Protection..................191 CONTENTS .............................................................................178-179 Small Hotels.......................................................................179 Diversification ...................................172 9.................188 W3 Mixed Use Areas ...............................................................161 TC10 Shopping and ‘Food & Drink’ Uses .....................................................................................................................................................163 TC14 Shopping.........................................

.................193 IM1 Monitoring and Review .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................195 IM3 Partnership .208 Open Space............................197 SITE PROPOSAL SCHEDULES Community Needs and Services ....................................................................................................209-211 Movement..............................................................................................................11............................................................................... Legislative Background............................................................................................205-207 Housing...........................................................194 IM2 Resources ......................................................................................................................................204 Jobs.................................................................................................................195 IM4 Consultation and Community Liaison..............................223 Glossary and Abbreviations.....................................................................................................225 CONTENTS .................................. IMPLEMENTATION .................................................................................................................................................................................196 IM5 Enforcement......................................................................................................................................................... 2.................................................212-213 Mixed Uses...........214-221 APPENDICES 1.........................................................................

................................................iv Greenwich in the London Context ................................................................................................................................................184 TABLES C1 C2 O1 O2 M1 M2 TC1 TC2 TC3 IM1 Groups Most Disadvantaged by the Built Environment.........................................................................................86 Flooding & Attenuation Areas.............................................................. 4..............................................................152 Retail Car Parking Standards .........................................................................156 District & Local Centre Shopping Frontages ............ 5..105 Conservation Areas..................................................79 Sites of Nature Conservation Importance..................................................88-92 Cycle Parking Standards....................................MAPS 1........ Greenwich in the South East.......................................175-176 Targets & Indicators for UDP Monitoring ..........198-201 CONTENTS ............78 Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites..................................................v Ward Boundaries.................................................................................................................................................................................................vi Public Open Space Deficiency Areas ............................................................................ 10................................................. 11................................................................................................................................. 2...........................................................................v Key Sub-regional Diagram ..................................................................................................126 Cycle Network......147 Waterfront Area.. 3.......................................173-174 Premises in Neighbourhood Parades............................ 12..................27-28 Types of Publicly Accessible Open Space.................................. 8...............................................119 Local Views ............................................................... 7.................................................................................... 6.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9.......22-25 Key Policies for Disadvantaged Groups .......................122 Areas of Archeological Potential........................................................153 Town Centre Hierarchy ..........................

INTRODUCTION i . Planning aims to manage land-use change by being aware of what is happening of influence to the Borough. looks at how individual uses of land affects people and places on a wider scale and helps protect our built and natural heritage. decisions and activities. Written Statement As required by legislation and in accordance with (Central Government) Planning Policy Guidance Note 12: Development Plans. people moving in to and out of the borough and by changing lifestyles. • Control Planning works through the granting of planning permission.This is used to permit good developments or new uses of land and buildings and prevent ones that may be harmful to the public interest. at the Borough level. defining the areas where development is not desired or where it needs to be carefully directed and.This in turn affects how we in Greenwich Borough.This sets out the vision for use of land in the Borough. Our need for buildings such as factories. The Purpose of the Unitary Development Plan (UDP) Local Councils have a duty to prepare a Development Plan by law. Greenwich UDP is in two parts: • Part 1 outlines the Vision for Greenwich. and guiding development in the interests of the community. from the Greenwich Strategy (2003). and for services such as health and leisure facilities.2011 (or 2016 for Part 1 of the Plan). and also provides the main guidance for making decisions on individual planning proposals.To provide a detailed basis for the control of development. housing and shops. As a community we have to decide how best the land can be used to meet a wide range of wants and needs.To provide a framework of acceptable uses within the Borough. This is done through both positive and control planning. . The Greenwich Unitary Development Plan does this for the Borough of Greenwich and is intended to cover the period 2001 . It is a legal document with the following purposes: . The system of planning in Britain is designed so that. use land. are influenced by changing technology. positive planning and planning control work with each other through the Greenwich Unitary Development Plan. and these changes are shaped by the way we live and shape subsequent needs. Understanding the Plan The Greenwich UDP is made up of a Written Statement and a Proposals Map. • Positive planning helps to work out what type of environment we want to live in.INTRODUCTION PLANNING IN THE LONDON BOROUGH OF GREENWICH Change occurs all the time.

The Council adopted the Replacement Unitary Development Plan on 20 July 2006. which in this case would be Movement. Sustainable Development and Regeneration. ii INTRODUCTION . Each of the sections contain a number of policies. or used for reference purposes on particular topics or development proposals. If you are interested in a particular site or building or want an indication of how the Council would respond to a site proposal. Reviewing the Plan The review of the 1994 Adopted UDP was carried out over a number of years. The Council published the First Deposit Draft UDP (February 2002) and the Second Deposit Draft UDP (April 2004) for public consultation. Town Centres and Movement. Proposals Map The Main Proposals Map covers the whole Borough. the Council published Modifications (January 2006) and a Further Modification (April 2006) for public consultation. A policy relating to a designation can be found in the Plan by looking it up in the Contents Page. It contains a profile of the Borough. such as cycling you can either use the Contents Page at the front of the plan. Using the Plan The plan can be read as a document on planning in Greenwich. Greenwich and Woolwich. Part II is developed from Part I and is broken down into sections such as Open Spaces. Designations can be identified using the map’s key and site schedules can be identified by a letter and number with corresponding details contained in Part II of the Written Statement.It contains a strategy for land use and development based on three key themes on which the UDP is based: Equality and Social Inclusion. It is important to remember that many policies in Part II will apply to all types of development and need to be taken into consideration. The Map shows individual sites of proposed developments and areas within the Borough which have been designated for particular uses. alongside details of the achievements of the previous UDP and future opportunities in this UDP. or look up the most relevant topic chapter. Part II also contains a schedule of proposals for individual sites in the Borough. In response to the Inspector’s Report. upon which the detailed policies in Part II are based. If you are interested in a particular issue. each with a policy number and indicated by a coloured background. which are listed under such topic headings as Jobs and Mixed Uses. Key to part I are the strategic land use policies for the Borough.The Inspector’s Report on Objections was published by the Council in November 2005. A Public Inquiry was held between January and April 2005. Each policy is followed by a reason that outlines the key factors involved in its determination. or for conservation. the Proposals Map will indicate if there are any designations or scheduled proposals for the site. where an independent Inspector examined unresolved objections. whilst Inset Maps A-C cover the town centres of Eltham.

First Floor. London SE18 6HQ or by telephoning 020 8921 5190. 50 Woolwich New Road. The LDS is available on the Council website at www.gov. forms the Development Plan for the Borough.greenwich. INTRODUCTION iii .The Replacement UDP (2006) together with the London Plan (2004).a project plan outlining the content and production of planning policy documents).The UDP is also available on the Council website. During this period.uk). Under the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004. Peggy Middleton House.when it replaced the 1994 Unitary Development Plan. UDPs usually retain ‘development plan status’ for a period of three years. in all local libraries in the Borough and from the Development Planning Reception. the Council will bring forward Local Development Documents to replace parts of the UDP in accordance with the Local Development Scheme (LDS .

Sussex Essex Kent E. Sussex FRANCE Isle of Wight © Crown copyright English Channel Greenwich iv INTRODUCTION .Map 1: Greenwich in the South East Leicestershire Cambridgeshire Warwickshire Northants Beds Suffolk Hertfordshire Oxfordshire Bucks London Greater London Berkshire Surrey Hampshire W.

Map 2: Greenwich in London Context Enfield Barnet Haringey Harrow Hackney Brent © Crown copyright Redbridge Waltham Forest Barking Newham Havering Camden Islington City Tower Hamlets Hillingdon Ealing Westminster Kensington & Chelsea Hammersmith & Fulham Southwark Greenwich Bexley Lambeth Hounslow Ricmond upon Thames Merton Kingston upon Thames Sutton Bromley Croydon Wandsworth Lewisham Map 3: Ward Boundaries Thamesmead Moorings Peninsula Woolwich Riverside Abbey Wood © Crown copyright Greenwich West Blackheath Westcombe Charlton Woolwich Common Glyndon Plumstead Kidbrooke with Hornfair Shooters Hill Eltham West Eltham North Middle Park and Sutcliffe Eltham South Coldharbour and New Eltham INTRODUCTION v .

Barking HAVERING Jubilee Line TOWER HAMLETS A13 3rd Blackwall crossing Thames Gateway Bridge NEWHAM Rail Lines Map 4: Key Sub-regional Diagram Greenwich Waterfront Transit Thamesmead Canary Wharf London City Airport Greenwich Peninsula Proposed Thames Crossing A206 A1 02 Woolwich GREENWICH A20 5 Thames Gateway Greenwich Metropolitan Green Belt Lewisham A2 Eltham BEXLEY Metropolitan Open Land LEWISHAM Bexleyheath Strategic Centre A 20 DARTFORD Proposed Crossrail 25 Proposed DLR Woolwich Extension Bromley BROMLEY © Crown copyright M M 25 vi HACKNEY Stratford BARKING INTRODUCTION .

PART ONE .

e. We will reduce discrimination and improve opportunity. sports and recreation.2 These themes run throughout the plan and are reflected in its policies and proposals. Government guidance is that UDPs should not contain policies for matters other than land use and should not duplicate provisions in other legislation. THE COUNCIL’S STRATEGY FOR LAND USE AND DEVELOPMENT 3. PART ONE 1 .1 The Greenwich Unitary Development Plan (UDP) is the revised statutory development plan for the whole of the Borough of Greenwich setting out policies for the period to 2011 and in some instances to 2016. k. l. and c. a. INTRODUCTION 1. b. We will support vulnerable and disadvantaged people and encourage independent living m. c. Effective and co-ordinated public transport will serve all our communities.These are the things most important to Greenwich and its communities and contribute to Greenwich being a place where people live. work. It also reflects Government Guidance and the other strategies of the Council. Local people will be able to get good quality housing. Crime will be reduced and there will be a strong sense of community. Equality and social inclusion. There will be high quality and accessible health and social care services for all our residents. f. Regeneration 3. h. Our residents will have sufficient skills to get jobs. g. We will live in a clean and well cared for environment. VISION 2. Greenwich will be a world tourist destination. i.1 The Council’s strategy for development and the use of land develops that vision around three main themes that form the basis of the plan. digital and performing arts.1. 3. j. Greenwich will make a major contribution to London’s economy. We will make best use of natural resources in Greenwich. Although identified as three themes they are not independent but are closely integrated with each other. We will have improved educational achievement. b. visit and learn now and in the future. Sustainable development. We will play a vital part in the diverse cultural life of London with visual. 2.1 The Greenwich Strategy (2003) sets out the Council’s vision for Greenwich in 2010.These are: a. 2.2 The role of the UDP is to set out clearly the land use implications of this vision for Greenwich. d.

consultation.7 2 PART ONE .4 S U S TA I N A B L E D E V E L O P M E N T 3. gender. education services and recreation accessible to all. sexual orientation. colour and national origin. liaison and involvement. and • Development of buildings that are environmentally efficient to build and run. • A sustainable transport strategy which integrates land use and transport and promotes greater use of public transport. additional building costs and off-site works. age. Equality and social inclusion can be promoted by providing and accessing opportunities for all residents but especially those experiencing social and economic disadvantage or discrimination. good community relations.3 Developing an inclusive society and mixed communities is a major part of Government policy. and to tackling all forms of discrimination in Greenwich through the Council as service provider and community leader”.5 Sustainable development is not just concerned with the environment but also needs to encompass social and economic considerations. It is generally acknowledged that the planning system has a vital role to play in ensuring that land use and other resources are used more sustainably.The Government’s current target is to achieve at least 60% of new build on recycled land. disability. Through implementation of the Policy. Developing an inclusive society and mixed communities is a major policy theme of the government. the ability to concentrate development on recycled land does often come with a cost because of the need in many instances to deal with contamination. 3. Historically development has largely been concentrated on ‘brownfield’ sites in the Borough. To help residents from all communities to grasp opportunities it will be necessary to make provision for the following:• Affordable housing in mixed-use residential areas • Safe and sustainable travel • The creation of an accessible environment including new jobs and training for job seekers • Making shops. race. • Mixed-use development in town centres. and has significantly exceeded that target. Sustainable development also involves recognising the relationship between the physical environment in its contribution to peoples’ well-being.6 Another aspect of sustainable development is ensuring that as much new development as possible takes place on ‘brownfield’ land. Planning Policy Statement 1: Delivering Sustainable Development (2005) states that sustainable development is the core principle underpinning planning.The UDP will take account of health impacts 3. • Conservation of the Borough’s open spaces and natural environment. • Preservation of the best of the Borough’s heritage. A more sustainable environment is promoted throughout the plan. cover significant restoration costs. the Council will improve its awareness and understanding of the needs of different groups in the borough through effective community profiling.E Q UA L I T Y A N D S O C I A L I N C L U S I O N 3. the Council is committed to “promoting equality of opportunity. by including policies to encourage: • High quality urban design. 3. walking and cycling which is accessible to all. Through the Greenwich Equality Policy. However. health. or religious belief. It also explicitly states that no individuals or groups in the Borough should be disadvantaged by reason of ethnicity. community.

by targeting initiatives and renewal at areas of greatest need. guidance and advice notes and area plans to illustrate and promote development opportunities that meet socially inclusive health.11 The strategy will be implemented in a number of ways. In joining with other London Boroughs.10 I M P L E M E N T I N G T H E S T R AT E G Y 3. Regeneration also needs to take account of existing inequalities in health.9 3. European and other grants. community and education provision. community and environmental needs. 3. e.Tourism will be promoted as a useful element in the regeneration of the Borough’s economy through visitor management and/or environmental management to promote and safeguard communities and negate any adverse effect upon local communities. through the use of legal agreements. The Council through its land use policies seeks to continue to revitalise older rundown parts of the Borough especially those on the waterfront and in South Greenwich. PART ONE 3 . Regeneration and town planning are most obviously connected when considering physical change. R E G E N E R AT I O N 3. especially the public transport network. the needs of the local community and to improvements in the transport infrastructure. Regeneration should also take account of the impact of any growth in jobs and/or housing on demand for health. other public bodies and agencies in responding to issues and pursuing initiatives of a Londonwide nature. or experiencing. In partnership with the private sector to obtain the optimum benefit possible for the Borough. community and education services locally. Care will be taken to relate such regeneration to existing health. It will also draw on the opportunities open to Greenwich as part of a world centre of international trade. but particularly through the following mechanisms: a. to retain and enhance economic activity and promote sustainable economic and employment growth. mechanisms such as the Lottery and Single Regeneration Budget [SRB] and negotiated contributions through Planning Obligations. The full use of the Council’s statutory powers to guide and control development. Regeneration in the Borough needs to be considered in the context of the Government’s desire to regenerate the Thames Gateway area to the east and south east of London. community and education provision. planning briefs. although the multiple problems encompassed by the term regeneration requires a partnership approach with all relevant stakeholders.8 Regeneration needs to be sustainable and incorporate issues of equality that contribute towards a more cohesive and inclusive society. The above sets out how the UDP aims to integrate the three themes of equality and social inclusion. b. for example. poverty and facing unemployment as well as those of other disadvantaged groups need to be considered alongside those of business and economic efficiency. d. sustainability and regeneration into the land use planning process. Thus the needs of residents living in. c. The preparation of strategies. including Central Government.The next paragraph sets out how the strategy will be implemented while section 6 develops these themes in more detail by setting out the strategic policies. business and tourism.proposals as a mechanism for ensuring that major developments promote public health within the Borough. The full use of financial resources.

129 metres). 2005 mid year estimate). g. It is this inter relationship between the physical fabric and local communities that provides the unique character of the place. the highest point in the Borough (and London . which was started in the late 60’s and is still being developed. The physical structure of the Borough is marked by a 13 kilometre frontage to the River Thames.3 4. Through other strategies of the council and the necessary partnerships which are formed to aid their implementation. Recognition of Maritime Greenwich through the inscription of the town centre and neighbouring environs as a World Heritage Site of international importance indicates the quality of heritage and architecture. Conversely there are areas in the Borough where the environment is of low quality and in need of improvement. Open spaces. The main town centres are Woolwich and Greenwich. The interaction between people and the environment has produced a mosaic of built environments. THE ENVIRONMENT 4. By entering into dialogue with the community and voluntary sectors to ensure that local knowledge and aspirations are reflected in planning activities and by encouraging community organisations. The UDP to be successful must not only distinguish these different areas and have appropriate policies but must also seek to ensure that environmental considerations are central to all development/land use decisions. except for Greenwich Park. open spaces and employment locations and is designed around the lakes and canals 4.044 hectares and is the twelfth largest Borough in London. The Borough population is 228. has a contrasting mix of the older developed areas of the Borough where communities have grown in association with the river and riverside industries and contemporary waterfront developments. The urban fabric is generally tight knit with streets of terraced housing interwoven with other commercial uses. partly in Greenwich and partly in Bexley.1 The Borough has an area of 5.To the east is the community of Thamesmead.100 (Office for National Statistics. It is broadly residential but has its own town centre. These relationships must be built upon and improved as they constitute the basic resource on which the Borough must work and the basis for future planning activity. But the Borough is also rich in other woods and commons and almost a quarter of its area is in some type of open space use.The Greenwich Strategy is an important voice to feed community needs and aspirations into the UDP. BOROUGH PROFILE 4.The Ravensbourne marks the Borough’s western edge and joins The Thames at Deptford Creek. On this basic structure an ecological heritage has developed reflected in different landscapes. an ancient woodland of great ecological merit and significance.5 4 PART ONE .f. the steep slope of the river cliff or escarpment which rises to a plateau stretching from Blackheath to Plumstead and Bostall Heath. It is important that such areas are conserved and enhanced. limited.To the south and west the land slopes away to the Ravensbourne and its tributaries before rising again to the southern boundary. the former marshy river flood plain. The north of the Borough. Interspersed with the older areas are a number of relatively recent developments of housing and industrial estates. Perhaps the most important feature is Oxleas Wood. land uses and economic activities that are of significant cultural and heritage value. This plateau in turn rises to Shooters Hill.2 The Borough of Greenwich has inherited an environment which in many areas is of high quality and is a considerable asset. have been until recently. near the river.4 4. 4. self-help groups and cooperatives to participate in the implementation of the strategy.

Millennium village. Millennium Dome and new open spaces.14 PART ONE 5 . The 2001 Census recorded that 23% of the population was from a minority ethnic group (defined as all groups other than ‘white’).8 Population projections for the Borough show the total number of residents increasing from 217. The 2001 Census recorded 92. but then increase to 17% in 2021. 241. 13. Greenwich’s population comprises a rich mix of ethnicity.400 are households with a married couple (including those with dependent and non-dependent children).047 in 2011 and 246. expected to grow to over 103.The majority of ethnic minority communities are in the north of the Borough. 2011 and 2021 but with a numerical increase of nearly 1700 children (2001-2021).10 4. the Old Royal Naval College. an increase of 8. The wards that will see the greatest increase in population are West Greenwich. to 8% in 2021.1]. residential areas where heavy goods traffic has an adverse impact. Pensioner-only households comprise 14% of the total households in the Borough.needed to drain the area. 20. Within the broad pattern described above there are many smaller areas with their own particular mix of diversity and identity. [Greater London Authority 2003 population projections Scenario 8. at 7% of the population in 2001. culture and language.The main town centre for this part of the Borough is Eltham. The number of people over 85 years of age will fall from 10% of the over 60 population in 2001 and 2011. lower density character for the area. reflecting permitted and proposed developments in the Waterfont area including Greenwich Peninsula. for example. Maryon Wilson Park and again the area has seen a number of comparatively recent residential developments.12 4. 4. such as the Progress Estate.7 P O P U L AT I O N S T R U C T U R E A N D T R E N D S 4. for example.11 4. 4.616 in 2016.This area also has many fine open spaces that help to provide a much looser. the Royal Arsenal and Charlton House. and areas of a distinct style.700 households contain co-habiting couples (2001 Census). there are also areas where the relationship between environment and land use should be improved. This is a decrease from 24% in 1991. with Black or Black British and African being the largest groups.This is in contrast to a decline in population in the 1960’s and 1970’s.6 On steep cliffs of the ‘river cliff ’ there are interesting residential environments with streets of close packed terraced houses with fine views over the river.13 4. The proportion of older people (over 60) in the Borough will decrease from 17% in 2001 to 15% of the total population both in 2006 and 2011.100 from 1991. 4. Single person households account for 21.000 by 2011.805 in 2001 to 231. The other marked change is that by 2021 the proportion of 20-40 year olds will have declined from 34% to 30% whilst the proportion of 40-60 year olds will have increased from 23 % to 27%. and reflects amongst other things the recent and future house building in the Borough. Modern developments are particularly focused on the Peninsula with its tube station. with almost all of these one-person pensioner households.000 of the total. In places open spaces have remained.100 are lone-parent households and 4. However. There are areas of great architectural merit and importance. Beyond the ‘cliff edge’ the Borough starts to take on a more suburban style with more detached and semi detached housing in communities that developed in relation to the provision of the railways in the early part of the century. The proportion of children under five requiring primary childcare and educational facilities is projected to remain stable.9 4. Peninsula and Thamesmead Moorings.800 households in the Borough.956 in 2006. for example.

of course. leading to the need to improve social. • 7.16 The London Borough of Greenwich has many locational advantages being close to Central London and having an extensive river frontage.100 between 1991 and 2001. economic and environmental conditions and to facilitate neighbourhood renewal. as well as being on the route between Central London and the Channel Tunnel and Channel Ports. Such areas of deprivation suffer from a combination of economic and social problems. and their successful melding with existing riverside uses. • The re-emergence of the river itself and riverside land as a key focus for a wide range of new uses.The Borough has a key location on the navigations and terminals that comprise the Port of London. • The expansion of Thamesmead Town Centre. • The designation of two new conservation areas. • Households growing by around 8. contain areas within the most deprived 10% in England.000 between 1991 and 2001. • The extension of the Docklands Light Railway to Greenwich and the Jubilee Line to North Greenwich. Some of these areas also experience environmental deprivation. It is part of the East London regeneration area and close to Docklands and the city airport. L O C AT I O N 4. • The refocusing of development opportunities into east and south east London. • The Millennium Dome. This will. 6 PART ONE . including a lack of green space. • Significant developments at Deptford Creek and the Peninsula.100 more dwellings between 1991 and 2001. depend to a large extent on continuing investment in transport infrastructure such as an extension of the Docklands Light Railway into the heart of Woolwich town centre and the Waterfront Transit scheme. • New uses for the Old Royal Naval College.4. resulting in: • The population growing by nearly 8.Ten out of the Borough’s seventeen wards.15 Greenwich ranks as the 41st most deprived local authority in England and the 9th most deprived Borough in London in terms of ‘extent’ of deprivation (Indices of Deprivation. primarily in the north of the Borough. • New developments along the Waterfront. and • The amount of derelict land reduced by 100 hectares. • New residential development in Thamesmead.17 The strategies formed within the previous Plan period have come to fruition. ODPM 2004). PA S T AC H I E V E M E N T S 4. • The inscription of Maritime Greenwich as a World Heritage Site. This position should be advantageous for attracting new investment. City airport and the channel tunnel are specifically opening up new international/pan European markets. • A new riverside park in Woolwich Town Centre.

including the Borough of Greenwich. does not exist on a social or economic island. POLICY CONTEXT EUROPEAN 5. These will include a Docklands Light Railway extension from London City Airport.000 new dwellings will be provided. • The provision of a number of new Thames Crossings. • Development at Warren Lane and MacBean Street to enhance the retail core of Woolwich. PART ONE 7 . trading patterns and investment. including transformation of the Dome into an international class sports arena. leisure facility and function centre. • Continued development of Thamesmead. multinational businesses and European organisations.F U T U R E O P P O RT U N I T I E S 4. Increasingly the country is influenced by decisions made on a European basis by the EU. to Woolwich Arsenal. In particular 1992 heralded the start of the single European Market with its consequent impact on firms. including a mixed-use residential-led development at Kidbrooke providing 4. • Household numbers growing to over 103. • Continued re-use and development of the former Royal Arsenal site in Woolwich and its listed buildings for a mix of uses. and open up a significant stretch of the Thames to the public with a riverside walk. • The regeneration of South Greenwich.1 The South East of England.000 by 2011.This will transform housing and the local infrastructure and tackle crime and exclusion and promote opportunity. plus the completion of Greenwich Millennium Village. shopping and transport facilities. which will provide a framework reference document for Regional Planning Guidance on European issues.18 The Plan period for the current plan is likely to see the following come to fruition: • Population growing by around 29. including Tripcock Point where approximately 2. including redevelopment of the New Haddo estate. • Substantial progress in the build-out of the Meridian Delta Limited Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula. The EU will be involved in planning and environmental issues through the European Spatial Development Perspective. the Blackwall-Silvertown Crossing and part of the Crossrail train network from north Kent beyond London.The introduction of the European Spatial Planning Policy will contribute to the objectives of sustainable development and employment. community and educational facilities. • Significant development in West Greenwich / Deptford Creekside providing new homes. • Construction of approximately 10. the Thames Gateway Bridge (across Gallion’s Reach).000 between 2001 and 2016.000 new homes by 2010. The rising European influence and competitiveness requires the Borough (as well as the rest of Britain) to increase its attractiveness to business by improving environmental quality.400 dwellings including 1. recognising its major tourism potential and including new linkages to enhance the commercial redevelopment of Woolwich. business skills and labour skills to enable it to compete more effectively across Europe. business space. 5.900 replacement affordable units and open spaces. and • The provision of Waterfront Transit. provide new leisure facilities.

It should concentrate on providing a strategic framework within which detailed policies can be framed in Part Two of the UDP. PPG12 ‘Development Plans’ (1999). and those related to individual sites. intense development pressures in the South East and mounting concern about transport. Part Two of the UDP sets out the local planning authority’s detailed policies and specific proposals for the development and use of land which will guide its day to day planning decisions. In particular the principles of sustainability are now incorporated into planning guidance. Development plans are intended to provide a firm basis for rational and consistent decisions on planning applications and appeals.2 The last ten years there has been an increasing awareness of environmental issues as part of the rising “green consciousness”. and provided a framework by which countries could develop their strategies.4 5.7 5. They provide a means for coordinating development. developers and business interests with a measure of certainty about what types of developments will and will not be permitted. including the provision of infrastructure. amenity bodies. The 1992 United Nations Earth Summit in Rio sought to minimise our negative impacts on the environment whilst continuing to improve our quality of life.N AT I O N A L 5. an authority can demonstrate in a positive way how the vision and strategy in the plan will be implemented in practical terms. Many of these issues have now worked through into national planning guidance as expressed in the Government’s Planning Policy Guidance (PPG) Notes.‘Agenda 21’ was the resulting document of actions required to work towards sustainable development. Policies in UDP’s may include those which relate to the whole or part of the plan area. Development plans should contain the local planning authority’s policies and proposals for the development and use of land. and protecting the local environment. provides a strategic overview of the role and importance of development plans within the planning system. During the three-year period. PPG12 also indicates that plans need to be clear.5 5. the Council will bring forward Local Development Documents to replace parts of the UDP in accordance with the Local Development Scheme 5. Properly used. setting out the criteria which will be used to judge whether planning applications should be allowed.” Under the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004. the UDP will retain ‘development plan status’ for a period of at least three years. whilst taking account of the interests of conservation. It outlines key issues on plan contents and procedures and stresses the importance that the Government attaches to the need for plans to be prepared and updated quickly and efficiently. succinct and easily understood. Planning Policy Statements (PPS) and Circulars. thus providing residents.3 5.6 5. PPS1: Delivering Sustainable Development (2005) states that the planning system should facilitate and promote sustainable and inclusive patterns of development. efficiency and amenity in the development and use of land. PPG12 states that “By identifying sites for development. the planning system can help to secure economy. The main function of Part One of a UDP is to state in broad terms the general policies and proposals of strategic importance for the development and use of land in the area.The planning system should work towards ensuring that development and growth are sustainable.8 8 PART ONE . They should provide a statement of the authority’s policies and proposals for the use of land in its area. There has been particular concern regarding levels of public transport investment and a growing recognition that partnership was a necessary mechanism to resolve many of the planning issues facing society. Greenwich Local Agenda 21 focuses the National Strategy and seeks to integrate environmental concerns prevalent in the Borough with social and economic issues Currently there are 16 PPGs and 9 PPSs on a variety of topics. A number of the PPGs are currently being revised and replaced by PPSs. taking account of national and regional policies.

Reinforce and strengthen existing economic and community strengths d. whilst other areas experience “overheating” from too much growth/development. b. This east/west imbalance is also reflected in London. The Thames Gateway Planning Framework (RPG9a . c. reducing travel demand and promoting wider choices in travel options. Provide a more sustainable pattern of development with better management of natural assets. The region as a whole is faced by a number of other issues such as the lack of affordable housing. 5. The focus of the Draft South East Plan is on enabling urban renaissance.9 The South East region is one of the most densely populated. Improving economic performance within Europe b. and d. making full use of existing infrastructure. for example along the M4.12 The Thames Gateway is also one of the national growth areas in the Government’s Sustainable Communities Plan (2003). which is a regional and national priority for regeneration (see below).REGIONAL 5. thereby reducing use of and reliance on the private car. promoting regeneration and renewal.1995) is supplementary guidance to RPG9 and identifies Thames Gateway as a major potential focus for growth and development. Maximise opportunities for new economic activity. London remains the focus of the region although competition from the rest of the South East as a potential location for services and industries is ever increasing particularly as a result of substantial infrastructure investment.The vision set out in guidance is to: a. Provide opportunity and equity for the Region’s population to reduce social exclusion. development pressured regions within the Country and these regional factors are all exemplified in the Capital. for example. Safeguard and enhance environmental assets. 5. Objectives for the Gateway include: a. economically active.The result has been that some areas suffer from high unemployment and lack regeneration. Encourage sustainable patterns of development. promoting a prosperous and multi-purpose countryside. Encourage a dynamic and robust economy. concentrating development in urban areas. It also provides the wider spatial framework for Thames Gateway. A key feature of the region is that economic growth is not spread evenly through the region but has favoured the west over the east.11 The Thames Gateway is the name given to the area that extends 43 miles long by 20 miles across from Lewisham and Tower Hamlets in London to Tilbury in Essex and the Isle of Sheppey in Kent. Within London Thames Gateway encompasses an area on either side of the River Thames extending eastward from Deptford and the Royal Docks but also extending up the Lea Valley to Stratford. created by improved transport connections to Europe c.The area has been identified by Government as the main area for development growth in the South East. for example Inner London. and of vacant and under used sites e. the M25. the need for public transport investment. Up to £446 million will be made available in the Thames Gateway to PART ONE 9 . The Draft South East Plan was published in March 2006 (Regional Spatial Strategy for the South East excluding London). highly congested. Ensure a higher quality of environment and quality of life.10 T H A M E S G AT E WAY 5. pressure on urban open spaces and countryside and a need to improve and enhance the environmental quality of the region.

The Plan has six objectives.000 homes to be provided in London and the growth areas by 2016. Government Circular 1/2000 clarifies that the Mayor must be consulted on a range of development proposals. on behalf of the Secretary of State.The London Boroughs. in additional to current plans. (Government Office for London) The Spatial Development Strategy. Under the Town and Country Planning (Mayor of London) Order 2000. Transport. including reviewing the Mayor’s draft strategies. Noise. in preparing their UDPs must be in general conformity with the Mayor’s Spatial Development Strategy (SDS).16 10 PART ONE . The London Plan (2004) .These include those in regionally identified Strategic Views and affecting Strategic Wharves on the Thames. Culture. London as a world city. together with the UDP (2006). vibrant urban living. the Mayor may direct the Council to refuse a planning application that conflicts with the Spatial Development Strategy or is ‘otherwise contrary to good strategic planning in Greater London’. social inclusion. which are summarised as follows:- 5. Circular 1/2000 states that the London Plan should cover a range of issues including sustainable development.This will be based on economic growth.14 5. the built and natural environment. quality public services and infrastructure. that there was potential for 200. called the London Plan. social inclusion and improvements in environmental management and the use of resources.15 5.13 The Greater London Authority Act 1999 created the Greater London Assembly and the Mayor of London. Economic Development. Air Quality.The Mayor is directly elected and has a number of statutory duties including to engage with the Assembly and the people of London. it interacts with strategies of differing timescales and is subject to ongoing monitoring and review. but covers issues beyond those considered the mainstream of the current statutory planning system. only deals with matters of strategic importance to London. The Plan also proposes regenerating existing deprived communities through access to 300.The London Assembly is a scrutinising body to provide a check and a balance on the Mayor. Waste Management and Biodiversity. echoed in the Communities Plan. The Mayor is responsible for strategic planning in London. marrying homes with jobs. including producing. reaffirms the Mayor’s vision to develop London as an exemplary sustainable world city. The Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004 has given the London Plan ‘development plan’ status. The Government Office for London has the responsibility. T H E M AYO R A N D T H E A S S E M B LY 5. forms the Development Plan for the Borough.000 new jobs in the Gateway by 2031. to ensure that the Mayoral strategies are prepared having regard to national and regional guidance. Although it has a formal end date of 2020.The Deputy Prime Minister announced in his July 2002 statement.The London Plan (2004). economic regeneration. and implementing a number of strategies covering Spatial Development. the treatment of town centres and the river Thames.create models of well designed.

consolidate the infrastructural base.To improve London’s accessibility • Provide a land-use framework for implementing the Mayor’s transport strategy. well-designed and green city • Integrate Spatial Development with the Mayor’s Environmental Strategies. community benefits. the sustainable use of resources.18 Objective 2:. build more accessible housing and address the needs of the breadth of London’s population • Advance the standards of local services including education. promote safe and networked access by modes other than the private car and encourage the sustainable movement of freight 5. protecting and enhancing designated open spaces 5.22 Objective 6:. foster dynamic growth sectors whilst encouraging research and development 5. health and other social and community services 5.20 Objective 4:.000 jobs created in this sub-region.17 Objective 1:. attract industries.000 additional homes and 249. cleanliness. historic conservation.19 Objective 3:. release identified surplus employment land.The Council will PART ONE 11 . thriving biodiversity.5. public safety and develop London’s cultural assets 5.To make London a more attractive. there are expected to be 104. The London Plan identifies locations where this new growth will predominately be provided: Areas of Intensification including Kidbrooke and Woolwich. use of London’s waterways and the protection of open spaces 5.To make London a more prosperous city with strong and diverse economic growth • Create a spatial framework to realise the Mayor’s Economic Development Strategy. provide transport-related services and infrastructure. con-ordinated services and improved access in suburban areas.To make London a better city for people to live in • Enhance the design of buildings and public spaces. Greenwich Peninsula and Thamesmead.23 East London is the Mayor’s priority area for development. improving air quality and assessing flood risk • Promote green industries. prevent discrimination and provide a spatial framework for education. health. densities and growth in line with public transport capacity in order to achieve an urban renaissance • Enable London and the Opportunity Areas to accommodate more jobs.To accommodate London’s growth within its boundaries without encroaching on open spaces • Maximising capacity.To promote social inclusion and tackle deprivation and discrimination • Tackle unemployment. and Opportunity Areas including Creekside. concentrated deprivation and homelessness by broadening access to education. During the London Plan period. reduce the need to travel and by encouraging development to locate near to public transport • Improve transport links between London and major transport interchanges.21 Objective 5:. tourism and create opportunities to stimulate the right economic growth locations • Develop a broad economic base. urban design. recycled land. new development and regeneration in the East London Priority Area and strengthen the role of suburban town centres • Promote co-ordination of area-based regeneration initiatives. employment opportunities. advice and training services • Encourage local participation in the development process. considering issues such as the consumption of energy and waste. regeneration and infrastructure improvement.

The London Plan also provides the policy context for the safeguarding of a number of named wharves on the River. The Partnership. plans and initiatives.27 12 PART ONE . leisure and tourist resource while the river is also used for the transport of freight and passengers. which is made up of the Council.The Strategy was completed and issued by the Greenwich Partnership in late 2003. through strategy aimed at London’s waterways (the Blue Ribbon Network). will jointly monitor progress annually against the Strategy’s vision and actions. why and how a service is being provided. jointly and through individual services. Many stretches of the river have undergone significant change in recent years while there continues to be strong development pressures along much of its length. BOROUGH OF GREENWICH 5. other public. Authorities will have to review the performance of all their services. private. following public consultation.25 There are also a number of other strategies which relate to all or parts of the Borough.The Council and its partners will contribute to securing its objectives at many levels.social. including planning. pinpointing the challenges and targeting the actions necessary to deliver real improvements. plans and initiatives.The key themes for the Greenwich Strategy are the areas of well being .24 The River Thames is one of London’s most important natural features. The Greenwich Strategy is the overarching plan for all these strategies.The river and its environs are a vital ecological. including the Thames Estuary Management Plan and Local Environment Agency Plan (LEAP) Action Plans. six of which are located in the Borough. It is a strategic document setting out the vision for the Borough for 2010 (see Section 2 above) and identifying medium and long term aims for the borough.B O R O U G H S T R AT E G I E S 5. community and voluntary sector agencies. charities and the private sector.work with the Mayor and sub-regional partnerships to help develop a coherent Sub-Regional Development Framework for East London. the National Lottery. O T H E R C R O S S . deals specifically with the River Thames and the Thames Policy Area between Hampton and Crayford Ness. The Local Government Act 1999 gives local authorities a duty of Best Value under which they are required to produce Best Value Performance Plans showing their record in delivering services and their plans for improving them. • Compare the performance with others. • Consult local people and businesses about the quality of the service. Europe. RIVER THAMES 5. economic and environmental issues facing the Borough are addressed through a variety of strategies. environmental and economic. It thus encompasses the whole of Greenwich’s waterfront and requires high standards of design and development for all schemes fronting the River Thames and Deptford Creek.26 The social. It provides the context for locally based bids for resources from Central Government. and • Use fair and open Competition to procure the service. The London Plan. over a five-year period. 5. Each service is considered against: • Challenge.

• Greenwich Equality Policy.To facilitate Best Value a comprehensive sets of targets and indicators have been set out in Chapter 11: Implementation. • Open Space Strategy.28 Other strategies that are considered by policies throughout this plan. • Neighbourhood Renewal: A New Way of Doing Business (2002). 2003. but will draw upon the land use policies contained here to implement projects requiring physical development. • Greenwich Biodiversity Action Plan. plans and proposals. • Green Space Strategy (2006). • Transport Strategy (2001) and Draft Local Implementation Plan (2005). and • Tourism Strategy: Greenwich: A Place to Visit? 2004-10.29 The role of the UDP is to provide guidance and advice on the land use implications of these other Council strategies. • Health Improvement Plan 2002-05. • Education Development Plan 2002-07. 5. • Cultural Strategy for Greenwich: Making Culture Matter (2004). contain their own detailed objectives. • Contaminated Land Inspection Strategy (2002). • Energy Strategy (2002). • Children & Young People’s Plan 2006-08. • Regeneration Strategy Draft 2006-2020. • Business and Enterprise Framework 2004-08. Strategies adopted or in preparation by the Council include: • Air Quality Action Plan (2002). • Creating Safer Greenwich: Crime & Disorder Strategy. 5. • Corporate Equality Plan 2003-2006. • Social Inclusion & Justice Strategy 2002-06. • Sports Strategy: Fit for Sport 2004-2008. • Local Agenda 21 (1997). • Economic Development Strategy for Greenwich 2002-07. • Housing Strategy 2002-07 & Annual Housing Investment Programme. • Greenwich Municipal Waste Management Strategy. • Annual Corporate and Performance Plans.These will form the basis for monitoring the implementation of the Plan policies in the Annual Monitoring Report. PART ONE 13 .

To retain. To ensure the development of balanced and mixed communities and to meet the varying needs of households. To retain and improve the existing housing stock. To provide. by providing a suitable range of dwellings by type. communities and neighbourhoods. size and affordability. that new development provides for the infrastructure. and by promoting efficient use of employment land and improvements to business infrastructure. especially the priority needs of the most disadvantaged individuals. existing businesses. To resist the loss of employment land and premises in active employment use or that are well suited for continued employment use. Housing SH1 SH2 To provide sufficient land to allow for the completion of at least 16.100 net additional dwellings between 1997 and 2016. Benefits & Services SC1 SC2 To ensure that development policies reflect the needs of all the Borough’s residents. facilities. Jobs & the Local Economy SJ1 To expand and diversify the Borough’s economic base and employment opportunities by identifying good quality employment sites. To ensure that significant employment generators are accessible by public transport.1 In developing its planning strategy for this Unitary Development Plan the Council has adopted the following policies: Community Needs. To encourage training and the development of the skills of the Borough workforce. areas of deprivation and areas of new development.6. In order to secure the best use of land and a properly planned environment the council will seek to ensure. consolidate and retain community facilities within the area they serve. To provide a high quality sustainable residential environment and to ensure that new housing is built to a high quality design. and encourage the expansion of. SC3 SJ2 SJ3 SJ4 SJ5 SH3 SH4 14 PART ONE . especially in areas of deficiency. amenities and other planning benefits which are necessary to support and serve it and to offset any consequential planning loss to the local area. STRATEGIC PLANNING POLICIES 6. through the use of conditions and planning obligations attached to planning permissions. especially those with special needs. and to promote the provision of premises for small and growing firms. and to ensure that the benefits of economic activity are shared by all sections of the community including those disadvantaged or facing discrimination in relation to the job market.

Golf courses. iii. To ensure that all communities. vi. Maintaining and increasing suitable recreational facilities. v. biodiversity and open space features throughout the urban environment. iv.The needs of disadvantaged communities and groups with special requirements will be given emphasis. residents and workers have adequate access to open space and the riverside. The Council will facilitate the regeneration and renewal of South Greenwich to alleviate the physical and social isolation of the area and to enable the development of mixed communities and sustainable neighbourhoods. woodlands and orchards. Public and private open space. Community Open Space.SH5 The scale of housing need in the Borough for affordable housing is such that the Council will seek to ensure that at least 35% of the dwellings provided between 1997 and 2016 are affordable to those on low and lower incomes. PART ONE 15 . Recognising the value of landscape. viii. SO2 To safeguard. SO3 SO4 vii. ii. especially in areas of public open space deficiency. Cemeteries and associated crematoria. ii. iv. Agriculture. Large grounds attached to educational facilities and institutions. small open spaces) that fulfil a specific function for the local and wider community and encourage full use of their facilities. Identifying and conserving sites of nature conservation importance and. Nature conservation. Metropolitan Open Land. Open spaces of strategic importance (Metropolitan Open Land) will be maintained and their character safeguarded from built development and enhanced as appropriate. Open Spaces SH6 SO1 To adopt a positive approach to the use and treatment of open space by: i. Allotments. Open water features. iii. Improving the environmental quality of open spaces. improve and enhance the character of existing public and private open space (Green Belt. sportsgrounds and playing fields. The only uses considered to be generally appropriate within MOL are: i.

smell and toxic materials. the following priorities should be considered in preparing development proposals and transport policies and projects: i. wildlife habitats. noise. safety and the built and natural environment. by restraining road traffic. To promote safe transport in general. SD2 SD3 SD4 SD5 To encourage the use of sustainable forms of transport. To preserve or enhance areas of recognised and valued character. To protect areas liable to river or tidal flooding. To improve areas of poor quality environment. SM3 Pedestrians. and to protect Listed Buildings of architectural or historic interest and their settings. then Car users and powered two wheeled vehicles. people with disabilities. for the Borough. To promote the use of previously developed land. cycling and public transport.Environmental Protection SE1 SE2 SE3 SE4 To encourage environmentally sustainable forms of development. such as walking. cyclists and public transport users first . To reduce the generation of waste and to encourage re-use and recycling of waste. woodland. To protect and improve the environment in termsof air and water quality. parking control and development control. particularly in respect of sensitive local areas. fine views. including historic landscapes. and to ensure new developments make efficient and appropriate use of land. and London as a whole. and particularly safe and convenient movement for pedestrians and cyclists. meeting the requirements of the Road Traffic Reduction Act and Local Air Quality Management Plans. and safeguarding the environment through mechanisms such as traffic management. wetlands and wildflower meadows. particularly for those presently disadvantaged in mobility terms. Design & Conservation SD1 The Council will encourage a high quality of design in all new developments and alterations to existing developments which positively contribute to the improvement of their accessibility. and reduce the impact of pollution. Generally. particularly in respect of safer journeys to school. especially from transport and industrial processes. SM4 16 PART ONE . To preserve or enhance Conservation Areas. open land. To seek equitable levels of mobility and accessibility for all groups of people. at no or minimal cost to the environment. trees. Movement SM1 SM2 To effectively link major transport generators and attractors to the current and foreseeable transport network. ii.

walking. To safeguard the Crossrail route. PART ONE 17 . STC5 To improve town centre accessibility by a choice of means of transport. Greenwich is the borough’s largest District Centre. and other important heritage features. and the Borough’s largest and second shopping and office employment centres respectively.They are preferred locations for larger scale development in retail. 32 Neighbourhood Parades complement the formal town centre hierarchy and typically have less than 20 shops offering basic convenience goods and services within walking distance. usually including a small supermarket. This would include necessary new infrastructure and services.B. and linked trips. STC3 To safeguard and enhance safety. leisure. District and Local Centres.SM5 To promote a fully integrated public transport system that is extensive in coverage and meets the needs of residents. Six District Centres offer a significant range of both comparison shopping and a supermarket or range of food shops. To assist the local and London economy commensurate with safeguarding the environment. and to preserve and enhance historic buildings. businesses. cycling. leisure and other town centre uses. a high frequency Metro style rail network of turn up and go services. STC4 To promote a high standard of design in town centre buildings and public and civic spaces. visitors and the business community. Woolwich Rail Crossing and DLR (Woolwich) Extension. workers and visitors. Town Centres SM6 SM7 STC1 To safeguard and improve the vitality. Provision of a minimum range of retailing and services will be safeguarded. Greenwich Waterfront Transit is another strategic scheme the Council supports and will be safeguarded as and when appropriate. Woolwich and Eltham are designated Major Centres. comfort. Retail developments will be subject to need and sequential testing. improved interchanges and common high standards. and are suitable locations for appropriately scaled town centre uses to serve their local catchment. access. and in addition a major visitor destination and an inscribed World Heritage site. Thames Gateway Bridge and to have regard to notification requirements in respect of a third Blackwall crossing (to Silvertown Way in L. ii. employment service and residential centres for residents. Proposals that serve this wider market must respect both its heritage and its service role to local residents. workers and visitors in the Borough. security. and its network of Neighbourhood Parades. and to reduce congestion and pollution in town centres by promoting public transport. commercial viability and sustainability of the Borough’s Town Centres as retail. They are appropriate locations for a variety of town centre uses scaled to serve the population of their sub-region without harming the vitality and viability Woolwich or Eltham. as set out below and in tables TC1 and TC2: i. Newham). the Council will promote the movement of freight by more sustainable modes such as water and rail. iv. changes to the strategic public transport and road networks in respect of Deptford Church Street junction realignment. amenity and the environment within the Borough’s town centres for residents. A new Local Centre will be developed by Kidbrooke Station as part of the Kidbrooke Development Area. STC2 To support the Borough’s Town Centre hierarchy of Major. Seven Local Centres offer a moderate range of shopping and service activities. iii.

cultural and recreational potential. SW2 The Council recognises and will seek to enhance the value of the River Thames and Deptford Creek as waterways rich in biodiversity and environmental quality. subject to the need to: i. iii. bringing about the regeneration of the whole area and realising its economic. sporting and entertainment activities for participation and enjoyment by all sections of the community. and That major tourist facilities are well served by public transport. Implementation SIM1 To monitor and review the UDP regularly to ensure it remains up-to-date. culture. as Open Spaces. SIM2 To attract the necessary resources to implement the plan. Waterfront SW1 The Council will facilitate the redevelopment and re-use of remaining redundant land and buildings in the Waterfront during the Plan period. to secure the sustainable development of balanced waterfront communities. continue to work in partnerships and consult widely on the UDP and other planning documents. To promote the provision of facilities for tourists in appropriate locations. Diversify the tourism base of the Borough’s economy by seeking facilities which embrace a wide range of arts. environmental. social. and an essential part of the Borough’s character and landscape in their own right. ii. the amenities of the local community and the environment of the Borough.Tourism ST1 The Council supports and promotes tourism. Protect the housing stock. SIM3 To use relevant planning powers in the implementation of the plan. ST2 iv. Ensure that tourism is managed to provide benefits for local communities and businesses. 18 PART ONE . recognising that it has a positive and significant role to play in securing the economic and environmental regeneration of the Borough particularly in the Waterfront areas.

PART TWO .

.

especially the priority needs of the most disadvantaged individuals. health.2 SC2 SC3 Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 1. sexuality or ethnic background. It recognises the ways in which land use and transportation policies can affect some people more than others because of differences in personal mobility arising from factors such as age. To provide. through the use of conditions and planning obligations attached to planning permissions. consolidate and retain community facilities within the area they serve. 1. Disadvantaged Groups There are a number of groups in the Borough who are disadvantaged by the built environment. that new development provides for the infrastructure. The strategic policy for opportunities for all is: To ensure that development policies reflect the needs of all the Borough’s residents. communities and neighbourhoods.1. BENEFITS & SERVICES 21 . amenities and other planning benefits which are necessary to support and serve it and to offset any consequential planning loss to the local area.4 COMMUNITY NEEDS. COMMUNITY NEEDS.The needs of groups facing discrimination and deprivation are examined and areas of deprivation and their specific community needs are identified. needs and services are: In order to secure the best use of land and a properly planned environment the council will seek to ensure.The general policies for community benefits.3 Community Needs Community needs have been examined through identifying disadvantaged groups and areas of deprivation in the Borough. disability. facilities. The chapter sets out the Council’s approach to community benefits and goes on to detail the broad needs for a wide range of community services ranging from local community facilities to health and educational establishments. especially in areas of deficiency. caring responsibilities. Table C1 sets those groups out.This chapter contains the policy context. gender.1 The Council’s approach to social inclusion and equal opportunities applies to all the policy areas contained within the Plan. income. integrated and multi-agency approach but that planning has a role to play within such approaches. BENEFITS & SERVICES GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 1. SC1 1. areas of deprivation and areas of new development. It is recognised that these needs have to be addressed in a comprehensive. Particular issues are addressed by policies in this chapter and elsewhere in the Plan.

Glyndon (38%). Maintain economic activity in Borough. leisure facilities and open space. Sympathetic policies for community buildings. ill-health and in the Borough to provide reduced standards of living. Community facilities: places of worship for different religions. Encourage growth of service sector. Thamesmead Moorings 7% (2001 Census) Leads to poverty and Maintain economic activity deprivation.Training. Transport: inaccessible. Policies/ Land Use Sheltered housing. Problems of access to all health and other facilities. accessible. Employment: higher unemployment rate. Issues Housing: Inaccessible. Accessible/adapted housing. meeting places. particularly by women and older people. Housing mix. reliable public transport. shops. including unsafe elements. Housing: dependence on public sector. Provision of facilities and conveniences. BENEFITS & SERVICES . Need for training. Employment: inaccessible places of work and lack of sheltered employment. harassment. UNEMPLOYED PEOPLE 5% (2001 Census) Woolwich Riverside 9%. special requirements for larger and extended families. Accessible new buildings. Woolwich Riverside (36%) (2001 Census) 22 COMMUNITY NEEDS. Transport: dependence on public transport. Middle Park & Sutcliffe 20% (2001 Census). Employment opportunities. job opportunities. MINORITY ETHNIC COMMUNITIES 23% (2001 Census) Particularly Woolwich Common (41%). Disabled facilities at work. demand for setting up/running small businesses. Allocate sites. Building design and landscapes not always conducive to personal safety. Affordable housing. Flexible policies on small businesses. particularly women and refugee communities. Kidbrooke with Hornfair 20 %. Encourage the provision of affordable public transport. Language needs for some groups. unsuitably designed.TABLE C1: GROUPS MOST DISADVANTAGED BY THE BUILT ENVIRONMENT Disadvantaged Group DISABLED PEOPLE Numbers Affected 17% had a Limiting Long Term Illness (2001 Census) Distribution in the Borough Borough-wide. Cheap.Translation of Council documents when possible and interpretation provisions. Accessible public transport and community transport.

(2001 Census) Southern Wards most affected such as Coldharbour & Eltham. sick. Accessible community facilities. Majority are women. Shoppers’ crèches. Housing: dependent on public housing. Domiciliary services. Policies/ Land Use Workplace nurseries. health clinics. problems of maintenance. many part-time.Transport dependent on public transport.care centres. Numbers rising. Employment opportunities. Childcare facilities. Community nurseries. need for community care and facilities. COMMUNITY NEEDS. 2001 Census) Affordable. Community facilities accessible day care centres. 6. many homeless. people with disabilities and older people. Children’s Centres with integrated centres for under fives and their families. Hostels. access and security. Shopping: lack of accessibility to shops for pushchairs and few childcare facilities. Day. Personal safety: rise in crime against the person disproportionately affects women. Caring: are majority of carers of children. BENEFITS & SERVICES 23 . lack of childcare. Poverty is a particular problem. Accessible buildings including ramps and handrails. Welfare/ heath: low income group. Housing: dependent on public housing. Woolwich Riverside 15%. Local shops. Cheap.Training. poorer conditions. LONE PARENTS 14%-13. Children’s Centres with integrated centres for under fives and their families. Housing: high dependence on public housing and rented sector. hospitals and health centres.Transport: few women with access to cars so dependent on public transport. health problems increase need for health care and social service provision.5% over 75's. safe and accessible public transport. Access: many may be infirm and have similar needs to people with disabilities. reliable public transport. accessible. Community facilities access to health and other facilities. OLDER PEOPLE 13% over pensionable age. Good public transport. Eltham North and Eltham South (2001 Census) Sheltered housing and special needs housing.Disadvantaged Group WOMEN Numbers Affected 52% (2001 Census) Distribution in the Borough Borough-wide Issues Employment: lower wages. etc. Affordable housing. Reliable. Safety conscious design of built environment. (2001 Census) Northern Wards most affected Woolwich Common 16%. Local shopping. Caring: lack of facilities contribute to restricted employment opportunities and adds to isolation. accessible housing. Better access. Glyndon 15% (Lone parent households with dependent children.133 households. Supported housing.

Work-place nurseries. Access to schools. Discourage out of town shopping centres.2% (2001 Census) Northern Wards most affected such as Woolwich Common (10%). NON-CAR OR VAN OWNERS 41% (2001 Census) Northern Wards most affected including Woolwich Riverside (55%). need for single housing unit. hospitals. health clinics.Totally inadequate nursery provision to meet growing demand. BENEFITS & SERVICES . opportunities for young homeless and young care leavers. accessible reliable public transport. community nurseries. High rates of injuries from road accidents due to poor road layout and/or environment and the priority given to road users. wheelchairs and buggies). Transport: dependent on public transport. reliable public transport. affordable housing. Safer pedestrian environment and cycleway. Woolwich Riverside (9%). LESBIANS. Transport: dependent on public transport. UNDER FIVES Many live in areas of stress in high-rise flats. need for purpose-built Lesbian and Gay Centre in safe environment. accessible. Housing: homelessness a major problem. Shopping: local shops essential. play space. Glyndon (48%) (2001 Census) Cheap. Community facilities. living in poverty in a poor environment with little access to gardens or play space. Woolwich Common (51%). Community facilities: local health and other facilities essential. Supported housing. Thamesmead Moorings (9%) (2001 Census) Lack of temporary Hostels. Protection of local shops. Children’s Centres with integrated centres for under fives and their families. Safe walking routes are essential (including routes which are safe for those who use mobility aids such as scooters. hostels.Training housing. affordable housing. Housing: need for accessible and/or adapted housing.Disadvantaged Group HOMELESS PEOPLE Numbers Affected Distribution in the Borough Issues Policies/ Land Use In 2005-2006 Not Known Greenwich Council accepted responsibility for housing 971 homeless households. Need for health clinics and support services. Accessible health services. need for hostels for young lesbians and gay men excluded by parents. 7. accommodation and cheap single unit housing. 24 COMMUNITY NEEDS. Lack of training opportunities. Cheap. Safety conscious design in built environment. Reducing road traffic accidents and improving housing conditions CARERS 9% Borough-wide (2001 Census). Community facilities: need for day care centres and other temporary help. Personal safety: for example. GAY 10% estimated MEN AND for all or some BISEXUAL PEOPLE part of lives Borough-wide Single unit housing. Glyndon (9%).

Housing • A variety of homes. Education: irregularity a problem. i. advice and culturally sensitive services. • A safe and accessible environment around homes with gardens and play space for children. safe and supported housing to meet different needs are available as part of any major new development. Employment: needed for retraining where wanted. Skills centre and training. Education: integrated at local level. PEOPLE WITH 12% Estimated LEARNING nationally DIFFICULTIES AND MENTAL HEALTH NEEDS TRAVELLERS AND ROMANY PEOPLE Approximately 50 families on Thistlebrook site. • Choice of tenure to ensure that affordable. Accessible health facilities and Social Services support. 1. affordable. such as Dial-a-Ride.Transport: access to special transport. Sheltered employment integrated education. COMMUNITY NEEDS. • Transport schemes for the community.e. close to where people live.to people with disabilities and geographically.welfare benefits. Temporary and permanent sites needed London-wide. Access to health and social services.They may also encounter barriers in accessing other mainstream provision . often have low incomes and are disadvantaged by lack of transport and access to health and other facilities. including special needs and hostels. safe and reliable public transport . legal representation. Accessible Social Services and health services. sheltered employment. Transport • Cheap. hostels and sheltered housing. Housing: lack of permanent accommodation Londonwide. lack of properly serviced sites for temporary accommodation. Several key issues with implications for planning policies can be identified and are set out below. Official site at Abbey Wood/ unauthorised sites vary.Disadvantaged Group Numbers Affected Distribution in the Borough Borough-wide Issues Housing: often related to stress from living in unsuitable housing and/or environments. Employment training and retraining. BENEFITS & SERVICES 25 . accessible.5 The Disadvantaged Groups identified in Table C1 share many common experiences: they all face discrimination in obtaining access to employment and housing.Varying numbers on unauthorised sites. Policies/ Land Use Supported housing including hostels and sheltered housing. accessible. Cultural and recreational provisions. Increasing demand for supported housing. women’s safe transport and existing community transport. accessible and safe. work and shop.

and bring health benefits. those with physical or learning needs. through provision of toilets. Jobs • Improving employment opportunities through encouraging a variety of employment including small businesses and initiatives such as community and social enterprise.walking. the proportion is much higher than this (55% and 51%. • Training to enable people to overcome disadvantage in the labour market and provide them with new skills to match job opportunities. • Improving outdoor air quality and safety through measures to reduce car dependency. baby feeding areas and play areas including crèches. Encouraging walking and cycling through the creation of safe. • User-friendly amenities and design. cycling and public transport . to meet the needs of all. • Access for disabled people. religious and social needs. older people. etc. contributing to the Department of Health Targets and reductions in traffic accidents. • Meeting places for special cultural. Social Services. • The importance of public transport for people who do not have access to a car: around 41% of households in Greenwich. particularly elderly people and people with disabilities. older people and people with disabilities.and reducing car use will be essential to meeting air quality targets. and parents and carers with young children. 26 COMMUNITY NEEDS. particularly for children. and cyclists. Environment • Access for people with disabilities. respectively – 2001 Census). BENEFITS & SERVICES . self-employment and Intermediate Labour Markets. • Improving the environment for pedestrians. In parts of Greenwich. wide doors and lifts.6 Table C2 provides a cross reference to the key policies for disadvantaged groups contained in other chapters of the Plan. use of appropriate lighting. • Childcare facilities such as workplace nurseries. such as Woolwich Riverside and Woolwich Common. • Facilities to meet the needs of people with disabilities. Community Services • Social support through the provision of accessible Health. attractive walking and cycling routes and pedestrian only areas. • Personal safety should be an important consideration in the layout and design of the built environment and open spaces. children. Shopping • Local Shopping areas and parades. such as seating and rest areas. day care and child care.• Prioritising environmentally friendly transport . etc. • Facilities for children including separate baby changing areas. 1. contrast and surface textures.

SO3: O9: O10: O12: O15: O25: 5. SJ5: J13: J14: J15: J16: Jobs and the Local Economy Strategic Policy Quality Jobs Training and Business Support Community Benefits Accessibility 3. SD1: SD4: D1: D4: D5: D6: D7: D32: 7. Housing SH2: Strategic Policy SH5: Strategic Policy H7: Housing Design H12: Children’s Play Areas H13: Housing Improvement H14: Affordable Housing H15: Housing Mix H16: Non Self-Contained Accommodation H17: Lifetime Homes H18: Sheltered Housing H19/20: Wheelchair Standard Housing H21: Supported Housing H22: Travellers and Romany people 4. BENEFITS & SERVICES 27 .General Principles Extension of the Public Transport Network COMMUNITY NEEDS. SM2: SM3: SM4: M1: M4: Open Spaces Strategic Policy Public Open Space Deficiency Areas Community Benefits Park Facilities Recreational Footpaths & Cycleways Environmental Education Environmental Protection Strategic Policy Strategic Policy Traffic Restraint and Reduction Measures Design and Conservation Strategic Policy Strategic Policy Urban Design Environmental Improvements Parking and Access Arrangements Access for People with Disabilities Safety and Security in the Environment Environmental Improvements Movement Strategic Policy Strategic Policy Strategic Policy Development and Transport .TABLE C2: KEY POLICIES FOR DISADVANTAGED GROUPS 2. SE1: SE2: E7: 6.

which contains relatively prosperous and less well off areas.These provide a geographical context for allocating resources in the Borough. is to direct resources. STC2: STC3: STC5: TC5: TC9: TC12: TC15: TC17: TC19: TC25/ TC26: 9. 2004). this is also an area that contains an already disadvantaged community. can make a valuable contribution to the effectiveness of the planning system.Ten out of the Boroughs seventeen wards. in conjunction with new development. Many of the Plan’s policies thus refer to these areas of deprivation. W4: Accessible Public Transport Transport Interchanges Retention and Improvement of Public Transport Facilities Community Benefits Cycling Pedestrians People with Disabilities . Some of these areas also experience environmental deprivation. ST2: T1: 10. however. DETR Indices of Deprivation 2004). Servicing and Parking Tourism Strategic Policy Location and Criteria Waterfront Thamesmead 1. Such areas of deprivation suffer from a combination of economic and social problems. primarily in the north of the Borough. One of the Plan’s major objectives. ODPM. towards these areas.M6: M11: M12: M28: M32: M33: M34: 8. economic and environmental conditions and to facilitate neighbourhood renewal. including a lack of green space. contain areas within the most deprived 10% in England. Community Benefits The Borough continues to have many opportunities for major development especially along the Waterfront.7 Areas of Deprivation Greenwich ranks as the 41st most deprived local authority in England and the 9th most deprived Borough in London in terms of ‘extent’ of deprivation (Indices of Deprivation. It is therefore vital that the Council ensures that new development is not at the cost of those communities and that regeneration is balanced to take into account their needs. Fringe and Local Shopping Frontages Essential Local Facilities in Neighbourhood Parades and Freestanding Premises Site Access.9 28 COMMUNITY NEEDS. Studies carried out at enumeration. ward and district level have identified geographic clusters of deprivation (Breadline Greenwich 1994. whether Council. in line with the London Plan. BENEFITS & SERVICES .8 1.Access in Public Areas Town Centres Strategic Policy Strategic Policy Strategic Policy Woolwich Town Centre: Pedestrian and Cycle Access The Multi-Functional Role of Greenwich Town Centre Greenwich Town Centre:Traffic Management and Transport Links Eltham Town Centre:Traffic Management. Ward Poverty Profiles 1994. to help meet the specific needs of these areas. Streetscape and Environmental Quality Protected Core.There is considerable variation within the Borough. The use of planning conditions and obligations. leading to the need to improve social.The use of conditions and planning 1. other public sector or private sector.

12 COMMUNITY NEEDS. When considering proposals for development which require planning permission. These include: Policy C3: Policy J6: Policy J12: Policy J14: Policy J15: Policy H11: Policy H12: Policy H14: Policy O9: Policy O10: Policy O16: Major Residential Developments. Children’s Play Areas. They can ensure that the environment is safeguarded and the development provides for the infrastructure. Section 106 of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990 empowers local authorities to seek such “planning benefits” from new development through agreement with developers. Further reforms could include the introduction of an ‘Optional Planning Charge’. facilities and amenities needed to support it. The Department for Local Communities and Government proposes to reform the operation of planning obligations. reasonable in all other respects. appropriate planning benefits which meet the ‘tests’ set out above. the Council will seek either through provision by the developer or through financial payment of all or part of the cost of provision. BENEFITS & SERVICES 29 . Training and Business Support Community Benefits. relevant to planning. Policy SC2 sets out the Part One policy whilst policies within the topic chapters identify community benefits that might be sought in relation to particular development proposals. Circular 05/2005 ‘Planning Obligations’ provides more detailed guidance on the use of planning obligations and the type of “planning benefits” which are considered reasonable. Unacceptable developments should not be permitted because of unrelated benefits offered by the applicant. directly related to the proposed development. Public Open Space Deficiency Areas. fairly and reasonably related in scale and kind to the proposed developments. Barker recommended the introduction of a ‘Planning Gain Supplement’ whereby the developer would pay a financial sum. to contribute to wider community benefits.obligations is guided by both legislation and government policy. Industrial and Business Developments. Community Benefits Riverside Footpath. neither should acceptable development be refused permission simply because the applicant is unwilling or unable to offer unrelated benefits.10 necessary. or by means of financial payment to the local authority to make the necessary provision. It states that planning obligations should only be sought where they are: • • • • • 1. Circular 05/2005 sets out reforms relating to the negotiation of planning obligations.The Government will make a decision on the Planning Gain Supplement at the same time as that on the Optional Planning Charge. 1. A decision on the Optional Planning Charge will be made in the context of the Government’s response to the Barker Review of Housing Supply (March 2004). whereby a developer could choose to accept a standard charge instead of entering into a negotiated agreement.11 1. Affordable Housing. Work/Live Units. Obligations can be provided either directly by the developer on or off site.There are a wide range of planning benefits which the Council considers would be appropriate for planning obligations. measured from the uplift in land values resulting from a grant of planning permission. Amenity Space and Gardens.

13 Community Services Services to support the community are provided by a variety of agencies to meet the health.15 30 COMMUNITY NEEDS. Poor housing. These facilities provide an important resource to the whole community and to support particularly disadvantaged groups and areas of deprivation. and in some instances through the provision of voluntary sector grants to promote social inclusion. Air Quality Assessments Site Servicing. Transport Community Benefits. BENEFITS & SERVICES . high traffic levels and consequent pollution and lack of opportunity to exercise. working in partnership with them. Car Parking.General Principles. Key Town Centre Uses and the Sequential Approach Mixed Use Areas Policy D30/31: Archaelogy.14 1. social and religious needs of people living in the Borough. New Housing Developments .This will be through supporting and influencing the plans and proposals of the Health and other authorities. which generally have a higher demand for health. Development and Transport . Extension of the Public Transport Network Accessible Public Transport. 1. educational. Major Tourism Development. training and educational opportunities. Greenwich Waterfront Transit. social and welfare services. lack of employment. welfare. Cycling. which may result from a lack of open space and safe. Pedestrians.Policy O17: Policy O23: Policy O24: Policy E6: Policy E12: Policy E15: Policy D4: Policy M1: Policy M3: Policy M4: Policy M6: Policy M10 Policy M19: Policy M20: Policy M27: Policy M28: Policy M32: Policy M33: Policy T1: Policy TC16: Policy W3: Cycleways along the riverfront and through open spaces Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites Management of Wildlife Sites. Improvements to the Urban and Natural Environment. it is concerned to see that the needs of the community and its disadvantaged groups are met. attractive pedestrian and cycle routes.Traffic Calming Measures. Although in many instances the Council is not directly responsible for providing a service. 1. Health It is recognised increasingly that patterns of land-use and development can have a significant impact on the health of individuals and communities. Specific Improvements. Waste Recycling. Travel Plans.

retaining students in education beyond the age of 16. a pattern of well resourced all-through primary schools. and introduced the G Plus network to provide for Post 16 education across the Borough. Primary Health Care centres are being developed in the Borough to provide integrated health and social care services.18 COMMUNITY NEEDS. By 2010. Education Through the Greenwich Strategy. The Council and the GTPCT are developing and integrating services for children through the Children’s Trust. Programmes are underway that tackle the causes of ill health and the Borough is working towards meeting NHS targets. By 2010. Creekside. Greenwich is a Pathfinder Authority for the “Building for the Future” programme. and the need for a multi-agency approach to addressing the causes of ill health. this will be achieved by raising school pupil performances. which seeks to provide environments suitable for a 21st century education across secondary schools nationwide.all impact upon health and quality of life.The Council has an important role in providing community care under the National Health Service and Community Care Act 1990. East Greenwich. which also provides a number of community health services. Other services are provided at the Goldie Leigh and Memorial Hospital sites. the Greenwich Partnership aims to ensure the Borough is a place where people are successful learners throughout their lives. planning has an important role to play by ensuring that development does not exacerbate health inequalities. and by creating accessible lifelong learning opportunities.The Council’s Integrated Regeneration Strategy recognises the key contribution that raising education standards can make to the sustainable social and economic regeneration of the Borough.17 1. and Mental Health and Learning Disability Services from Oxleas NHS Trust.The former is primarily based at the Old Royal Naval 1. Local hospital services are commissioned from the Queen Elizabeth Hospital NHS Trust. aims to increase equality as do the ‘CARE’ partnership and arts and sports initiatives.Trinity College of Music and Greenwich Community College. Since April 2004. community awareness and involvement. the new children’s centres programme has built on the good practice within these Sure Start areas and will establish new and improved services within all the disadvantaged wards in the Borough. the Greenwich Strategy aims to have provided high quality and accessible health and social care services for all the Borough’s residents. Woolwich Town Centre and the Millennium Village. Six Sure Start areas have also been designated in the Borough to support parents and carers with the task of bringing up children under five. This will provide a substantial investment into secondary schools throughout the Borough. While not all factors affecting health come within the remit of planning. BENEFITS & SERVICES 31 . which has rebalanced the distribution of school places to reflect parental preferences and local needs. The Council will increase nursery provision through the Neighbourhood Nurseries initiative and alongside this will provide support for parents and carers through Sure Start services. Centres exist in Kidbrooke. Charlton. The Health Authority has to consult with the local authority when considering new development or closures.These emphasise prevention. The main providers of higher and further education in the Borough are Greenwich University. Close co-operation is required to ensure that Health facilities in the Borough are adequate to meet the needs of the community and the additional requirements of disadvantaged groups and areas of deprivation. The commissioning of local health care services is the responsibility of Greenwich Teaching Primary Care Trust (GTPCT). 1.The Council is also a pathfinder for the ‘Extended Schools’ initiative and aims to provide a range of Council and other community services through co-location or integration with schools. a complementary and diverse pattern of secondary schools and post 16 provision delivered through the G Plus network. Improving Health and Cutting Inequalities.The Council has completed a major schools reorganisation. The main hospital within the Borough is the Queen Elizabeth Hospital at Woolwich Common.The partnership group.16 Within the Borough there are significant health inequalities.The Borough’s vision for education is for a network of early years centres. Poor health is also linked to poverty and affects particular areas of the Borough. but results in an improved environment for everyone.

or (ii) it would enable the implementation of a strategy for the provision of a community service in the Borough. will only be granted where: (i) alternative community facilities of a similar nature are provided locally in the area within which that facility serves. and (vi) the needs of disadvantaged groups or areas of deprivation have been taken into account. as are the economic and other benefits they bring to the Borough. (v) Access for people with disabilities. (v) the location for such community facilities is in or on the edge of a town or local centre. public transport and people with disabilities. Devonport and Dreadnought House in Greenwich Town centre and two sites in Avery Hill. (vi) A high standard of design is achieved (See Policy D1) (vii) Appropriate car parking provision (See Policy M26 & M27) C2 Planning permission which would result in the loss of community facilities through change of use or redevelopment.The role of higher education in the Borough in this is acknowledged. BENEFITS & SERVICES . (ii) The scale of the development is appropriate to the location. particularly of people with higher order skills necessary for London to remain a globally competitive city”.The latter is based at a number of sites in the Borough. Proposals elsewhere must demonstrate a special need for the particular location which overrides the objective of supporting town and local centres. The Old Royal Naval College is also the home of Trinity College. 32 COMMUNITY NEEDS. Proposals elsewhere must demonstrate a special need for the particular location which overrides the objective of supporting town and local centres. (iv) There is no unacceptable impact on the amenity of neighbouring residents. cycle. businesses are able to gain access to the skills they require and future employers will be attracted to the area.The London Plan points out that higher education institutions “are also important feeders into the labour supply. 1. cycle and public transport. ensuring that local people are able to benefit from these in terms of job opportunities. Policies Community Services C1 The Council will support proposals for new or extended or enhanced community facilities particularly where they meet the needs of disadvantaged groups or areas of the Borough subject to the following criteria: (i) The location for such facilities is in or on the edge of a town or local centre. or (iii) the site is either demonstrably unsuitable for continued use as a community facility or is vacant and no community use is forthcoming despite active site marketing on realistic terms Provided that: (iv) the alternative or remaining community facilities are easily accessible for those they are intended to serve by foot.19 A well-trained and educated resident workforce will be essential to the success of regeneration schemes in the Borough.College. (iii) The facilities should be easily accessible to those they are intended to serve by foot.

cycle. accessibility by foot. Planning Policy Statement 1: Delivering Sustainable Development (2005) and PPG13: Transport (2001) encourage proposals for health.educational. such as primary health care services. physiotherapists and other medical practitioners must ensure that: (i) There is satisfactory access to public transport and adequate space exists for an appropriate level of car parking. it is essential that arrangements are put in place to secure additional and appropriate forms of provision so that the health and wellbeing of the local community does not suffer. BENEFITS & SERVICES 33 .The proposals will also need to be assessed to ensure that they satisfy other development control criteria set out in the Plan. in the plan period. Proposals for the change of use of residential accommodation for use by doctors. COMMUNITY NEEDS. Exceptions will only be allowed where there is special need for the facility to be located elsewhere.20 It is important that a range of services. is going to face a significant increase in housing (see paragraph 3. law and advice centres. Smaller scale facilities such as health centres.can be easily accessed by all the Borough’s residents.22 The Borough. 1. to meet any increased local demand for health. health and child care facilities. The additional demands that this will place on the Borough’s services needs to be recognised. cultural and recreational.These changes will have consequences for the land and buildings through which the services are delivered. (iii) The size of the proposed practice is consistent with the size of the property and the character of the neighbourhood. Reason 1. including for people with disabilities. In such locations these uses help to underpin the health of town centres and are well served by public transport. social.5). dentists. health. walking and cycling.The pattern of delivering these community services does and will change and evolve in response to legislative and organisational changes. child care. education. recreational .21 C3 C4 (ii) There will be no detrimental effect on the environment. children’s centres and primary schools should be encouraged in local centres. Major residential developments are defined as those incorporating over 25 units. exist to support and enable the community. When considering major residential developments the Council will seek appropriate planning obligations. community centres.Therefore the loss of such land/buildings will need to be justified. including. such as schools and colleges. The policies seek to ensure that as these changes occur the principles of support for town/local centres. for example where the proposal is for an extension of an existing facility which does not significantly change the nature of the facility. wheelchairs and buggies and their impact on disadvantaged groups/ areas of deprivation are taken into account. facilities for religious purposes and Council services with a high public use. education and community facilities to maximise accessibility by public transport. youth and religious facilities and public open space in accordance with Policy SC2. Where developments increase demand for existing services.The Council is committed to ensuring that a range of community facilities .Alternatively it can form part of a wider strategy for the provision of a community service or if it can be demonstrated that the market has been unresponsive to the opportunity for a community use on the site. changes in the needs of the community and changes in methods of service delivery. public transport and by mobility aids such as scooters. This can be satisfied where the proposal would lead to alternative provision of similar community facilities in the area. The policies also recognise that land and buildings used for community services are generally of low financial land value and need to be protected and promoted through the planning system.Reason for C1 and C2 1. voluntary sector projects.

Reason 1. BENEFITS & SERVICES . (vi) Adequate access by public transport and space for parents and guardians to drop off/pick up children. (v) Adequate access by public transport and car parking space for Health and Education professionals must be provided and a limited amount of car parking for staff would be desirable with high quality landscaping to minimise the effects of off-street car parking.23 Although such uses provide a service to the community. (iv) The scale and intensity of use should be appropriate to the size of the building and should not adversely affect the character of the area. except in the case of nursery provision by the Local Education Authority where it must meet the Department for Education and Skills minimum space standards. this must be balanced against environmental considerations. Detailed guidelines for the development of surgery premises are set out in an Advice Note. 34 COMMUNITY NEEDS. Nursery Provision C5 The Council will support the provision and expansion of nursery facilities in the Borough where suitable sites can be identified and standards of accommodation are satisfied. The following criteria should be met: (i) There is no detrimental effect on the amenities of neighbouring residents. particularly due to noise and disturbance.24 Provision of nursery facilities is vital in the implementation of equal opportunities and access to employment. (iii) The provision of internal and external usable space must satisfy the space standards guideline laid down by OFSTED. The Council is anxious that these are provided in locations and premises that are suitable for that use. (vii) A safe and secure internal and external environment for both children and staff must be provided. As part of the strategy to promote the expansion of nursery provision policy have been developed in an Advice Note (to be updated). Reason 1. (ii) A proper sound insulation scheme is installed.

To retain.The policies seek to address the long-term employment needs of the local population including the unemployed. and specific guidance for other employment generators such as retail and leisure activities. wholesale warehousing and distribution (categories B1. and ‘sui generis’ uses such as aggregates. This chapter should be read in conjunction with relevant policies in the Town Centres chapter and the section on Mixed Use Areas in the Waterfront Chapter. between the early 1990’s and the end of 2004-05. scrap and waste processing. and to ensure that the benefits of economic activity are shared by all sections of the community including those disadvantaged or facing discrimination in relation to the job market. and by offices and small service industries primarily clustered around the Borough’s town centres. which provide additional guidance for office uses. industry and manufacturing. and to redress the economic imbalance between east and west London. recognized in both the Sustainable Communities Plan (ODPM 2003) and the London Plan as being one of two priority regeneration corridors in east London with the potential to accommodate a significant proportion of London’s projected population and employment growth. The economic geography of Greenwich is dominated by substantial industrial areas in the north of the Borough. defined for the purposes of this Chapter as offices. SJ1 SJ2 SJ3 SJ4 SJ5 Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 2. and by promoting efficient use of employment land and improvements to business infrastructure. and encourage the expansion of. principally through the Development Plan review 2.4 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 35 . 172 hectares (net) of derelict. 1987 and subsequent updates). under-used or contaminated industrial land were released for other uses. transport depots. MOT testing stations and wholesale/trade sales that exclude the visiting public. JOBS & THE LOCAL ECONOMY GENERAL POLICY AND POLICY CONTEXT 2. To resist the loss of employment land and premises that are in employment use. and the needs of local businesses and industries. The general policies for employment uses and the local economy are: To expand and diversify the Borough’s economic base and employment opportunities by identifying good quality employment sites. The collapse of the Borough’s traditional economic base between the 1960’s and the early 1990’s left a legacy of high and long-term unemployment and severe urban decay. Consequently. builders yards. Charlton Riverside and West Thamesmead. existing businesses.2 Background Greenwich forms part of the Thames Gateway. in particular Greenwich Peninsula (west). B2 and B8 of the Use Classes Order.3 2. or that are well suited for continued employment use. and to promote the provision of premises for small and growing firms.2. To ensure that significant employment generators are accessible by public transport. These are complemented by a range of smaller commercial areas and premises that are more widely dispersed. haulage yards. To encourage training and the development of the skills of the Borough workforce.1 The policies in this chapter are concerned with the locational aspects of employment uses.

000m2 of new office. comprising three Defined Industrial Areas (Greenwich Peninsula West. Almost half of the jobs filled by unemployed Greenwich residents have gone to people who live in the areas in Greenwich that suffer from the worst unemployment. Unemployment in Greenwich has fallen from 21. such as lone parents. 182 hectares are identified as Strategic Employment Locations in the London Plan. From an earlier peak of 58.6 2. industrial. 6.600 in 2003. Flagship developments permitted on the Greenwich Peninsula.5 As at the end of 2005-06 there are 241 hectares (net) of land in or last used for industry including warehousing and aggregates in Greenwich (224 ha. Parallel trends are reflected in other recent data. who remain concentrated in the Northern part of the Borough (although Middle Park.process.200) in 2006.000 jobs.8 2. people with disabilities and long term health problems. small businesses typically have the greatest growth potential.9 36 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY . However. remaining at around 6. Economic trends Employment and business growth Following decades of persistent decline in the Borough’s employment base. unemployment rates still approach or exceed 10% in St. There are 33 hectares of vacant industrial sites in the Borough. total industrial employment has steadied. After decades of contraction. Unemployment is also disproportionately suffered by other disadvantaged groups.000 jobs in 1991. which is being developed for industry and warehousing. and Sherard Wards also have concentrations above Borough average). 31% of the unemployed are aged between 16-24. young people.000m2 (gross) of industrial and warehousing floorspace in the Borough. excluding land already re-allocated for other uses). Such groups tend to be less financially able to move to other areas where jobs suited to their existing skills may be available. retail and leisure floorspace by 2021. but have since rallied: total employment in the Borough stood at 62. there has been a period of stabilisation and employment growth.000 new dwellings and over 700. the Royal Arsenal and the White Hart Triangle alone propose to create in excess of 12. The incidence of long-term unemployment (those registered unemployed for a year or more) has also fallen significantly. job numbers fell to 52. 2. hospitality and tourism and cultural and creative industries. inclusive of 21 hectares remaining on the White Hart Triangle. The Greenwich economy is dominated by small businesses: 85% employ less than 10 people. Greenwich has historically suffered an unemployment rate at least 2% higher than the London average.9% in 1994 to 5. They are also more likely to experience difficulties moving into different types of employment in expanding sectors like business and financial services. information and communication technology. from 45% (about 7.8% was recorded as vacant in the Greenwich Business Development Centre site marketing database. Charlton Riverside and Plumstead/West Thamesmead). 2.000) in 1994 to 19% (about 1.7 2. suggesting that to date the Greenwich economy has been more stable but less dynamic than the London region as a whole. Planning and Development There has been a significant upturn in development activity in northern wards and waterfront industrial areas in the late 1990’s.600 in 1995. However. Mary’s. but the gap had narrowed to 1. Charlton Business Park and the Aggregates Zone. The decline in heavy industrial sectors disproportionately affected workers in semi and unskilled socio-economic groups. and 4% employ more than 100. Business formation and closure rates are lower than the London average. and this most vulnerable age group suffers an unemployment rate of 15.4%.0% in September 2005. Ferrier. As at the end of 2005-06 there was approximately 853.7% in 2006. West and Ferrier Wards. Over 70% of the current long-term unemployed are men.

and helped local businesses win £3. Greater London Authority and Council records for light industrial uses. iii.13 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 37 . Economic Strategy and the Annual Economic Development Plan The Economic Development Strategy for Greenwich (2002) provides a framework for economic development from 2002 . Major new investment and development are creating unparalleled opportunities for Greenwich and East London. work and do business. in terms of the need to train less-skilled groups to increase their access to jobs within and outside the Borough. Training The decline of traditional industries has important implications for the regeneration of the Borough as a whole. construction phased to 2010 with the first units available in 2005-06).5 million worth of new contracts. Similarly. B2 and B8.or localized . per annum. and whilst many are in decline in London or in the UK generally. and thousands more across the Thames Gateway sub-region.12 2. GLLaB’s service to local people includes the arrangement and procurement of identified training needs and efforts are underway to develop customised training programmes for local people so that they can access the jobs created through the major commercial developments in the Borough. an annual land take of 1.800 local people into employment. 1999-00 to 2004-05 annual industrial completions averaged 21.2. A first class business location.10 Recent development trends underline the continuing importance of Greenwich in London’s industrial economy. developments exceeding 1. a four-fold increase. manufacturing and distribution show that in the six years 1993-94 to 1998-99 annual industrial floorspace completions averaged 5.2 ha. By contrast. A place where all residents will have the education. ii.400m2. (Use Classes B1c. High quality developments are transforming vast areas of derelict land and creating business growth and new jobs. or elsewhere in London. 2.This trend looks set to continue in the medium term. Training is also important to increase the employability of people to enable them to compete for jobs outside the Borough.200m2 and land take 4. male unemployment still exceeds 14% in many wards.8 ha. If local people are to benefit from local job creation. as the London-wide labour market provides many job opportunities if training and transport factors allow the local labour force to compete for them.This is indicative of the fact that ‘industry’ comprises a wide range of activities.The Greenwich Local Labour and Business Service (GLLaB) has been recognised by the Audit Commission as an exemplar of best practice in creating local employment. An estimated 25.000m2 of industrial floorspace on the White Hart Triangle (25.11 2. Training is a gateway to accessing employment.000m2 gross only). it also highlights the need to take a long-term view in managing the stock and availability of land for future employment use. When set against the decline of preceding decades. and there has also been a substantial increase in industrial development activity over the previous Plan period (1994-2001). availability of a suitably skilled workforce is important both for local firms and to attract new businesses into the area.growth. it is essential that training in the necessary work skills takes place. An exciting thriving place to live. Between 1997 and 2002 GLLaB helped 4. Despite the recent economic upturn.2007. In 2003 planning permission was granted for 106. others are experiencing significant . skills and ability to get jobs in Greenwich.000 new jobs will be created in Greenwich by 2010. and a key mechanism in tackling social exclusion.The strategy sets out the following Vision for Greenwich: i. indicating an ongoing need to facilitate the provision of new opportunities for less skilled members of the workforce.7 ha.

leisure and environmental improvements. Deptford Creekside (West Greenwich) and at Woolwich Royal Arsenal to facilitate the continuing economic. In addition. An overall increase in business floorspace will be sought (see Waterfront Chapter Policy W3). physical and social transformation of waterfront areas blighted by the decline of heavy industry or port activity. Six of these wards have also been designated Objective 2 Area status. construction. Once completed it is estimated the development as permitted will provide over 23. Major schemes completed include the Jubilee Line extension and station at North Greenwich. Potential Economic Growth Sectors: The Economic Development Strategy for Greenwich (2002) has identified a number of sectors with potential for growth.14 Economic opportunities and initiatives There are a range of significant events. housing. Details include use of the Dome for a sports arena. On Greenwich Peninsula the prospects for the long-term regeneration of the local economy received a massive boost when Meridian Delta Limited were granted outline planning permission for their proposals for 81 hectares to be phased over 20 years.Their implementation is providing a wide range of new employment and training opportunities. employment. with European funding available for industrial renewal. committed and planned investment by the public and private sectors secured through successive regeneration programmes exceeds £2 billion.The Mayor’s 2001 Transport Strategy and the London Plan supports the Docklands Light Rail extension to Woolwich. Waterfront Transit and the provision of additional river crossings at Gallions Reach and Greenwich Peninsula (see Movement chapter). 10. and the completion of the Woolwich Road Widening scheme.The South Greenwich ‘Building New Links’ area also benefits from a further £22 million up to 2006. the Docklands Light Railway extension to Greenwich.2.These include health and social care. The Borough is also likely to benefit from further funding and increased investment through the London Development Agency’s Single Programme and the ODPM’s Sustainable Communities Plan.17 2. tourism and 2.000m2 of office and business space including a hotel. infrastructural or workforce development.18 2. and open up new opportunities for residents.15 2. The Riverside area east of Greenwich Peninsula also benefits from the award of £10 million funding between 2000 and 2007 under the Single Regeneration Budget to improve manufacturing opportunities. Cumulatively they enhance the Borough as a business location.010 new homes. plus over 50. Further transport investment is likely over the Plan period. exhibition and leisure venue. and will bring further opportunities for economic renewal and diversification. 400. representing a one-third increase in jobs located in the Borough. and for Borough residents to Greater and Central London.16 2. They contain many of the most significant waterfront redevelopment sites remaining in the Borough. Manufacturing companies seeking to expand or safeguard employment may be eligible for grants from the Department of Trade & Industry. Mixed Use Areas Mixed Use Areas have been designated at Greenwich Peninsula. The development of major sites around Deptford Creek and the ongoing regeneration of the Woolwich Royal Arsenal will bring further opportunities and improvements Transport improvements Infrastructural investments have improved accessibility within and into the Borough. manufacturing.000m2 of retail and food and drink uses.000 permanent jobs on site.19 38 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY . opportunities and initiatives playing a key role in the transformation and modernisation of the local economy: Funding Initiatives Eight of the most deprived wards in the north of the Borough benefit from Assisted Area Status (as at 2003).

but is consistent with.22 PPG4 Industrial and Commercial Development and Small Firms states that Development Plans should ensure that there is sufficient land available to suit a variety of industrial and commercial requirements. sport and leisure. Large tracts of the most persistently underused land have already been transferred to other uses.21 Employment Locations This section addresses the availability and suitability of sites for different types of business and industrial activities.1. Industry provides 7% of London’s jobs and 11% of its GDP.E3. 2. J10 and E1. creative industries.23 2.The policy gives industrial developers and local communities greater certainty about the types of development that will or will not be permitted in a given location. Defined Industrial Areas J1 Defined Industrial Areas designated on the Proposals Map are particularly suited and safeguarded for activities within Use Classes B1. principally by redesignation as Mixed Use Areas (see paragraphs 2. Other uses will not be permitted unless they are: i.24 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 39 . business and financial services and information and communication technologies. partially offset by a projected increase in warehousing employment. subject to considerations under Policies J2. Policies 2. It is therefore 2. a requirement that takes on increased importance when set against pressures to release brownfield and riverside sites for housing. PPG3 Housing and Mayoral recommendations that East London boroughs adopt a managed approach to the release of surplus and especially poorer industrial land. Reason 2.W3 & TC16). However. allowing industrial investment decisions to be made with confidence. and seeks to ensure a sufficient ‘strategic reservoir’ of industrial capacity is retained to meet London’s future industrial requirements. The London Plan recognises the importance of industry.16 and Policy W3). B2 and B8. a higher productivity than some service sectors. although office developments unless ancillary will be limited to locations with good public transport accessibility (see Policies J4. Greenwich is a-typical of the East London sub-region as the amount of available vacant land remaining within the Defined Industrial Areas is relatively low. 2. ii. J7. Slower but ongoing employment decline in industry in London is predicted. which includes Greenwich.There is also significant local demand with new industrial/employment development on 57 hectares 1998-2003 including works in progress (see paragraph 2. particularly in the East London sub-region.10).hospitality. This ‘managed release’ approach largely preceded.4. Mayoral advice on Industrial Capacity states that to 2016 approximately 30-50 hectares per annum of employment land across London should be released to other uses.This is an essential aspect in safeguarding and enhancing the quality and range of employment opportunities in the Borough to address problems of social exclusion. Local service uses to predominantly serve businesses and employees within walking distance.The priority now is to capitalise on these new opportunities and maximise the benefits for local people and businesses. and B8 uses will be subject to the considerations in Policy J8.20 The Council working in partnership with others has been successful in securing investment and additional resources for the regeneration of the Borough. ‘Sui Generis’ uses that are industrial in character as defined in paragraph 2.

The policy allows flexibility between B1. are largely located away from environmentally sensitive areas.25 The London Plan outlines a locational framework of Strategic Employment Locations (SELs) of London-wide importance. Within the Borough 144 hectares (net) on Greenwich Peninsula west. and the extent to which existing or potential industrial occupiers in the vicinity might be adversely affected. are made available to firms wishing to expand or locate in the Borough. However. large-scale distribution and more sensitive surrounding land uses such as housing. particularly for small and medium-sized light industrial firms. the Department of Trade and Industry and the European Union. local environmental quality along Eastmoor Street is undermined by poor quality industrial buildings and ‘eyesore’ activities such as car dismantling. Mayoral advice on Industrial Capacity is that managed industrial land release across London should take place outside SELs (see also Policy J5). 2.28 2.5) underpin the controlled policy approach resisting the ad hoc release of employments sites between Development Plan reviews. layout. All the Defined Industrial Areas benefit from Intermediate Assisted Area Status and those east of Greenwich Peninsula also benefit from Objective 2 Status. and contain a range of industrial accommodation. j5). 2. Planned infrastructure proposals and the Borough’s enhanced profile are also likely to help. SELs include Preferred Industrial Locations (PILs). and form the basis of the Council’s Defined Industrial Areas. A number of factors increase the probability that industrial demand can be converted into new development over the Plan period.The lack of modern business units. These factors combined with relatively low vacancy rates (see paragraph 2. These are historically industrial in nature. Redevelopment and diversification into compatible business uses will help to address these issues. Despite improvements.26 2. Residential use is not acceptable. whilst also supporting the Thames Barrier as a visitor attraction. to serve as an amenity and service zone for the industrial area which encloses it. However. In particular. subject to more detailed policy guidance for office and B8 uses in the policies cited. Proposals for such uses will be considered in relation to impact on the environment. Criterion (ii) and the site schedules provide further flexibility for business/ employment related diversification in specific locations. B2 and B8 uses. is a barrier to inward investment and may hamper economic diversification.The Council is working with the London Development Agency to improve the wider Charlton Riverside Industrial Area. the Charlton Riverside Area. and the availability of grants or other assistance from the London Development Agency. the Thames Barrier Approach offers scope for employment-based diversification including provision of ancillary local service facilities for both business and visitor markets. B1 office development is better located within town centres and other locations specified in Policy J7 (although it is not intended to prevent replacement of existing offices). Light industry can also usefully serve as a buffer between general industry.important that the remaining industrial sites. These include the award of £10 million under the Single Regeneration Budget to promote manufacturing in Greenwich and Bexley. Defined Industrial Areas have also traditionally accommodated a range of uses outside Group B of the Use Class Order (1987) that are essentially industrial in character and have similar locational requirements in terms of their impacts on surrounding activities. landscaping and cost requirements. it is essential that new uses support rather than fetter business occupants of the Defined Industrial Area that encloses the Thames Barrier.29 40 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY . Most of the Defined Industrial Areas are also Industrial Improvement Area under the Inner Urban Areas Act (1978). as well as their relationship with other land uses. defined as medium to large-scale sites that should meet the needs of most industries in terms of their access. enabling the Council to apply its own resources where appropriate. nor are destination retail or leisure activities (see Site Schedules j4.27 2. and especially sites that are readily developable. and the Plumstead-Thamesmead Industrial Area are designated as PILs.

Aggregate uses are likely to continue on three safeguarded wharves outside the defined zone: at Victoria Deep Water Terminal.The provision of an aggregate zone contributes to meeting the London wide need for aggregates.32 Charlton Business Park is within a Strategic Employment Location identified in the London Plan. temporary on-site processing facilities may also be acceptable on major development sites.The Council will oppose any proposals leading to either a loss in land or premises in employment use. and/or on sites requiring frequent heavy truck access through residential streets. Riverside Wharf and at Brewery Wharf (see Policy W5 Safeguarded Wharves). Charlton Business Park contains a number of ‘first generation’ retail warehouses approaching the end of their useful life. In reconfigurations site access and servicing should be provided from Bugsby’s Way wherever possible. crushing and scrap uses. while its wharf side location reduces road congestion and pollution by allowing aggregates to be moved as water freight.33 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 41 . Redevelopment proposals that reconfigure existing retail units are also addressed in Policy TC16.30 The availability of riverside wharves and the potential to develop greater commercial use of the Thames are important Borough assets. and operations will not unacceptably compromise regeneration objectives or the amenity of adjoining areas. in accordance with the London Plan. Aggregate and scrap operations within the confines of a building will generally be treated as a B2 general industrial use. The designation of a specific location with rail and river access is intended to minimise potential problems from aggregates or scrap operations in other parts of the Borough. Charlton Business Park J3 Within Charlton Business Park the Council will permit development within Use Classes B1 (excluding non-ancillary offices) and B8. subject to the safeguarding of the Riverside Walk (Policy O16). It also accommodates retail warehouse units. 2. Open yard aggregates. which will normally be acceptable in Defined Industrial Areas (see Policy J1).Aggregates and other ‘Open Yard’ Industries J2 The Aggregates Zone within the Charlton Riverside area shown on the Proposals Map is the Council’s preferred location for open yard aggregates. Subject to appropriate environmental and amenity safeguards. Reason 2. Reason 2. unless in accordance with Policy TC16 (hybrid uses which combine wholesale use with retailing will be considered individually on merit against the most relevant parts of Polices TC16 and J8). Problems typically arise on sites that are too close to residential areas or businesses that require a clean operating environment. or an increase in retail floor space unless in accordance with Policy TC16. The Council does not support any increase in retail floorspace in Charlton Business Park (nor the surrounding area) within the Plan period. It is a mixed business location and a preferred location for light industry. Such uses will also be acceptable on Safeguarded Wharves providing the significant majority of raw and part-processed materials are transported by river (see Policy W5). The zone also benefits from a railhead in current use. distributive and trade wholesale uses. crushing and scrap uses will normally be resisted elsewhere unless alternatives to road freight are utilised. Site Schedule mu29 identifies an opportunity to reconfigure existing retail warehouse units to simultaneously meet a need for additional bulky goods floorspace and potentially to redress an imbalance in DIY provision identified in the Greenwich Retail Study (2002).31 2.

provided that it does not impact unacceptably on residential amenity. nor the unacceptable loss of reasonable residential accommodation. and to meet the requirements of PPG4 Industrial and Commercial Development and Small Firms and the London Plan by ensuring the continued supply of 42 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY . and existing office accommodation will be protected where office use is ongoing or likely. Reason 2. Offices can also stimulate demand for and investment in shopping and other town centre services.The Council’s objectives are to retain as many of these sites and businesses as is practicable. to the benefit of town centre vitality and viability.This is a sustainable pattern of economic development where business premises. ii. services and jobs are close to residential areas. and the Council will seek to retain good quality office accommodation in these centres. which could help to lessen dependence on commuting to Central London (other suitable locations are identified in Policy J7). Employment Sites Outside Defined Employment Locations J5 The Council will seek to maximise the contribution to employment in the Borough from sites in existing or previous employment use outside designated employment areas. Are conveniently related to. and the maximum viable contribution to affordable housing will be sought.These centres and Greenwich are preferred locations for office development. Do not result in the unacceptable loss of retail and leisure sites. the environment. and to protect cheaper ‘seedbed’ accommodation. iii. traffic levels. Eltham and Greenwich are preferred locations for office developments. They are thus generally suitable for larger office developments. by resisting premature change to higher value land uses (such as private housing). Employment use is only viable within a mixed-use scheme. Planning permission will be granted for an alternative employment use. ii.36 There are a number of industrial and business sites of varying sizes dispersed throughout Greenwich. Planning permission for non employment uses will be granted only if the site is vacant and evidence is submitted to clearly demonstrate at least one of the following: i. providing proposals: i. iii. priority will be accorded to residential use wherever practicable. Town centres are generally well served by public transport.35 Where development without employment use is justified. 2. road safety or parking congestion. District and Local centres. and can also offer employees convenient access to retail. Reason 2.34 Woolwich and Eltham are the Borough’s main office locations. Other uses may be more appropriate for office sites in some circumstances – see Policy J5. public transport.Town Centres J4 Woolwich. and Comply with approved planning briefs. site schedules and other policies in the Plan. This will help to safeguard locally accessible employment and services. Marketing on fair price and terms for at least 2 years indicates there is no realistic prospect of any form of employment use arising. and adequately served by. The site is environmentally or physically unsuitable for any employment generating use. B1 development at an appropriate scale will be acceptable in all Major. leisure and other service facilities. Guidance in PPS 6: Planning for Town Centres (2005) notes that in smaller town centres such development should be at a scale that is appropriate to the centre.

50% affordable housing will be sought. especially if the alternative uses proposed would significantly fetter or compromise the continuation of existing employment uses on adjoining sites. and opportunities to upgrade servicing and telecommunications on surrounding sites are improved rather than reduced. and are sufficiently flexible in design to be adaptable to changing business requirements. 2.premises for start-ups and small firms that often cannot afford premises on purpose-built industrial estates. plus housing land allocations and planning permissions to meet and exceed strategic housing provision targets. For the purposes of this policy employment uses are as defined in Paragraph 2.1. lease length. In servicing new developments it should be ensured that they are connected to existing broadband infrastructure wherever possible.This policy is not applicable to sites identified in the Site Schedule Proposals if the uses specified therein do not include employment. subject to the considerations in Policy H14 and its Reasons. Section 106 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 43 . it must be demonstrated that an employment use is not forthcoming despite at least two years active site marketing on realistic terms (well advertised. In the absence of any clear justification for employment land release other than apparent lack of demand. That said. as recorded in either the Council’s Unitary Development Plan Annual Monitoring Report or the DCLG’s Commercial and Industrial Property Vacancy Statistics. and Address the need to provide business premises on flexible and affordable terms. and large units can be readily subdivided. Up to five years marketing history will be needed for readily developable sites that form part of a wider area in predominately business use. if this is demonstrably impractical. and to manage the supply of lower quality employment sites outside Strategic Employment Locations. Reason 2.38 iii. some are reaching the end of their economic life. 2. In recognition of the potentially enhanced economics of provision for such developments engendered by the change of use. an established track record of managed and large scale release of surplus employment land through the Development Plan review process. It also seeks to ensure new premises are attractive to a broad range of industrial or commercial occupiers including technology and knowledge-based industries. or for a mix of uses including employment-generating uses. Where sites are wholly released from employment use the priority alternative use is housing where it is suitable.37 Circumstances are identified in the policy where it will be more appropriate to redevelop former industrial and business sites for other uses.39 The Borough’s industrial and business accommodation varies in age and quality. industry or business. The policy encourages new development. and. fair price.This meets the general policy thrust of PPG3 Housing and the London Plan (including Mayoral advice on Industrial Capacity) to make effective use of urban land and increase the supply of housing. ii. the approach has been adapted to fit Greenwich circumstances. Connect premises to broadband information technology infrastructure (or. make provision for convenient connections to be made in the future). Key local considerations are regeneration and job creation priorities in a relatively deprived Borough. redevelopment or refurbishment to maintain an adequate stock and range of premises. Industrial and Business Developments J6 The Council will seek to ensure that wherever possible industrial and business developments: i. Are designed and specified to enable convenient adaption to a range of business uses. In either of these circumstances the marketing period will be halved if the supply of vacant premises in the Borough exceeds 10% of the total stock (excluding premises under construction). and occupier criteria). Whilst older premises provide affordable workspace and generally remain in productive use.

Mechanisms to secure other forms of flexibility. It advises sites within Preferred Industrial Locations can be suitable for B8 use. especially office uses.Town centres are generally well served in this regard. These are also becoming increasingly important as businesses seek to retain the freedom to adapt to rapidly changing market conditions.They can thus contribute to employment objectives without conflicting with existing activities. In terms of transport implications. providing they are appropriately scaled. light industrial activities usually require access to a main road for heavy goods vehicles. for example tenancy lengths and occupier terms. and Other sites allocated for employment use (see Site Schedules) or in current or former employment use (see Policy J5). Defined Industrial Areas (see Policy J1). including identifying sites and assisting in making land available. Town Centres (see Policies J4 and TC16). providing development does not utilise land safeguarded in the Plan for other purposes. particularly where opportunities to transfer freight by rail and water are utilised (see also Policies W5 & M36-M39). Reason 2. can generate high levels of car traffic and road congestion. Larger B1 developments. logisitics. ii.42 The London Plan advises Boroughs to promote positive policies for distributive uses. and are thus particularly suitable for office development (see Policy J4). v. providing proposals do not result in the closure of a viable and significant B1 or B2 use. i. and thus can often be incorporated into mixeduse schemes or within mainly residential areas. further reducing congestion and road related pollution. research and development and light industry. warehousing and trade wholesale activities (use class B8) will be permitted in Charlton Business Park and within Defined Industrial Areas. and the site is not allocated or safeguarded for another use elsewhere in the Plan.41 44 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY . Mixed Use Areas (see Policy W3). and providing speculative developments also offer opportunities for B1 and B2 uses including small businesses.This will ensure that the jobs created are accessible to people who do not have the use of a car whilst offering car users the opportunity to travel by public transport. Reason 2. Office developments should be conveniently accessible by public transport. which on average offers employment 2. environmental and traffic impacts are within acceptable levels. iii. Other environmentally acceptable locations with good trunk road access will be considered on merit. B8 Distributive Industries and Trade Wholesale uses J8 Distribution.40 The B1 use class encompasses offices. Charlton Business Park (see Policy J3). will be considered where appropriate.contributions may be sought to improve IT infrastructure. meeting requirements set out in PPG13 Transport. B1 uses do not normally create significant environmental problems. Distribution is an industrial sector with potential for employment growth across London over the Plan period. Types of Employment Use B1 uses J7 Activities within Use Class B1 will normally be permitted in the locations below. and therefore should be conveniently located for public transport. iv.

to protect economic diversity. high-bay warehouses may cumulatively threaten existing businesses or constrain opportunities for other types of businesses seeking to relocate or expand. Uses which combine wholesale and retail use will be considered individually on merit against the most relevant parts of this policy and Policy TC16. 2. 2.This concentration of cultural activity in London provides the opportunity for the Borough to draw such activities into the area and to develop a cultural industrial base. The Cultural Strategy for Greenwich (2003) promotes the growth of these activities because they have the potential to play a key role in economic regeneration and expansion. This would not only widen the Borough’s economic base but would also increase the range of local job opportunities.To be acceptable on employment sites such proposals must be clearly distinguishable from A1 retailing by demonstration that a significant majority of their customers will be other businesses. cultural and creative activities are based in London.43 Use Class B8 also includes trade wholesalers and ‘trade counters’. Reason 2.levels approaching that of manufacturing. Developments to satisfy demand from the higher value distribution sector for large. It is also an important logistical complement to manufacturing and other commercial activities essential for the efficient operation of the London economy. Cultural and Creative Industries J9 Town Centres and Mixed Use Areas are preferred locations for Cultural and Creative industries. and that sales to the general public would be minimal and ancillary.44 2. a role promoted in the 2000 West Greenwich Development Framework. Office-based activities will also be appropriate in any B1 location identified in Policy J7. West Greenwich and Woolwich also offer a range of commercial floorspace. while providing local people with access to cultural activities. which are generally convenient for public transport. In addition. Whilst such activities generally fall within Class B1 of the Use Classes Order (1987) they can include a wide range of other land uses. Other sites will be considered against the relevant Plan policies for the use proposed. Conditions may be used where appropriate to ensure retailing to the public remains ancillary. a theatre or the offices of a fashion designer.46 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 45 . Where Defined Industrial Area sites not last or currently in B8 use are redeveloped to include B8 uses. as 80% of the nation’s artists. They are particularly important in the London context. The policy also identifies other suitable locations. in recognition that West Greenwich/Creekside will not be appropriate or convenient for all cultural and creative industries. planning conditions or legal agreements may be applied to ensure premises are also suitable and available for B1 and/or B2 use. the most successful clusters tend to have access to a wider range of cultural resources including entertainment and leisure facilities. and workshop-based activities in any B1 or industrial location. Cultural and creative activities are the country’s fourth largest invisible earner. The policy seeks to support this role as it is widely recognised that creative industries benefit from proximity to other creative industries. employing more than 1. The West Greenwich/Creekside area (straddling the borough boundary with Lewisham) is recognised to be an emerging node for cultural and creative industries.4 million people nationally. meet the needs of small firms and provide a range of employment opportunities.45 Cultural and creative industries can be anything from a film and video production firm through to a small crafts workshop. These are typically to be found in town centres.

noise. which will be safeguarded from change to purely residential use. and the SELCHP facility meets Borough requirements for disposal of local non-hazardous waste (see paragraph 5. Providing these broad principles are adhered to. Work/live units must include at least 20m2 (net) of specifically designed business accommodation to standards suitable for B1 use.50 Work/live units are a hybrid use incorporating both business and residential areas. and to foster a healthy working environment.1. PPG4 Industrial and Commercial Development and Small Firms recognises that where the business use becomes dominant or intrusive. Reason 2. fumes or other impact significantly above levels that would be expected from residential use alone. Home workers are advised to seek a determination in writing as to whether or not a planning permission is required. flexible and healthy working environments with high standards of layout. planning permission should be required and may be refused. Small scale processing or recycling of locally produced non-hazardous waste or to provide materials for use in the local area may be appropriate in environmentally acceptable locations (see Policy E14). or where the activity proposed would fetter prospects for the occupation or redevelopment of underused industrial sites in the locality (see Policies E1 – E3). provided it does not cause a loss of housing accommodation or a loss of amenity to neighbouring occupiers. Reason 2. traffic. vibration. and 46 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY . in particular ‘open yard’ uses or activities generating significant emissions. the use of equipment at home for business purposes can make a valuable contribution to sustainable development by reducing work-related travel. Work/Live Units J12 Work/live units will normally be permitted in Mixed Use areas. Planning permission for change of use may be required if there is a significant intensification of business use. Further guidance for Home workers on whether or not planning permission is required is set out in an Advice Note. occupy not less than 25% of the total internal floor area.47 This section addresses the need to encourage the development of safe.48 To ensure that new business contribute to rather than detract from the performance and prospects of the local economy. Reason 2. Home Working J11 Home working for business purposes will normally be supported. will not be permitted where surrounding businesses or residential areas would be unacceptably affected. to the extent that it would demonstrably harm the amenity of nearby residents. However. Business areas should comprise at least 20 m2 (net). and other environmentally acceptable sites not allocated for or occupied by an employment use as defined in paragraph 2. ‘Bad Neighbour’ Industries J10 Proposals for ‘bad neighbour’ industries. and will be refused if the proposal would generate visitors.The Working Environment 2.49 Home working in part of a dwelling where it is incidental to the residential use is not normally ‘Development’ and thus would not require planning permission.37). Significant provision has been made for large scale ‘bad neighbour’ uses in the defined Aggregates Zone (see Policy J2). It is a valuable source of employment for some Borough residents and is consistent in principle with the Council’s planning policies.

56 The historic decline in manufacturing and industry in general has resulted in a mismatch between job opportunities and local skills. Business rates will be applicable to the commercial floor area. Reason 2. In effect. to prevent the premature loss of land for dedicated industrial and business use.53 2.com). Preventing the loss of JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 47 . 2.55 This section encompasses access to employment. training for groups at a disadvantage in the labour market.52 2.The ‘Live Work Network’. and be constructed to commercial standards.must be clearly separable from the residential element (preferably on a separate floor).51 Work-live units are not considered well suited for family use. and will seek to encourage employment development which provides good quality jobs. is a Council objective. and residents should reasonably expect some amenity loss through business-related disturbance. However. The provision of rental work/live units. waste and emissions. In granting consent for work/live units.liveworknet. work/live units are considered to be an intermediate step between home working and use of a separate small business unit. noise insulation and ventilation. work/live units will not be permitted in Defined Industrial Areas and Charlton Business Park. Conditions may be applied to mitigate or avoid potential problems on surrounding residential areas that might arise from hours of operation.54 Employment Opportunities 2. Quality Jobs J13 The Council will resist development proposals that result in the loss without qualitatively adequate replacement of jobs suited to the needs and skills of local people. use of machinery or hazardous materials. Nor will they be permitted on other business/industrial sites except under conditions set out in Policy J5. the Council’s experience with work/live units suggests occupiers often perceive them as living space and may seek permission for purely residential use. Work/live applications have also been used to attempt to circumvent restrictions on residential development in areas allocated for other uses. traditionally employed in the industrial sector need to be both protected and promoted. and enforcement action may follow where appropriate. to includes elements such as service lifts. so as to be capable of accommodating a range of B1 uses and a level of business-related disturbance that would not normally be acceptable in the use of a room for work purposes in a traditional home. including a definition of ‘true live-work’ (www. conditions or legal agreements will be used to prevent future residential use of the business accommodation. to avoid the introduction of residential uses that may be incompatible with and fetter industrial operations. In line with PPG4 Industrial and Commercial Development and Small Firms. and community benefits from development. supported by the Office of the Deputy Prime Minister and the Housing Corporation. and to ensure that occupiers of selfcontained units use both the residential and business floorspace. and vehicular movements. The Council wishes to safeguard and encourage the provision of suitable accommodation for startup enterprises.5 hectare (the threshold for affordable housing Policy H14). and it is recognised that work/live units can offer an affordable and flexible alternative to small business units. 2. which is contrary to their purpose and this policy. the provision of affordable units for rent will be sought in developments exceeding 15 units or 0. provide further useful advice. Suitable jobs for both the skilled and unskilled. in particular for the most disadvantaged groups in the Borough workforce. It is expected that they will include elements such as high speed information technology connections. Accordingly as work/live units have a residential element. either self contained or as part of a flexible work/live ‘complex’.

and with the constant pace of technological change the need for training is on going. advise local firms of contract opportunities arising from the Borough’s extensive redevelopment and regeneration projects. contractors and local businesses. and on the other to avoid the problems that often result from new developments. It is the Council’s aim to maximize and channel the benefits of development towards the community on the one hand. training workshops and other training provision to develop the skills of the Borough's resident workforce. to train local people and help them secure employment. the local workforce must be suitably trained to take advantage of new opportunities. and allow residents to compete for jobs in new and growing sectors of the local economy. women from the lack of childcare facilities.57 Other groups of workers or potential workers are also disadvantaged when competing for work and/or suffer difficulties at work. minority ethnic groups and people with disabilities.The unskilled are becoming increasingly disadvantaged in the labour market. People with disabilities suffer from access problems. and raise their capacity to secure contacts and successfully deliver them. Community Benefits J15 In appraising employment development schemes. Access to competent local firms and suppliers can assist in attracting new companies to the area. in accordance with Policy SC2.Training opportunities supported by GLLaB reduce the mismatch between available skills and skills required. minority ethnic groups from discrimination. The resulting availability of a well-trained local workforce is important in attracting new businesses. and in providing employment and subcontracting opportunities for local businesses and residents. Reason 2. the Council will encourage employment development that assists these groups and others such as school leavers and the longer term unemployed. Lacking transferable skills or the means to retrain. For regeneration policies to be effective. and those on low incomes from the high cost and inadequacy of public transport.land in active employment use will help to safeguard such employment that might otherwise be lost. Reason 2. they are less able to take advantage of new opportunities. Whilst possessing few powers of direct intervention. As a typically low income group they are less able to move to find suitable work. which are sought on all major development proposals. GLLaB is in part financed by Section 106 developer contributions. 2. for example the intensification of pressure on existing facilities such as childcare services.58 Greenwich Local Labour and Business (GLLaB) plays a central role in improving the attractiveness of the Borough as a business location to existing and incoming firms. In new developments the Council will seek to negotiate commitments or commitments and contributions to Greenwich Local Labour and Business. It was established with two primary objectives. Training is also an important element in eradicating this skills mismatch (Policy J12). Training and Business Support J14 The Council will support the establishment of training centres. to create new business opportunities for local companies. to provide opportunities for local job seekers.60 48 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY .61 Most developments normally provide benefits of one kind or another be they leisure facilities or job opportunities. the Council will use planning agreements to secure community and workplace benefits as appropriate. but these do not necessarily meet the needs of their host communities.59 2. and to help those facing disadvantage in the labour market. Second. First.The provision 2. in particular groups who are often disadvantaged in the job market such as women.

JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 49 . should be designed to meet the needs of visitors and employees with disabilities unless demonstrably impractical. Other benefits may be sought under Policies J6 (premises and infrastructure) and J14 (training and business support).62 People with disabilities suffer higher levels of unemployment than the Borough average. Reason 2. See Policy D6. the provision of workplace creches will help employers to encourage women to re enter the workforce. Employment opportunities are often unnecessarily restricted by the physical design of buildings. Ensuring that the buildings are accessible and equipped to meet their needs will open up the range of employment opportunities available to people with disabilities. including refurbishment and conversions. which can make access or use difficult or impossible. Accessibility J16 All employment developments.of community facilities also benefits the developer. For example.

50 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY .

45 persons.1). 3. reflecting the major housing developments in Thamesmead and on the Waterfront coupled with the continued rise in smaller households. From 1971 to 1991 average household size fell from 2. SH3 SH4 SH5 SH6 Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 3. size and affordability. This increase is expected to continue with an estimated 103. The nature of these households is also changing. by providing a suitable range of dwellings by type.000 people with disabilities in the Borough.500 to 93. (Source: GLA 2000 Demographic Projections). In contrast the number of one person households of pensionable age declines slightly but as a proportion of one person households falls from 52% in 1991 to 33% in 2016. (GLA 2003 Demographic Projections Scenario 8. The Council will facilitate the regeneration and renewal of South Greenwich to alleviate the physical and social isolation of the area and to enable the development of mixed communities and sustainable neighbourhoods. economic and physical character of the Borough.100 net additional dwellings between 1997 and 2016. whose housing needs require particular attention. To retain and improve the existing housing stock.400 by 2016. SH1 SH2 The Council recognises the major role housing plays in shaping the social. especially those with special needs. To provide a high quality sustainable residential environment and to ensure that new housing is built to a high quality design. The scale of housing need in the Borough for affordable housing is such that the Council will seek to ensure that at least 35% of the dwellings provided between 1997 and 2016 are affordable to those on low and lower incomes.200 households by 2011 and 105.The increase is largely made up of an increase in single person households between the ages of 30 and 64 who increase as a proportion of single person households from 35% in 1991 to 55% in 2016.2 Households Between 1991 and 2004 the number of households in the Borough increased from 86.3 HOUSING 51 .3. However the most recent projections assume this will remain stable upto 2016. estimated to rise to 34% in 2011 and to 36% in 2016.200.The general policies are: To provide sufficient land to allow for the completion of at least 16.85 to 2. There is a significant growth in single person households such that they comprised 32% of households in 2001.The increase in these households accounts for between 70% and 80% of the increase in the total number of households. To ensure the development of balanced and mixed communities and to meet the varying needs of households.The number of lone parent households is expected to rise upto 2016. HOUSING GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 3. There are people with mental health requirements and people with learning needs who wish to live independently with support in the community.1. There are about 12.

256 units). At 1. and young and single people. both visually and physically. The Greenwich Strategy aims to offer a range of homes that meet the lifestyle needs of all sections of our communities. The tenure of housing has changed with the 1970s with the proportion of public sector housing rising to 47% in 1981 followed by a decline to 38% in 1991 and to 29% in 2001. are of serious concern with one in ten dwellings in the private sector either in serious disrepair or unfit. Poor housing conditions are often accompanied by a poor residential environment. 3.3. within one community.non self-contained accommodation (1. In the 1980s the private rented sector declined but increased in the 1990s. Between 1997 and 2004 planning permission has been granted for 20. Over 70% of these dwellings had planning permission at the time of the study.690 additional dwellings mainly from large sites (11. At 2. small sites (870 units). The aim should be that individuals / households are able to pass through all phases of life.000 units in the Royal Arsenal. This is recognised in PPG3 and Circular 6/98 which encourage local planning authorities to develop such communities. New housing must also meet the varying needs of individual households. occupying roughly 35% of all land. over 1. Developments should provide housing of different types. Mixed and Balanced Communities It is important that the large scale of new housing in the plan period provides mixed and balanced communities. making housing the largest user of land in the Borough. This will increase the demand for affordable housing.7 3.6 3.8 52 HOUSING . The London Housing Capacity Study (GLA 2000) carried out for 1997 to 2016 shows potential for 14.025 dwellings per annum this is 27% above the capacity estimate.713 dwellings (net). as a consequence of right to buys and stock transfers to housing associations.4 Housing needs are becoming more varied as a result of the changes in household and population structure shown above and in Part One. a lack of a usable amenity open space. Owner occupation increased over the same period.5 3.010 units on Greenwich Peninsula (in addition to those being provided at Greenwich Millennium Village). conversions (1.g. people with disabilities. Residential completions between 1997 and 2004 totalled 8. Housing conditions in the Borough. e. older people. minority ethnic groups. and for types of housing which provide support.The latter figure is included in the London Plan as the additional housing provision figure for the Borough.is taken into account this potential increases to 16. people with learning difficulties. Significant improvements are needed to the Council housing stock to bring it up to a good standard of repair with modern facilities. and it is anticipated it will be further exceeded as planning permissions are implemented. particularly in the older properties. Housing Stock Between 1991 and 2001 the number of dwellings in the Borough increased by about 7%. accessible housing which can meet the needs of people with mobility difficulties. Nearly one-third of the stock was built before 1919 and a further one-third was built between 1919 and 1939.200 units) and a reduction in vacant dwellings (200 units) . The planning permissions include 10.100 dwellings (800 per annum).120 units) and windfalls (1.800 units at the Gallions Reach Urban Village and over 1. and noise and air pollution. and to 10% by 2001.Add these to existing unmet need and there are formidable issues to be tackled in the next decade. while Housing Association / Registered Social Landlord stock expanded to around 5% in 1991. If ‘non conventional capacity’ .589 dwellings per annum this significantly exceeds the annual capacity estimate. It must be aimed at meeting not only general housing need but also the specific housing needs of the population.440). size and affordability.198 units (net). if they so wish.

This will also apply to greenfield sites in the Kidbrooke Development Area (See Policy H4 and reason) and the change of use of employment sites outside defined employment locations (See Policy J5 and reason).10 3. In these circumstances. LRC.This target is reasonably practicable given the Council’s extensive and successful experience of negotiating for affordable housing which contributes to strategic and Borough needs and is supported by the Three Dragons / Nottingham Trent University report ‘Affordable Housing in London’. The target includes affordable housing from all sources and not just those secured through planning obligations. It is anticipated that the capacity estimates will be exceeded but not at a sufficient scale to satisfy the affordable housing needs.000 for a one-bedroomed home to £154. 1989.3. It would be inappropriate. and where people feel proud and able to contribute to the life of their local community’. Within the Mayor’s 50% target. HOUSING 53 . minus the supply of affordable housing (2. to seek 100% affordable housing. unachievable and not the role of the planning system. average earned household income was only £19.158 households per annum). the priority need is for socially rented housing with a small element of shared ownership and that low cost market housing does not meet any housing need.090 additional affordable dwellings by 2011.109 units per annum.12 3. London Pride Partnership 1998 / The Impact of High Cost Housing in Greenwich. By this is meant: Decent good quality homes: well designed and maintained. the Council considers a 35% target justified. warm and dry. for example on readily developable windfall sites. Lack of affordable housing has damaging consequences for both the Londonwide and local economy and local communities. The London Plan states that targets in UDPs should be based on realistic assessments of need and supply.11 3.377 households.5). This gives a net affordable housing requirement over the next 5 years of 1.400 for a four bedroom property and minimum private rents were from £470 to £933 per month. totalling 11. 3. The London Plan sets out a strategic target that 50% of all additional dwellings should be affordable. secure. Over the 5 years to 2007 there is therefore a need to provide an additional 6.13 The Council’s Housing Strategy (2002-2007) vision for housing is ‘In 2010 we want Greenwich to be a place where everyone is able to afford a decent home of his or her choice.The survey went on to identify affordable housing needs arising from the need to reduce the backlog of households in unsuitable accommodation (2. Affordable homes: a range of housing options that are within people’s ability to pay. and part of a good quality urban environment.287 households per annum).The analysis concluded that in terms of types of affordable housing. he proposes a split of 70% social rented and 30% intermediate housing. taking into account strategic housing need and the strategic housing target set out in the London Plan.699 per annum. (Affordable Homes for London.730 affordable dwellings.9 Housing Need and Affordability The Council’s Housing Needs Survey (2002) found that a significant proportion of households in the Borough could not afford to buy or rent on the open market.346 units per annum.1 (see para 3. to be met at a rate of 475 households per annum over 5 years). Borough housing need and the fact that housing supply is on target to significantly exceed the dwelling provision figure in Policy S.H. where a different approach to the levels of affordable housing is justified. It is recognised that where the economics of housing provision permit. healthy. It recognises that such targets should be sensitive to the economic and social circumstances of different parts of London. 50% affordable housing will be sought subject to Policy H14. from newly forming households (3. This reflected that whilst entry level prices for home ownership range from £74. The affordable housing needs identified in the Housing Needs Survey – for both 5 and 10 years – exceeds the housing capacity identified in the Borough (800 per annum). safe.The Report of the Mayor’s Housing Commission 2000).The Study also shows that over 10 years the annual requirement for affordable housing is 1.

and where the residential use of the site would not conflict with other policies and proposals of the Plan.5. The Borough has set a target that over 90% dwellings are provided on previously developed land. diverse and well maintained environment.Appropriate homes: a balance of the right type. As set out in paragraph 3.H10). Homes for all: an inclusive community from which no one is excluded because of discrimination. The two most significant areas are the continuing development of Thamesmead (Policy W4) and the residential part of the mixed-use development of the Greenwich Peninsula (Policy W3). for all types of households. In the interests of achieving sustainable development. (Policies H7 . To enable the development of the allocated land the Council will grant planning permissions (the Schedules state where planning permissions have been granted already) and will use its powers and influence to overcome infrastructure problems constraining development. 54 HOUSING . New community services should accompany major residential developments.14 Quantity Of Housing Policies The two key areas of policy are to: • Provide new homes • Prevent the loss of existing homes and housing land New Housing H1 Residential development. the re-use of previously developed land will be promoted to the extent that 90% of new dwellings will be provided on such land. Reason 3. the rate of planning permission for new dwellings is on target to significantly exceed that figure and the rate of planning completions is anticipated to exceed it as planning permissions are implemented. including the change of use of existing buildings. Developments of 15 units or more should provide a significant proportion of affordable housing (H14). In the development of sites sustainable residential quality principles will be applied consistent with the location of the sites to public transport. Small-scale ancillary and supporting commercial uses may also be appropriate. size and tenure across the Borough. will be acceptable on environmentally suitable sites. or because a suitable housing option is not available. The London Plan recommends a minimum provision of 16. including sites allocated on the Proposals Map and in the Site Schedules.15 The increasing number of households and existing housing need combine to produce a requirement for additional dwellings in the Borough. whether public or private. (Policy C3). Well managed homes: within a clean. car parking provision and the character of the area. Brownfield sites have been prioritised such that they comprise the vast majority of sites and significantly exceed the 60% target in PPG3.100 dwellings between 1997 and 2016. Policies 3.

Reason 3. particularly in the redevelopment of large estates.Preventing The Loss Of Housing H2 Planning permission will not be granted for a change of use or redevelopment that would result in the net loss of residential accommodation except in the following circumstances: i.16 It is important to safeguard the existing residential stock. The Council’s Empty Homes Strategy sets out a coordinated approach to this issue. Change of use to local community services in accordance with the criteria in Policies C4 and C5. HOUSING 55 . ii. In particular.17 The effective use of existing residential buildings will not only enable a better use of resources but will assist in meeting the housing requirements of the Borough. Reason 3. iii. notwithstanding the application of sustainable residential quality principles. The policy also sets out exceptions for changes of use to other forms of residential accommodation. Where a reasonable standard of accommodation cannot be attained in the larger town centres in accordance with Policy TC21. that a net loss of housing may occur as a result of an improved residential environment being created. Where residential land or buildings are redeveloped the Council will normally insist that existing residential floorspace and units be replaced. as the need for housing remains. iv. and to reduce the need to find replacement housing land. Change of use to another form of residential accommodation consistent with Policy H21 (Supported Housing). empty residential properties should be brought back into housing use. However it is also recognised. v. The major problem is primarily with vacant properties in the private sector. Effective Use Of Dwellings H3 The Council will seek to make good use of residential buildings and will particularly examine ways to encourage and assist empty residential accommodation back into housing use. Where it is not possible to achieve the required quality of provision through redevelopment without a net loss of dwellings. Change of use to guesthouses and bed and breakfast accommodation in accordance with the criteria in Policy T2.

iv. integrated with the surrounding area. (2) Raising the level of safety.400 dwellings which will include the replacement of 1. residential led.900 homes on the Ferrier Estate Development of 4. vi. An improved transport interchange and public transport to and from the area. ‘Building New Links’. Creating quality open spaces. iii. The aim is to create a mixed neighbourhood. (3) Transforming housing and local infrastructure. is designated as a mixeduse. On greenfield sites in the development area identified for housing development. Kidbrooke is recognised as an Area of Intensification in the London Plan. The proposals provide for the: • • • • • • Demolition of 1.900 affordable homes Development of a more traditional street pattern providing a safer environment Creation of a new central park and better access to open space Increased access to employment and training opportunities Improvements to the road network and transport infrastructure. as defined on the Proposals Map.The bid has three strategic themes: (1) Tackling social exclusion and promoting opportunity. including 1. particularly to the north of the Borough • Development of new community. ii. 3. Provision of a total of 4. 50% affordable housing will be sought.900 affordable homes. Providing a local shopping centre which acts as a commercial hub for the area. Creating a mixed neighbourhood and community integrated with the surrounding area providing a sustainable environment. The redevelopment and regeneration of this area will be required to deliver the following objectives: i.Kidbrooke Development Area H4 The Kidbrooke Development Area. It is vital that all developments contribute in an integrated way to the regeneration of this area.The reconfiguration of open spaces has led to proposals for the development of a limited number of greenfield sites. 3. v. Development proposals will be expected to take account of the proposed masterplan which is to be the basis of a supplementary planning document. which provides a quality and sustainable environment for its residents.400 new homes. workers and visitors. in recognition of the economics of housing provision.19 A key part of the third theme has been a land use reassessment of the land around Kidbrooke station including the Ferrier Estate.18 In 1999 the Council and its partners were successful in a Single Regeneration Bid for the South Greenwich Area. commercial and retail facilities as part of a new local centre around a transport hub.Therefore development proposals which seek to anticipate the masterplan and where they will be detrimental to the coherent regeneration of the area will be resisted. On these sites it is considered the economics of housing provision will allow for a target of 50% 56 HOUSING .20 The masterplan will be progressed as the Kidbrooke Development Area Supplementary Planning Document. regeneration area. Any proposals which would be detrimental to the implementation of any aspect of the masterplan will be resisted. Reason 3. A masterplan that assumes redevelopment of the Kidbrooke Development Area has been prepared and has been subject to extensive consultation with both residents and landowners.

400 sqft (130 sqm) (net floor area) where they form part of a terrace. safe and secure access to all dwellings is provided.affordable housing to be pursued and this will be taken into account in applying Policy H14 in the Kidbrooke Development Area. ii. Reason for H5 and H6 3. the impact on the environment and the character of the area. the existing stock of small and medium size family dwellings still have a vital and versatile role to play in meeting housing need and should be protected. There is adequate space for and access to dustbins which. The sub division of residential property will be permitted if the following criteria are fulfilled: i. Car parking in the surrounding grounds meets the car parking standards and is dealt with sensitively (Policy M23). iii. vii. However. (Policies H7 and H16). 3. Each unit of accommodation is self contained. the nature of accommodation provided. should be in suitably located and designed enclosures. viii. The policy is tighter for terraced properties in recognition of the need to retain medium sized terraced properties for family accommodation in areas of conversion pressure and the greater difficulty of providing an acceptable standard of conversion (e. particularly small households. ii.200 sqft (111. On street parking problems aggravate the safety and free flow of traffic and pedestrians in the area (see Policy M27). and sound insulation and ventilation treatment against road and railway noise is installed on noise sensitive facades.16. Adequate. iv. 3. in all appropriate cases. Any extensions or additions are limited to an appropriate size and meet with the design Policies (D9 and D10). All conversions will be expected to be self contained. Sound insulation is installed to alleviate the problems of noise both between the new residential units and between them and neighbouring dwellings.22 HOUSING 57 . H6 The original premises are less than 1. vi. The character and appearance of the surrounding area and buildings is adversely affected. v. Dwellings intended for families are provided on the ground floor or have direct access to a garden. Special consideration should be given to the division of the garden areas with the aim that all units have access to garden spaces. the sub division of residential property will not be permitted where there are any of the following circumstances: i. impact of noise. car parking). Changes of use to non self-contained accommodation are covered under Policy H.48 sqm) (net floor area) excluding any garages or less than 1.They can assist in balancing the type and size of dwellings to population needs. iii. The Council has more detailed guidelines for standards of conversions in Advice Note No.g. Conversions H5 To protect small and medium sized family dwellings and the local environment. meet internal space and design standards and provide a suitable mix of dwellings. For each application received reference will be made to existing conversions in each street.21 A further way of providing more new homes will be to allow the sub division of dwellings. Internal space and design standards are acceptable.

3. site location and public transport accessibility. crime prevention and community safety considerations. Aspect and orientation.23 Quality Of Housing Policies The Council’s policies aim to: i. Waste recycling. Secure the improvement of sub standard housing and improve residential environments. car parking (Policies D5. Landscaping the environment around the dwellings. Reason 3. viii. v. It expects developments to: • create places and spaces for people which are attractive. • avoid inflexible planning standards and reduce road widths. have their own distinct identity but respect and enhance local character. (Policy H17). ii. layout and in developments vulnerable to transportation noise and vibration.24 A key objective of PPG3 ‘Housing’ (2000) is to promote good design in new housing developments to create a high quality living environment where people will choose to live. vi. xi. Dwelling mix is consistent with Policy H15. In considering proposals the Council will take into account the key relationships between the character of the area. x. redevelopment or conversions will be expected to achieve a high quality of housing design and environment. traffic speeds and promote safer environments for pedestrians. ii. • promote designs and layouts which are safe and take account of public health. The achievement of the Building Research Establishment’s ‘EcoHomes’ excellent rating. which addresses a wide variety of environmental issues (Policy D1) The design of the development is consistent with Policies D1 D3. (Policy E15) Developments over 25 units should be accompanied by a Design Statement (Policy D2). (Policy E3). iii. Housing Design H7 New residential development. Privacy of adjoining occupiers. Dwellings intended for families should normally have direct access to a private garden (see H11). vii. Safety and security of residents and public (see Policy D7). An acceptable level of noise insulation being achieved by means of sensitive design. Achieve a high quality of housing design and environment. ix. and • promote the energy efficiency of new housing were possible. • focus on the quality of places and living environments being created and give priority to the needs of pedestrians rather than the movement and parking vehicles. iv. M26 and M28) and housing densities (Policies H8 and H9) and give particular regard to: i. 58 HOUSING . The provision of new housing to Lifetime Homes standards.

450 HRH (80. older people and families.300 HRH (70 . iii. 150. protection against transportation noise and/or vibration and where appropriate other noise.uk/ecohomes. single people. 170. car parking standards and the character of the surrounding area. public transport accessibility. to the individual characteristics of the site and the character of the surrounding area. New housing development should incorporate in design and layout.100 HRA) for dwellings for families. Further details are available at www. M26 and M8) and housing densities (Policies H8 and H9) to create sustainable residential environments is acknowledged. The policies recognise that densities should be higher at places with good public transport accessibility. where it can be demonstrated that the design is of exceptional quality. on sites of high public transport accessibility. car parking standards (Policies D5. This approach is consistent with the guidance contained in PPG3 and the London Plan which emphasise making the best sustainable use of land and achieving higher densities at places with good public transport accessibility. The Building Research Establishment’s ‘EcoHomes’ rating is a flexible and independently verified environmental assessment method. the Council will permit development at the following densities: i. Over 450 HRH (182 HRA) for non-family dwellings will be accepted in exceptional circumstances. Reason for H8 and H9 3.25 The Borough has a number of contrasting residential environments. as is demonstrated by the work on Sustainable Residential Quality commissioned by the former LPAC.182 HRA) for non-family dwellings on sites in the Borough’s Major and District Centres (See Table TC1) or with immediate access to a network of good public transport facilities.The close interrelationship of these with the location of sites (Policy H1). 200 . A post-construction validation report will be required by planning condition. In applying this policy it is recognised that many areas of the Borough. Extensions to residential properties are considered under Design Policies D9 and D10. A distinction is made between different household types. principally the Borough town centres and in those areas of the Waterfront well linked 3. having regard to the location of the site. Residential developments on the Greenwich Peninsula and the Gallions Ecopark in Thamesmead are already being built to such a standard. to preserve the amenity of future residents. particularly in the south. Density H8 When considering proposals for housing developments the Council will give priority to securing a high quality environment for residents and making the best sustainable use of land.27 HOUSING 59 .26 The density policies seek to secure a sustainable use of housing land consistent with achieving a high quality environment. Densities which will be considered appropriate are set out in Policy H9. Within that context the appropriate density on a site is based on the relationship between the location of the site. with environmental performance expressed on a scale of pass to excellent.bre.g.co. are suburban in character and have lower levels of public transport accessibility. ii. e.120 HRA) for non-family dwellings. Subject to Policies H7 and H8. All new housing developments should both provide a high quality of design and contribute positively to these surroundings.3. Larger developments because of their extent and impact are expected to be accompanied by a Design Statement which show how the proposals take into account urban design principles. H9 iv The above ranges will be applied to mixed residential developments in proportion to category.To achieve sustainable development. (Policy E3). public transport accessibility.250 HRH (60. developers are encouraged to attain the excellent standard. The policy sets out the factors the Council will take into account to ensure these are achieved.

They can also impose additional pressures on such services particularly where development. Backland and Infill Development H10 Residential development on backland and infill sites will only be favourably considered where all the following criteria are fulfilled: i. In the Borough’s tight urban fabric the opportunities for an acceptable form of this development are increasingly limited as the number of available sites decreases. the sensitive nature of these sites requires development only to be allowed where it will not adversely affect the local environment and where it will not lead to over development. An example of such a site is the exceptional and unique circumstances on the northern Greenwich Peninsula. ii. Developments in the latter category will be expected to assess what these additional pressures are and demonstrate how they are to be met and / or mitigated. Such schemes must demonstrate exemplary urban design. The character of the area is maintained with particular regard to the scale. a lower density may be appropriate. In addition. and sites of high public transport accessibility would have a PTAL of 5 or 6 (See Policy M13). (as defined in PPG3 Annex C). where densities outside the ranges indicated may be justifiable. either on its own or cumulatively. There is no unreasonable reduction in the amount of amenity space enjoyed by existing residents. for sites with high public transport accessibility. should be used for density calculations. However. design and density of the development. In contrast. Kitchens will be counted as habitable where they have an overall floor area greater than 13 sq. but excluding bathrooms. landings. toilets. For mixed-use schemes the calculation should be made by applying the same proportion of residential floorspace to total floorspace of the scheme to the site area of the scheme. a key factor in assessing public transport accessibility will be ‘Public Transport Accessibility Level’ (PTAL).28 Higher densities can play a role in sustaining local services and transport. halls and lobbies. including bedrooms. particularly trees or shrubs which would adversely affect the appearance and character of the area. 60 HOUSING . it is important to safeguard the interests of residents in surrounding houses by ensuring that residential amenity such as garden space. Sites with good public transport accessibility would have a PTAL of 4. (See Policy C3) For the purpose of density calculation. For the purposes of the policy. iii.The Policy recognises that there may be exceptional circumstances. especially for those in houses with the shared use of a garden. v. There is no unreasonable loss of privacy from overlooking adjoining houses and/or their back gardens. For sites with good / high public transport accessibility. is of a significant scale and intensity. m. 3. habitable rooms include all separate living rooms. There is no significant loss of wildlife habitats. The net residential area.29 Reason 3.into public transport. 3. There is no unreasonable increase in noise and disturbance from traffic gaining access.30 The pressure for land for new housing in the Borough means that infill and backland sites are increasingly considered for housing development. iv. privacy and the character of the area is maintained. car parking standards should be lower enabling a higher density development where this would not exacerbate on street parking problems in areas of the Borough where such car parking is at capacity.The score for each site will need to be assessed on an individual basis. it is also recognised that to preserve the residential character of some Conservation Areas.

All children benefit from having access to safe. There may be scope for a lower level of private amenity in some locations.37 HOUSING 61 . sitting out.5 – 2 a) per 1000 population. Play areas offer opportunities for social development for adults and children. In flats a terrace. to put into place mechanisms and initial funding for future management and maintenance of communal amenity space.This provides opportunities for recreation.0. Sizes and layouts of gardens should take into account the character of the local area. and neighbourhood equipped area for play (NEAP). local equipped area for play (LEAP). New developments and conversions should aim to secure some usable private amenity space for all households. NPFA propose three types of play areas: local areas for play (LAP). though important function. clothes drying and DIY are among the various activities for which a garden or some form of private outdoor space is essential. Family housing should normally have direct access to a private garden. in developments adjacent to public open space or on conversion schemes where site constraints may affect the ability to provide the desired level of amenity space. railways.4 .3 ha for outdoor equipped playgrounds for children of all ages and 0. NEAPs can be incorporated in a park or area of open space.8 ha (1. Reason 3. and visibility. Each incorporates features designed to encourage use within an appropriate age group. Play areas should be 3. for example. Children’s Play Areas H12 In residential developments that include over 50 units of family housing. Reason 3. a large development may require several LAPs.5 ha for casual or informal play space within housing areas. less than a minutes walk away. exercise and social contact. Play space should be distinguished from open space.This is in addition to any space occupied by front gardens. standards above the minimum will be needed.0. In areas where amenity provision is poor. Provision should cater for a range of ages: the size and type of facility taking into account existing provision and the population profile of families nearby. a minimum garden area of 50m2 in family housing should be provided. suitably equipped and well designed children’s play areas should be provided.36 3.35 Children make up around 20% of the Borough’s population. Dwellings with direct access to private gardens are the most appropriate form of provision for families with children.33 3.31 Gardening. good-sized balcony or enclosed communal gardens (not accessible to the general public) should be provided. The National Playing Fields Association (NPFA) recommends minimum standards for children’s outdoor play space of between 0. a separate requirement dealt with elsewhere (Policy O9). Walking time is an important factor determining whether a play area will be used by a particular age group: very young children do not walk far. children’s play. privacy and security. Design and siting of play areas should take into account accessibility.0. NPFA Standards apply regardless of whether people have access to good-sized gardens or not. waterways and other potential hazards.32 3.Amenity Space and Gardens H11 In new residential schemes and conversions developers will be expected to provide sufficient amenity space to meet the needs of residents. The Council will seek an agreement with developers in accordance with Policy SC2. including proximity to main roads. Gardens have an important role to play in encouraging biodiversity and generally raising the environmental quality of an area.This includes 0. which gardens do not. which serves a different. As a guide.6 . safety.34 3.2 . communal play space.

2.The precise percentage. Sustainable development emphasises the renewal and continued use of such properties. 3.38 In some locations. Where the children’s play area is principally of benefit to the occupiers of the development itself.42 The Council supports the contribution to housing variety that can be made by Registered Social Landlords and others which allocate dwellings on the basis of housing need. The Council’s Housing Strategy Statement sets out the targeted programme and resources needed for renewal of both Council stock and other property in the Borough. a programme of improvement is needed that recognises that disrepair is not only concentrated in some areas but is more widespread throughout the Borough.located so as to minimise conflict and allow for a level of informal supervision. the Council’s policies will be to: 1. Alternatively. Affordable Housing H14 Housing and mixed-use developments with 15 or more units or residential sites of 0. particularly the smaller specialist housing associations. Where area based initiatives are pursued they should be linked to environmental improvements (see Policy D32).40 There is concern over the growing deterioration in the housing stock. The Private Sector Improvement Areas In Greenwich’ report (LRC 1995) identifies such areas. See also Policy H2 on the redevelopment of housing.g. in providing for special housing needs. the economics of housing provision. to put into place mechanisms and initial funding for future maintenance.39 3.5 hectare or more are expected to provide a significant element of affordable dwellings on site. Reason 3. Provide appropriate forms of housing for people with special needs. including special housing needs. the Council may accept the provision of a play area in a nearby area of public open space rather than within the development itself. It recognises the key role they play. In response. distribution and type of affordable housing will be determined by the particular circumstances and characteristics of the site and the development. supported housing. Provide a well-integrated mix of decent homes of different types and tenures to support a range of household sizes. where more beneficial to the local community. Further guidance can be found in The Six Acre Standard: Minimum Standards for Outdoor Playing Space published by The National Playing Fields Association (2001). Housing Improvement H13 The Council will encourage the improvement or refurbishment of the housing stock in areas where it is particularly needed along with upgrading the overall environment. other planning objectives and the scale of need for affordable housing as set out in Policy SH5. ages and incomes. a financial contribution towards enhancing existing. 3. in particular Plumstead. 3. housing for minority ethnic groups. Variety Of Housing Policies To ensure a sufficient variety of housing is available for the different types of households and to provide mixed and balanced communities. particularly those which seek to meet the needs of disadvantaged groups. housing for single people. nearby provision may be acceptable.41 62 HOUSING . e.This has and continues to be integrated with improvements taking place as part of wider regeneration programmes. the Council will seek to make legal agreements with developers in accordance with Policy SC2.

Circular 6/98 and the London Plan recognise that the precise proportion of affordable housing to be achieved is subject to negotiation on individual schemes taking into account the factors set out in the policy. will only help a small number of households. Where. 3. The site thresholds for affordable housing are consistent with the Housing Needs Survey and the guidance in the proposed changes to PPG3 published in July 2003. be provided as 70% social rented and 30% intermediate housing. Therefore for the purpose of this policy affordable housing is defined as housing to meet the needs of households whose incomes are not sufficient to allow them to access appropriate housing in the local housing market. that in the Borough low cost market housing does not meet any housing need.44 3.47 HOUSING 63 . where the economics of housing provision permit. The provision of intermediate housing (including key worker housing) through shared ownership initiatives. sub-market renting etc also forms part of the affordable housing. In practice this is social rented housing and intermediate housing.£30.Reason 3. The policy. and the Housing Needs Survey confirms.45 3. developers are encouraged to involve a registered social landlord to own and/or manage the affordable housing.000. households with a gross income of between £18. the proportion will be 30%.Therefore in areas with a large extent of social housing. The London Plan recognises. To secure the affordable housing effectively in the long term. but the proportion will relate to the need to achieve mixed and balanced communities.46 3.001 . However the Housing Needs Survey concluded that shared ownership. Both PPG3 and Circular 6/98 state that it is for local authorities to define what is considered to be affordable based on local assessments. In the Borough most people who do not yet have their own separate dwelling cannot afford to buy or rent at market prices a dwelling suited to their needs (see para 3. for example on readily developable windfall sites. In this context intermediate housing should form a component of the affordable housing. ii. In some instances.000 . it is proposed that the affordable housing.The Council therefore intends that at least 35% of all new homes should be affordable to meet the needs of people who cannot afford to rent or buy at market price. 50% affordable housing will be sought (See also para 3. households with a gross income of between £25. exceptionally. (which is a key element of intermediate housing). whilst conversely in other areas it will be lower.000.12 and Policies H4 and J5). Lack of affordable housing has damaging consequences for the local economy and the local community. This will be confirmed through the use of appropriate conditions and/or legal agreements.£25. Circular 6/98 suggests that affordable housing encompasses both low-cost market and subsidised housing that will be available to people who cannot afford to rent or buy houses generally available on the open market. a registered social landlord is not involved the Council will use conditions and / or legal obligations as appropriate to secure the future occupancy for people in housing need. The intermediate housing will be secured through a legal agreement. The thresholds also apply to mixed use schemes including residential use where the 15 unit threshold is met.The affordable housing that is provided should be distributed across the site to help create mixed communities. To accord with the London Plan.9).43 PPG3 ‘Housing’ and Circular 6/98 ‘Planning and Affordable Housing’ recognise that the need for affordable housing is a material planning consideration to be taken into account in formulating development plan policies and in determining planning applications. The agreement will include an Affordable Housing Marketing Plan which will include the following objectives: a) in respect of intermediate units with Social Housing Grant priority is to be given initially in equal proportions to households in the following income bands: i. with the greatest need being for social rented housing.

Firstly. town centres. priority is to be given to households where gross income is up to £40. local shops.iii.This will encourage the development of mixed and balanced communities. Any financial contribution will be reserved for the provision of affordable housing elsewhere in the Borough and secured through a legal agreement. it would be desirable for developments to include a mix where 35% of the total residential floorspace is allocated to units containing three or more bedrooms. The Greenwich Council Housing Needs Survey (2002) identified that of the total housing need between 2002 and 2007. play areas and amenities. Housing Mix H15 A mix of housing types and sizes will be expected in all developments including conversions. where it would contribute to the provision of mixed and balanced communities. The application of the financial figures above will be subject to RPI indexation through the plan period (February 2004 base).000. To create balanced and mixed communities including homes suitable for family use. Smaller dwellings can also be provided by conversions. Rather the most satisfactory solution is for all new developments to have a proportion of small units and a mixture of dwellings for different household sizes. should have a higher intensity of development which may lead to a greater proportion of flats. Secondly. Factors such as schemes for special needs groups or where there is a poor external environment will affect the mix.000 provided that the proportion of disposable income required to fund the purchase is no greater than 50%. Only in the following exceptional criteria will off site provision or financial contributions be acceptable. particularly on developments over 25 dwellings. e. provided that the proportion of disposable income required to fund the purchase is no greater than 40% b) in respect of intermediate units without Social Housing Grant and in respect of affordable housing discount for sale units. be related to the adequate provision of accessible nursery and primary schools. including family houses or ground floor flats with direct access to private gardens. There remains a need to provide for households with children. Schemes with predominantly family housing should.48 There is a presumption in favour of the on site provision of affordable housing where it is viable to do so. households with a gross income of between £30. Small units are defined for the purpose of this policy as one bedroom units and two bedroom units which include at least one single bedroom. Both large and small units should be included and dwellings for families should have direct access to a garden. should be of a good overall floorspace. 5% of the units provided should be three bedrooms and 20% four or more bedrooms. Reason 3. 3.The mix on each site will vary according to the location of the development and the character of the surrounding area. as far as is practicable. including studio flats. The mix will also be influenced by the location of development.001 -£36.g. It is recognised in particular that there is an increasing number of small households in the Borough but this does not justify new developments being overwhelmed by smaller dwellings. Areas of good public transport accessibility.50 64 HOUSING .49 PPG3 ‘Housing’ recognises that planning policies should be used to secure an appropriate mix of dwelling size and type in new developments and conversions to meet the changing composition of households in the area. 3. Small units. where the site / building configuration or layout makes the provision impractical. such as where affordable housing is already concentrated and where further affordable housing would not contribute to mixed and balanced communities.

H16

Conversions and new residential developments which provide non self contained or bedsitter accommodation for non-family use will only be considered where they are of a satisfactory internal layout, are registered with the Council's HMO Registration Scheme and meet or are capable of meeting its standards, except where; i In terms of conversion, the original dwelling house is less than 1,200 sqft (111.48 sqm) (net floor area) excluding any garages or less than 1,400 sqft (130 sqm) (net floor area) where they form part of a terrace; or The proposal will lead to an over concentration of non self contained or bedsitter accommodation which is considered detrimental to the character of an area; The arrangements for car parking are inadequate.

ii iii

Reason 3.51 The Council wish to set standards for the provision of shared home accommodation. It is important to have control over such forms of residential development yet, at the same time, help towards promoting the provision of a wide range of housing options. Conversion of non self contained units and bedsitting rooms (HMOs) does not increase the number of units available and may decrease it. It is important to retain a variety of accommodation for local needs and rented non self contained shared accommodation and bedsits provide a source of affordable housing for young people and for others who are “non priority” homeless. However, HMOs should not lead to the loss of small and medium sized family dwellings for which there is a continuing demand and they should provide a satisfactory and safe standard of accommodation. Registration with the Council’s scheme as operated by the Environmental Health Department achieves this. It is accepted that HMOs will have fewer car owning households but some level of provision is needed. Lifetime Homes H17 New housing should be built to Lifetime Homes standards. Conversions should aim to incorporate as many of the standards as practicable. Lifetime Home include the following access requirements: i. ii. iii. iv. v. Level or gently sloping approach and flush thresholds. Entrances illuminated.The main entrance should be covered. Distance from the car-parking space to the home to be kept to a minimum. Where car-parking is adjacent to the home, it should be capable of being enlarged to a width of 3.3 metres. Where homes are reached via a lift, this should be wheelchair accessible.

3.52

Reason 3.53 Lifetime Homes are ordinary homes designed to accommodate the changing needs of occupants throughout their lives. They incorporate 16 standards as set out in the Joseph Rowntree report Designing Lifetime Homes. Reduced versions of these standards are required under Part M of the Building Regulations. Because of their flexibility Lifetime Homes can meet a wider range of needs than other types of housing. Lifetime Homes are not ‘special needs’ housing: they offer greater convenience to everyone. At the same time, they enable people to stay in their homes if they become less mobile; enable people with disabilities to visit friends or relatives more easily; and expand people with disabilities’

3.54

HOUSING

65

housing options, whose choice is currently limited. An estimated 32% of households contain a member with a limiting long-term illness (2001 Census). Lifetime Homes also respond to other groups housing needs more effectively, in particular, families with young children. Add to this the increasing number of older people - as more of us are living longer - there is a need to ensure a corresponding increase in the amount of housing accessible to the community as a whole. 3.55 Lifetime Homes because of their adaptability do not require structural alterations to be made should adaptations be needed later on; and because accessibility is built in from the start, these are less likely to be needed in the first place. By making better use of limited resources, Lifetime Homes can contribute towards the aim of sustainable development. In addition to standards indicated above Lifetime Homes comprise: 1. Width of doorways and hallways in accordance with Access Committee for England standards 2. Space for turning for wheelchair users in kitchens, dining areas and sitting rooms; adequate circulation space elsewhere 3. Sitting room / family room at entrance level 4. Ground floor bed space 5. Wheelchair accessible downstairs toilet, with drainage and service provision to enable a shower to be fitted 6. Walls in bathrooms and toilets capable of taking adaptations, such as handrails 7. Provision for a future stairlift and space for through floor house lift 8. Bath / bedroom ceiling strong or capable of being made strong enough to take a hoist 9. Bathroom layout designed to incorporate ease of access 10. Living room window glazing to begin at 800mm or lower and windows to be easy to open/operate 11. Switches, sockets and service controls at a convenient height, between 600mm and 1200mm from the floor 3.56 Lifetime Homes are a way of enhancing the quality, safety and accessibility of housing at little or no extra cost.Viewed over time, they are highly cost-effective. As the standards become more widely adopted, costs will fall. On some steep sites it may not be possible to achieve all the standards, such as level thresholds.

66

HOUSING

Sheltered Housing H18 When considering proposals for sheltered housing for older people, the Council will have regard to the following criteria: i. Sheltered developments should normally be located in residential areas not more than 200 metres from a local parade of shops having all of the services set out in Policy TC19 and be within easy walking distance of local amenities such as public transport and community facilities; Such developments should have good vehicular access for residents, ambulances, health care professionals and visitors and should make provision for car parking at the Borough's standard of 1 space per 3 dwellings; Such developments should comply with residential density policies; There should generally be a minimum of 20 dwellings and a maximum of 40 in each development with a resident warden. In smaller schemes without a resident warden adequacy of services provided will be taken into account; A high quality of landscaping and sufficient amenity space is provided.

ii.

iii. iv.

v.

Reason 3.57 The provision of sheltered housing to meet the specific needs of older people is recognised. Recent years have seen an expansion in the range of such accommodation. However, provision should be well distributed to give older people the opportunity to be housed in their own local area. It is important that in the development of schemes, policy criteria are met so that schemes are appropriately located, designed and equipped. Wheelchair Standard Housing H19 In residential developments of 25 or more units at suitable sites and locations, the Council will seek to negotiate 10% of dwellings to be built to full wheelchair standard. In the case of private housing, the requirement may be provided as units capable of adaptation to full wheelchair standard without further structural alterations. Reason 3.58 PPS1 states that Development Plan policies should address accessibility (both in terms of location and physical access) for all members of the community. As PPG3 makes clear ‘developers should already be considering whether the internal design of housing, and access to it, can meet the needs of people with disabilities, whether as residents or visitors.’ Access arrangements are in part covered under Part M of the Building Regulations and the need for wheelchair housing should decline as more of the general housing stock becomes accessible. However, there will still be some need for Wheelchair Standard housing. In addition to the Lifetime Homes Standards described above, its main feature is the larger space standards and wider doors which enable greater ease of access for wheelchair users. People with disabilities’ housing options are currently restricted because the majority of the housing stock is not accessible.There is, therefore, a need to increase provision and extend choice across a whole range of housing types, sizes and tenures. A mix of units should be provided within the proportion indicated above, preferably distributed across the site as a whole, rather than grouped together; though siting should take into consideration ease of access. Suitable locations include those where the site is level and surrounding area relatively flat, with public transport, shops and a range of community facilities close by.

3.59

HOUSING

67

3.60

Because of the additional cost in providing the more generous than average space standards required, it is appropriate that wheelchair housing is provided in larger schemes. In practice, it is likely that most Wheelchair Standard Housing will be provided as affordable housing. The Greenwich Wheelchair Site Brief (2002) gives further guidance. Planning policies for residential extensions may be relaxed to enable a person with a disability to continue living in their own home. Reason

H20

3.61

A person may become disabled but not wish to undergo the disruption of moving house. Where possible the Council wishes to enable them to adapt their present home.The Council would wish to exercise reasonable discretion in allowing an extension, for instance a ground floor bathroom and bedroom, to be added to a dwelling for the use of a person with a disability. (See Policies D9 & D10) Supported Housing

H21

Proposals for residential care homes, hostels, cluster flats, refuges and other supported accommodation required by the local community will be given sympathetic consideration. In taking a decision the Council will have regard to all the following considerations: i. ii. Location in residential areas with good access to essential services, including public transport and shops. Impact upon the local environment and the character of the area, taking into account intensity and scale of use and whether the development would lead to an overconcentration of provision in the area. Extensions to existing properties should be consistent with Policies D9 and D10. Satisfactory vehicular access. Provision of adequate private amenity space for clients. Compliance with relevant car parking standards.

iii. iv. v. vi.

vii. An identified local need. viii. The size of the unit and the standard and suitability of the provision for the client group. ix. The particular locational needs of the client group.

Reason 3.62 Some people, for a part or exceptionally for all their lives, need supported housing or residential care. Such accommodation needs to be provided if the appropriate range is to be on offer. Groups who may need such provision at some time include: the very young, older people, single people living in large lodging houses, or through time spent in long stay hospitals for people with learning disabilities or those recovering from mental health problems, people with long term illnesses including AIDS and HIV, women escaping violence, lone parents, people with disabilities, young lesbians and gay men forced to leave home, young people leaving care and homeless people. Nationally, in response to these needs, small hostels, including cluster flats and supported flats, are beginning to be part of the range of accommodation provided, replacing institutions, long stay hospitals, the large traditional lodging houses and resettlement units. In spite of the possible apprehension of local residents, small hostels and shared houses are essentially needed as part of the drive to provide care in the community. In order to maximise full integration in the community it is essential that wherever possible the accommodation should be distributed throughout the

3.63

68

HOUSING

Borough, avoiding a concentration of schemes and preferably sited in residential areas. Overconcentration of any one type of provision can have a detrimental impact on an area, in terms of additional noise, visual intrusion and traffic generation and place additional stress on already overburdened services. It is not compatible with the aim of achieving socially mixed communities and may undermine any systems of informal support between vulnerable and less vulnerable members of the community that emerge. Smaller scale schemes are more likely to fit in with existing residential communities. Whether or not a particular scheme will lead to over-concentration will be determined by taking into account the number, scale and type of provision and levels of need, for the type of scheme proposed, that exist in the immediate area. Proposals should also respect the privacy of special needs groups and enhance the opportunities for full integration.There should be good access to family, when appropriate, and essential services including shops and transport. Proposals which result in the loss of supported housing will take into account the continued local need for such housing. 3.64 In providing this accommodation measures must be taken to ensure that adequate space, privacy, amenity and design standards for special needs groups are maintained. In particular some exclusive provision needs to be made for women who may be reluctant to use mixed facilities. Generally proposals should adhere to the Housing Corporation’s DoE approved “Design and Contract” criteria, and for residential care homes the 1984 Registered Homes Act, the associated regulations and the Greenwich Standards and Practice Guidance for Residential Care Homes (1993). Travellers and Romany People H22 The Council will seek to retain existing provision for travellers and romany people.Any proposal for a new site should include provision for basic amenities and services and will be assessed against the following criteria: i. ii. iii. iv. v. The local need for the provision. The suitability of the site for the proposed uses. Highway considerations. Access to local shops, services and facilities. Compatibility with other polices of the Plan particularly in terms of environmental amenity and the need to retain open spaces.

Reason 3.65 The London Plan and Circular 1/94 ‘Gypsy Sites and Planning’ advise that development plans should include policies and criteria for dealing with gypsy site provision. The Borough already has a dedicated permanent site for travellers at Thistlebrook which provides 40 pitches. The policy sets out the criteria by which the development of future permanent or temporary sites will be assessed.

HOUSING

69

70 HOUSING .

ii. if its potential is to be realised. Community Open Space. viii. Public and private open space.The general policies are: To adopt a positive approach to the use and treatment of open space by: i. iii. v. SO3 SO4 vii. iv. Golf courses. Allotments. especially in areas of public open space deficiency. the urban areas will be made more attractive and ‘livable.’ The Strategy notes that through protecting and enhancing wildlife habitats and green spaces. including rivers and lakes. but as an integral part to our lives. iii. employment opportunities and improving the quality of life. Agriculture. biodiversity and open space features throughout the urban environment. SO1 To safeguard. improve and enhance the character of existing public and private open space (Green Belt. woodlands and orchards. Recognising the value of landscape. Open water features. Improving the environmental quality of open spaces. Large grounds attached to educational facilities and institutions. Open space. Nature conservation. is one of the Borough’s major resources and needs to be protected.1 Open spaces play a significant role in a civilised community contributing to a high quality environment. The only uses considered to be generally appropriate within MOL are: i. sportsgrounds and playing fields. SO2 Maintaining and increasing suitable recreational facilities. Metropolitan Open Land. residents and workers have adequate access to open space and the riverside. ii.‘the environment should not be seen as an addition or as separate. iv.2 The Greenwich Agenda 21 Strategy recognises the important role that the Borough’s open spaces play in a sustainable community.The needs of disadvantaged communities and groups with special requirements will be given emphasis. Open spaces of strategic importance (Metropolitan Open Land) will be maintained and their character safeguarded from built development and enhanced as appropriate. improved and made fuller use of. Identifying and conserving sites of nature conservation importance and.’ The OPEN SPACES 71 . OPEN SPACES GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 4. vi. small open spaces) that fulfil a specific function for the local and wider community and encourage full use of their facilities. Cemeteries and associated crematoria.4.They can therefore play an important role in sustaining and improving the amenity of residential districts. Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 4. To ensure that all communities. attracting new investment.

ecological. Protecting Open Space To safeguard and improve existing public and private open land from built development. eastern and southern parts of the Borough forming part of an area of Metropolitan Open Land known as the ‘Green Chain’. whilst encouraging a positive approach to the use of open space. As a result the immobile. 4. which require specialist facilities such as football and cricket pitches.5 4.4 4.6 4. There are sites of historical and ecological importance. the Green Chain and other open space designations. the Council will capitalise upon the roles that open space can play in the fulfillment of this Plan’s vision. leisure facilities. These open spaces provide a range of functions including recreational. Open space in the Borough is subject to pressures. health and well-being by ensuring that everyone has easy access to good quality sport and recreation facilities and open space. amenity and structural breaks in the overall urban environment. through Metropolitan Open Land. Open Space and Leisure Open space plays an essential role in providing the necessary facilities for the pursuit of a wide range of leisure and educational activities.7 72 OPEN SPACES . for example development pressure for housing. There are seven miles of Thames and Thameside. General leisure activities. which help to achieve a more balanced distribution of open space in the Borough. This approach is reflected in the division of the chapter into three broad themes. new road and public transport developments. historical. Within the framework of these competing land uses the Council recognises that not all the Borough’s residents have adequate access to open space. There is a major swathe of open spaces stretching through the central. These can be divided into three broad categories: Sporting activities. museums. sites of sculpture and visual imagery to refreshment facilities. and cultural and entertainment facilities which range from historical buildings. providing opportunities for recreation in the countryside and regenerating the economies of rural areas.3 Open space constitutes almost a quarter of the Borough’s total land area.The Council’s ‘Taking Leisure Forward’ (1998). 4. Greenwich and Lewisham. currently being updated as the ‘Fit for Sport’ Sport Strategy 2004-2008. particularly within our urban areas. younger and older people and parents with young children do not always have convenient access to recreational open space. open air theatres. whilst recognising that new open spaces are being provided as part of the developments of Thamesmead and the Greenwich Peninsula. Despite the relatively large amount of open space in the Borough some areas are deficient in public open space. • promote social inclusion. seeks to support initiatives of sporting excellence. community cohesion. PPG17 ‘Sport. by making our towns and cities more attractive places in which people will choose to live. ranging from local woodlands to large formal parks. Open Space and Recreation’ (2002) states that the Government’s main planning objectives for sport and recreation are to: • promote more sustainable patterns of development by creating and maintaining networks of recreational facilities and open spaces.Greenwich Strategy aims to promote the Borough’s and open spaces and the River Thames for recreation while protecting and enhancing the natural habitats they offer.The Green Chain stretches through the four South East London Boroughs of Bexley. and • support an urban renaissance and a rural renewal. It is important that the level of open space in the Borough is maintained. The Greenwich Strategy aims to promote and foster Greenwich as a centre of cultural excellence where sports and leisure facilities and activities are among the best in London. In order to realise the full potential of open space opportunities within the Borough. Sporting and general leisure activities have the potential to provide facilities for physical activity and hence to promote both physical and mental good health. ranging from walking and sitting to informal play. Bromley.

massing. The use of land for the open land uses stated in Policy SO4 will normally be permitted unless the use would result in an adverse change to the character of the open land. (See Policy D8). private gardens and wildlife features permeate and enrich the whole urban environment and such elements need to be considered during the development process and conserved. The proposal shall not result in an overall reduction of the provision of playing fields or sports pitches and associated facilities in the Borough. Londonwide the Mayor published a Biodiversity Strategy in 2002. identify those of particular importance and set out a programme for their protection and enhancement. In broad terms open spaces form a key part of the urban landscape. Existing trees of significance should be protected and replacement trees provided. Small scale built development which has a primary function for a purpose ancillary and essential to an appropriate use as stated in Policy SO4 may be permitted provided that the following criteria are met: a. The proposal should not have unacceptable adverse effects on neighbouring residential areas and should not result in an unacceptable level of noise or other disturbance. The design. d. The proposal shall not result in a significant increase in vehicular traffic to the site and any provision for parking shall not dominate or fragment the site.8 Open Space and The Environment Open space plays an important role in protecting and enhancing the environment and fulfilling the Greenwich Agenda 21 Strategy. to a non ancillary use will not normally be permitted. sound. to those on adjoining sites and to the character of the surrounding open land. c. Small open areas. Proposals for a change of use of an existing building. ii. The use of such a building for indoor sport or leisure use. siting and landscaping of the proposal should relate sensitively to other buildings on the site. The proposal should not be within a defined site of nature conservation importance (see Policy O18) nor prejudice the ecological or amenity significance of the area. Policies Protecting Open Space Metropolitan Open Land O1 In areas defined on the Proposals Map as Metropolitan Open Land: i. The proposal should not be visually intrusive and should have minimal impact upon the open nature of the area. They also provide opportunities for nature development and conservation as well as the resources for educational play and studies. combined with an outdoor use.4. which is in a use ancillary to that of the surrounding open space. All proposals shall be landscaped and introduce diversity to the wildlife interest of the site. which in turn exercises a profound influence on the Borough’s social and economic conditions. f. smell and touch). scale. OPEN SPACES 73 . making a contrast with built development through sensory perceptions (Sight. iii. e. b. The proposal must not result in the enlargement or creation of an area of public open space deficiency (see Policy O9). may be permitted subject to landscaping and the criteria above. The Greenwich Biodiversity Action Plan will provide an audit of existing species and habitats.

The open land comprises a variety of public and private open spaces. massing.Reason 4. the Council intends to safeguard open land of metropolitan importance from built development and maintain their structural contribution in providing a visual break in the built up areas of London. siting and landscaping of the proposal should relate sensitively to other buildings on the site. serving both the local and wider communities of South East London and is already used/has potential for outdoor recreation. iii. iv. For example some open space uses would be detrimental to the landscape and/or historic nature of the site and as a result would have an adverse impact on the character and quality of the MOL. to those on adjoining sites and to the character of the surrounding open land. In accordance with the London Plan. ancillary and essential to an appropriate use may be needed for the effective operation of such uses. The proposal should not have any adverse effects on neighbouring residential areas and should not result in an unacceptable level of noise or other disturbance. privately or publicly owned and accessible to the public or not.11 O2 ii. Changes of use of buildings from an ancillary to a non ancillary use will be resisted although it is recognised that exceptions could be made for indoor sport or leisure uses combined with an outdoor use. recreation and for the intrinsic qualities of ‘openness’ and ‘greenness’.This open space. scale. provides open air facilities and contains features or landscape of historic. Proposals for redevelopment. It is also recognised that not all open space uses identified in Policy SO4 are appropriate on all MOL sites.10 4. The policy sets out criteria by which such proposals are to be assessed. extension or change of use of existing built development within Metropolitan Open Land whose primary function is not ancillary to the use of adjoining open land will be controlled according to the following criteria: i. is needed both for active sport and informal leisure. The proposal shall not result in an overall reduction of the provision of playing fields or sports pitches and associated facilities in the Borough. vi. whether land or water. The proposal should not be within a defined site of nature conservation importance (see Policy O18) nor prejudice the ecological or amenity significance of the area. Any replacement buildings should not exceed the ground floor area or height of those existing on the site. The proposal should not be visually intrusive and should have minimal impact upon the open nature of the area. generally because of its size and catchment area. The design. In MOL the London Plan advises that there is a presumption against inappropriate development including development which would be harmful to the open character of the land. 74 OPEN SPACES .9 The London Plan defines Metropolitan Open Land as land of predominantly open character which has more than a Borough significance. The proposal must not result in the enlargement or creation of an area of public open space deficiency (see Policy O9). Whilst there is a presumption against built development it is accepted that some limited built development.These areas are also of significant strategic value for wildlife. The proposal shall not result in a significant increase in vehicular traffic to the site and any provision for parking shall not dominate or fragment the site. v. 4. vii. recreational and nature conservation interest all of which benefit the people of part or all of London. MOL provides breaks in the built up area.

and O3 vii. colleges. halls of residence and large houses all set in large grounds but whose primary function is not ancillary to the use of the open land. leaving 13. character or use. Reason 4. Proposals for expansion are to meet the following criteria: i.700 sqm (gross) of additional floorspace. historically (1994) planning permission was granted by the Secretary of State for the Environment for a substantial extension of the campus by 14. and their boundaries take into account these space needs. form part of a comprehensively planned development for each site.500 sqm of that additional floorspace. At the Mansion Site. At the Southwood Site planning permission has already been granted in 2003 for 6. This reflects the guidance on such sites in PPG2 ‘Green Belts’ Annex C. not exceed 21.13 The University of Greenwich has identified a need in the plan period for a further 21. hospitals. O4 OPEN SPACES 75 . The University of Greenwich Avery Hill Campus. would not lead to an increase in the height of the existing development or previously approved schemes.12 In some places Metropolitan Open Land includes substantial amounts of built form. such as schools. Existing trees of significance should be protected and replacement trees provided. There will be a presumption against extensions to existing buildings unless it can be demonstrated that any such development would be modest in scale and not be visually intrusive or have any adverse effect on the character of the surrounding Metropolitan Open Land. both sites are identified as Major Developed Sites in MOL (Site schedules o4 and o5). iii. or creating new access points into or between open land areas will be pursued. have no greater impact than existing or previously permitted development on the open character of MOL.700 sqm to be provided.viii. would not have an unreasonable effect on the surrounding environment and amenity of adjoining residents. Whilst it is recognised that some limited development may be warranted to enable the proper functioning of these buildings to continue. Reason 4. vi. iv. Mansion Site and Southwood Site.700 sqm of additional teaching and associated floorspace at their Avery Hill Campus. The Council will give special consideration to development proposals on land fringing. Possibilities for opening up visual links and green corridors. All proposals shall be landscaped and introduce diversity to the wildlife interest of the site. (See Policy D8). ii. are identified as Major Developed Sites (MDS) on the Proposals Map and in the Site Proposals Schedule. interpreted for a site in MOL. further development or intensification of use of such buildings could conflict with the objectives of maintaining and enhancing the character of MOL.900 sqm. v. would be well served by a variety of means of transport other than the private car. abutting or otherwise having a visual relationship with Metropolitan Open Land where development could be detrimental to its visual amenity. their nature and prominent or sensitive location is such that any significant extension. would not have an unacceptable effect on traffic flow or safety and includes adequate parking and access arrangements.To reflect this position.

clubs. redevelopment or extensions on land adjoining or relating visually to Metropolitan Open Land could have an impact on the appearance. Reason 4. which extend in a virtually continuous arc through the Boroughs of Bexley. In particular there are many residential properties with large gardens abutting the MOL boundary which the Council would wish to see retained as a buffer between built development and open land and ensure views to and from are protected. To conserve and enhance the visual amenity and ecological aspects of the landscape. To improve and encourage the provision of suitable recreational facilities. which is defined on the Proposals Map. ii. etc. A Management Plan for the future of the Green Chain (2003-2008) was published in 2004. The six objectives for the Green Chain are: i. iii. is defined as Green Belt land and should be retained as open space.15 MOL. These objectives have been jointly adopted by the four Boroughs and are pursued by the Green Chain Joint Committee and the Officers Working Party. 76 OPEN SPACES .16 This small area of open land forms part of a larger continuous area of Green Belt. To promote an overall identity for the area in order to increase public awareness of available recreational facilities. iv. comprises a number of public and private open spaces. vi. forming the Green Chain.The London Plan urges Boroughs to consider the valuable role of Green Chains and to consult with neighbouring planning authorities as appropriate. Lewisham and Bromley. owners. Greenwich. New Eltham.14 Development. with an emphasis on those serving a wide area of South East London and/or requiring open land. To encourage the collaboration and co operation of the various public and private agencies. Green Belt O6 The small area of land comprising the grounds of Stonefields. organisations. v. To improve public access to and through the area. largely in recreational use. Reason 4. and proposals need to be assessed accordingly. To safeguard the open land from built development and maintain its positive contribution in providing a visual and physical break in the built up area of London.Reason 4. character and use of the open spaces. which straddles the Borough’s boundary with Bromley. in the area to achieve the above objectives. Any proposals for this area must comply with the guidance contained in Planning Policy Guidance Note 2: Greenbelts (PPG2). Green Chain O5 Areas of Metropolitan Open Land forming part of the "Green Chain". will be promoted as a regional and local outdoor recreational resource and visual amenity in conjunction with other parts of the Green Chain in South East London.

younger and older people and parents with young children do not always have adequate access to open spaces for the purpose of recreation. The uneven distribution of public open space in the Borough of Greenwich and surrounding Boroughs means that less mobile people. which fulfil an environmental. etc. The open spaces comprise a variety of uses including local parks. Public Open Space Deficiency Areas O9 The Council will seek to increase the provision of public open space and improve public access in areas of open space deficiency identified on Map 5. and they do not all have general public access.19 The London Plan advises that UDP’s should identify areas of public open space deficiency and seek to reduce deficiencies in open space.17 The numerous public and private open spaces within the built up areas of the Borough not defined as Metropolitan Open Land provide important functions for the local and wider community. amenity open spaces and play areas not allocated for other uses. and need to be safeguarded equally from built development pressures. are limited in size and extent. assisting nature conservation. However many of the Borough’s parks and public open spaces contain derelict or under used buildings which could be used to provide better recreational facilities and act as a catalyst for the improvement of the surrounding open spaces.20 OPEN SPACES 77 . New buildings and extensions to existing buildings will only be permitted where they are ancillary to the existing land use. sensitively sited.. recreational. playing fields.The development of major new residential communities in areas deficient in open space should include a minimum public open space provision to the standards set out in Table O1. Reason 4. either through the creation of new open space to which the public have access or by enabling convenient access for all to existing open space. Map 5 identifies these areas. providing visual contrast and areas for play and sitting out.1 of the London Plan sets out London’s open space hierarchy and provides a benchmark for public open space provision across London. . contrasting with the overall built environment. providing space for recreation for residents. In every case they fulfil specific functions for the local or wider community and constitute welcome open breaks within the built up area. and are compatible with neighbouring development.18 Small open spaces play an important role in providing breaks in the built up area. Sites where new provision or improvements to open space can be made are identified 4. Changes of use of existing buildings in ancillary use will be considered in the light of Policy O1. subject to the criteria set out in Policy O1. Reason 4. allotments. Other Open Spaces O8 Other small open spaces. whether public or private (too small to be defined on the Proposals Map). sportsgrounds. preventing over development. Reason 4.Where existing built development within parks and public open spaces becomes surplus to demand. the Council may allow the sites to be redeveloped for specialist sporting development (which combine the use of outdoor and indoor space).Community Open Space O7 Public and private open space areas defined as Community Open Space on the Proposals Map will be safeguarded from built development.Table 3D. local nature conservation or amenity function will be safeguarded from built development and Policy O7 will apply.

Map 5: Public Open Space Deficiency Areas © Crown copyright Local and District Park Deficiency Area District Park Deficiency Area Local Park Deficiency Area NB This is a diagrammatic representation of Open Space Deficiency in the Borough. 78 OPEN SPACES . The determination of development proposals will be subject to a more detailed assessment.

21 In smaller new residential developments the priority will be on the provision of small local parks within easy walking distance of users. the creation of new parks and public open spaces in line with Policies O9 and C3.4km Under 2 hectares Less than 0.22 TABLE O1:TYPES OF PUBLICLY ACCESSIBLE OPEN SPACES Open Space Categorisation Regional Parks Metropolitan Parks District Parks Local Parks and Open Spaces Small Open Spaces Source:Table 3D.Thamesmead.2-8 km 60 hectares 3. It is considered necessary to improve and enhance existing nearby public open space to cope with increased demand. through planning obligations and conditions on planning permissions in line with Policy SC2.within the Site Schedules for open space. In excess of 25ha of public open space have (Central and Southern Parks) and are to be provided on the Greenwich Peninsula. A further 6ha of open space are to be provided within the new development at Tripcock Point. However.24 OPEN SPACES 79 . The Council’s overall approach to community benefits and planning obligations is set out in Policy SC2. Policy H12 deals with the provision of children’s play areas in new residential developments.2km 2 hectares 0. where appropriate. equivalent to the provision of a District Park.Tripcock Park will address the District Park deficiency in the Thamesmead area. especially in areas of deprivation. where major development places increased demand on existing areas. Policy O9 requires proposals in areas deficient in public open space to include new public open space provision.The Council will seek a legal agreement with developers in accordance with Policy SC2. major developments may also increase use of existing parks and public open spaces.4km Community Benefits O10 The Council will seek to secure improvement and enhancement of existing parks and public open spaces. A detailed appraisal will be carried out in all cases where open space deficiencies need to be improved. These parks and public open spaces should be reasonably related in location to the development proposed and should be of direct benefit to the occupiers of the new development. and.1 London Plan (2004) Size Guideline and Distance from Home 400 hectares 3.2 km 20 hectares 1. 4. to put 4. Minor extensions and improved access points to existing small local parks and open spaces can help alleviate deficiency. 4.23 There will be a significant increase in the number of households and the number of homes in the Borough during the plan period and the additional demands that this will place on existing facilities needs to be recognised.The development will deliver a network of open spaces that provide a variety of experiences and cater for different user groups. Reason 4.

Reason 4. (See also Policies C3 and D4). This is recognised in the Council’s ‘Fit for Sport’ Sport Strategy 2004-2008 . Open Space and Recreation’ (2002) states that playing fields should not be lost to development unless there is an established surplus of all forms of open space and that if playing fields are no longer required for their original purpose consideration should first be given to their use for other recreational and open space needs. The London Plan requires Boroughs to realise the value of open space and protect its many benefits including those associated with sport and recreation. vi. which provides a background and framework for sport in London and an approach to achieving the vision for the future.There is a strong case. or An alternative site or facility of at least an equivalent quantity and quality is provided in a suitable location.which identifies the importance of supporting 4. An appraisal of current and future needs for playing fields has demonstrated that there is an excess of playing field provision and the site has no special significance to the interests of sport or for school playing field(s) it would not result in the loss of playing fields below Department for Education and Skills standards. and The site is suplus to requirements of all other open space functions. vii. PPG17 ‘Sport. Open Space and Leisure Sportsgrounds and Playing Fields O11 The Council will resist granting planning permission for any development which would lead to the loss or would prejudice the use of a playing field or land last used as a playing field except where: A i. a playing pitch. Reference should also be made to The Sporting Capital: Regional Recreation Strategy for London (London Sport 1994). B iii. Sportsgrounds and educational playing fields in the Borough are also an important element in the overall regional provision for sports and recreation in London. therefore. or It would meet an identified need for an alternative open space use. or for other open spaces it is not of particular recreational or amenity value. and ii. People should have access to a range of high quality sports facilities. or The proposed development affects only land incapable of forming. (See Table O1) or It would combine the use of indoor and outdoor sports.26 4.25 Recreational facilities provided on private sportsgrounds and educational playing fields and within parks provide opportunities for team games and outdoor sports. providing a facility for sporting excellence which justifies the loss of land. The trend in most sports and recreational activities is towards an increase in participation. against any erosion in the provision of existing outdoor sports provision in the Borough. It would have minimal adverse impact on the open character of Metropolitan Open Land (in accordance with Policy O1). In addition there is the difficulty and expense of significantly improving the provision for outdoor sports and recreation within the built up areas of London.27 80 OPEN SPACES . iv. v. not just for the Borough.into place mechanisms and initial funding for improvements and enhancements of existing parks and public open spaces. or not forming part of.

For the former. sites for sports facilities must take into account public transport accessibility. Outside such locations.28 The policy distinguishes between school playing fields and other playing fields. making them less attractive places to visit. (See Policies D5. Park Facilities O12 The Council will seek to enhance open space by the provision and encouragement of appropriate park facilities (e.The Study will be taken into account in the application of this policy. Encouraging outdoor arts and cultural activities where they do not conflict with the appropriate uses of the open space for performance and exhibitions for example. Facilities should be of a high standard of design and quality and respect local nature conservation interests.31 The hours during which sports pitches can be used may be greatly increased by the use of floodlighting. and should provide for sporting excellence as validated by the appropriate sporting authority. Indoor sports facilities are subject to the sequential approach (See Policy TC16). children’s play equipment. adversely affect wildlife and be visually intrusive by day. sports pitches and changing facilities and Arts. (See also policies O1 and O7). Culture and Entertainment facilities. Reason 4. cause unacceptable night time nuisance in residential areas.The Council would like to realise the full potential of open space as a leisure resource. seating. pitch and putt.The Local Planning Authority is required to notify the Department for Communities and Local Government where they are minded to grant planning permission for the proposed development of a local authority owned playing field or used by an educational institution and Sport England have objected. Reason 4. refreshment facilities. In both cases an excess of playing fields will need to be demonstrated – based on the methodology detailed in ‘Towards a level playing field: a guide to the production of playing pitch strategies’ (February 2003) before alternative proposals will be considered. discussed within the Town Centres Chapter. Such facilities should be safe to use and accessible to all. Their use can. Department for Education and Skills standards are also to be met. benefiting the wider community. (See Policy E5: Light Pollution). Open spaces can be visually enhanced and used to a greater and more varied extent through appropriate outdoor uses. Indoor ACE facilities are encouraged in appropriate locations.The Council has published a Playing Fields and Allotments Study of the Borough. however. D6 and D7). Local Authorities are required to consult with Sport England where development proposals may affect a playing field or land used as a playing field in the last 5 years. 4. Any such outdoor sports facilities should be combined with outdoor facilities. 4. sculpture and visual imagery and areas for cultural exhibition and study) within suitable parks and public open spaces. incorporating an appraisal of future need in 2004. but it is recognised that the availability of large town centre sites for such facilities is limited.initiatives for sporting excellence in the Borough. outdoor tennis courts.g. enables cultural and artistic expression. Floodlighting O13 The Council will permit the floodlighting of sports facilities where they do not cause unacceptable nuisance or visual intrusion. In both cases the other criteria would also need to be met. Many of these initiatives combine indoor and outdoor facilities. such as open air performance spaces. In some cases their hours of use may be restricted.29 OPEN SPACES 81 .30 Many public open spaces contain few facilities.

Allotment gardening is generally a localised activity with plotholders living within easy walking distance of their plots. where they do not adversely affect nature conservation. particularly in the northern part of the Borough or where demand exceeds supply. Reason for O15 and O16 4. The precise route of the riverside path may vary according to the operational requirements of other river users.There are only 0. particularly in the northern part of the Borough. Reason 4. also forms part of the Capital Ring which is a 72 mile orbital path in London.000 people in the Borough (1997 mid year population estimate) compared with 0.The Thameside footpath now extends along most of the riverside apart from a couple of sections on the Charlton / Woolwich riverside. The Study will be taken into account in the application of this policy. 4. signposting.34 82 OPEN SPACES . The Council published a Playing Fields and Allotments Study of the Borough. (See Policies D5. O16 The existing riverside footpath will be safeguarded and improved so that a continuous signposted walk from Deptford to Thamesmead is created.The West Greenwich Development Framework recognises the opportunity to improve pedestrian linkages along and across the Creek. Many of the Borough’s best attractions can be approached on foot. which runs through the Green Chain Open Spaces. D6 and D7). The Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001) identifies the Green Chain Walk as one of six Strategic Walks in London. Development proposals for riverside sites will be required to incorporate provision for a riverside walkway along the river frontage or contribute to improvements where the existing footpath needs it.41 hectare per 1. in 2004.The Council will examine the potential to extend the riverside footpath along Deptford Creek.32 There is a continuing interest in allotment gardening and allotments constitute one of the more intensely used forms of recreational open land.The demand generally exceeds the supply of plots. In these areas it is to be provided on the redevelopment of adjacent riverside sites. The Council supports the inclusion of the riverside walkway in the Countryside Agency’s Thames Path National Trail.33 Walking is an important pursuit that combines both journeys of recreation and necessity for residents and visitors alike.The Green Chain Walk.The Council will endeavour to create a signposted network of continuous and circular routes.000 nationally). Contributions to footpath provision will be sought in accordance with Policy SC2.The provision of additional allotments.Allotments O14 The loss or change of use of existing allotment sites will be resisted. will be encouraged on suitable sites. Recreational Footpaths and Cycleways O15 Existing footpaths will be safeguarded and new footpaths created to and through open spaces and places of interest. The latter has benefited from the restored Ha’penny Hatch footbridge adjacent to the railway bridge. Footpaths and associated areas should be safe to use and accessible to all. In some areas it needs improvement. provision of information and publicising of suitable routes will encourage the use of open spaces and visits to places of interest. In particular the ‘Green Chain Walk’ footpath network will be improved and extended and new links created wherever possible.13 hectares of allotment land per 1.Amenity open space areas will be created at strategic locations en route and the possibility of creating open-air performance areas will be pursued with developers where appropriate. and the identification. incorporating an appraisal of future need.

The Council will consult interested groups. Conservation and enhancement of important scientific features will be sought by appropriate management. in conjunction with non leisure cycleways (see Policy M32). A re-survey commissioned by the GLA Biodiversity Unit: ‘Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation in Greenwich (September 2004)’ updates the previous list of sites. In general development of these sites or areas. particularly in the Green Chain Area. where the distances involved make cycling particularly appropriate. Reason 4. Consideration will be given to problems of nuisance and safety to other users. Reason 4. and within and through the major open spaces. 4. Local Authorities are required to consult with English Nature where development proposals may affect a SSSI. Borough or Local importance for nature conservation or geology. would be prejudicial to their nature conservation interest. It is considered appropriate to make available suitable segregated cycle routes within and through the Borough’s major open spaces and along the riverside. Plans should be based upon up-to-date information about the environmental characteristics of their areas and should indicate the location of designated sites of importance.35 Cycling is a popular leisure activity. restore or add to biodiversity and geological conservation interests.37 4. Borough (Grade I or II). through Policy D3. Many natural features and habitats cannot easily be recreated elsewhere and must be conserved where they can still be found. OPEN SPACES 83 . There will be a presumption against the development of these sites: the level of protection accorded to a site will be commensurate with its designation. Contributions to cycle-way provision will be sought in accordance with Policy SC2. Plans should also consider the restoration or creation of new priority habitats. or Local Importance. Wildlife and Nature Conservation The Identification and Protection of Wildlife Habitats O18 A network of Sites of Nature Conservation Importance (SNCI) throughout the Borough have been identified for protection. One of the key principles of PPS 9: Biodiversity and Geological Conservation (2005) is to maintain and enhance. Sites are categorised as of Metropolitan.The sites identified include SSSIs designated by English Nature (Gilberts Pit. These include Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) and sites declared as Local Nature Reserves (LNR).O17 The Council will use its planning and other powers to secure the provision of cycleways along the riverside. and Oxleas Wood) and the Local Nature Reserves declared by the Council (Maryon Wilson Park & Gilberts Pit and the Oxleas Woodlands complex).36 It is important to retain a full range of natural habitats and features within easy reach of residential areas. Suitable routes will be safeguarded and provided as resources allow and through the use of planning agreements/conditions on planning permissions. but the level of protection accorded to a site will be commensurate with its designation. including groups representing walkers and pedestrians and draw up proposals in due course. applicants must demonstrate that habitats will not be adversely affected. other than for minor ancillary works.38 O19 Where development is proposed on sites adjacent to protected sites of nature conservation importance.They are defined on the Proposals Map and listed in Table O2 as sites of Metropolitan. All development proposals are expected to have regard to the biodiversity of sites which are not within designated areas.

will take into account the presence of any protected or priority species and their habitats which are likely to be harmed. PPS9: Biodiversity and Geological Conservation (2005) states that Local Authorities should take measures to protect the habitats of these species from further decline. The above are also Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation. The railway line between Blackheath and Falconwood which links with the open spaces of Blackheath and Greenwich Park. Plumstead Common and Bostall Woods into Bexley. due to disturbance such as that from noise. and adversely affects nature conservation interests. River Corridors O21 The ecological and wildlife value of the Borough’s rivers. Green Corridors O20 The network of main Green Corridors will be protected and enhanced. rail and river networks can form corridors that link one habitat with another.42 National and international legislation protects certain species of flora and fauna. Applicants must demonstrate that advice has been sought from professionals with suitable expertise and qualifications. and are shown on the Proposals Map and listed in Table O2 as appropriate.Where possible. together with the Thamesmead canal network and a number of lakes form a corridor for aquatic species and bird migration. shrubs and open land that often straddle road. Ravensbourne and Quaggy. shade. These corridors can help form a network necessary to ensure the maintenance of the current range and diversity of flora and fauna. during and after any development that may affect 84 OPEN SPACES . the habitats of badgers. atmospheric pollution and the effects on drainage and ground water. canals and lakes will be protected and enhanced. 4. Such works will require the consent of the Environment Agency. Reason 4.39 Some developments can have significant detrimental effects on the wildlife of adjacent sites. The green corridors are: i. protected and priority species should be protected before. when considering planning applications. Species Protection O22 The Council. Development will not normally be permitted where it would damage the continuity of wildlife habitat within the corridor.41 The River Thames. Reason for O20 and O21 4. The railway line between Lee and New Eltham which connects to the Green Chain network of open spaces. ii.Reason 4. Development will not normally be permitted where it would damage the continuity of wildlife habitat within the corridor. The Plumstead Railway cutting iii.The Green Chain also acts as a green corridor through Woolwich Cemetery. The ridgeway in Abbey Wood/Thamesmead iv.40 Extensive contiguous areas of trees. movement. The culverting or building over of watercourses should be resisted as it results in a break of continuity in river corridors.

Priority will be given to schemes benefiting areas of deprivation.46 Management plays a crucial role in the retention of many valued habitats and species. 4.The new ecology park that forms part of the Millennium Village is an example of this. English Nature will be contacted. and in the case of badgers. OPEN SPACES 85 . Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites O23 In or near areas of wildlife deficiency (generally areas more than 1 kilometre from a Site of Metropolitan or Borough Importance for nature conservation to which the public has access) the Council will take opportunities to secure the provision of areas to be managed as wildlife habitats and seek to maximise opportunities for access to suitable sites within areas of wildlife deficiency where this does not conflict with protecting wildlife habitats from disturbance (See Map 6). and the UK. Schedules 1. London and proposed Greenwich Biodiversity Action Plans. 5 and 8 of the 1981 Wildlife and Countryside Act. reduce disturbance to a minimum and provide alternative habitats to sustain at least the existing levels of populations.44 O25 The Council will encourage the use of wildlife sites to promote ecological awareness and appreciation by providing nature trails and guided walks. 4. verges and unused corners of playing fields and recreation grounds. In the long term it may reduce maintenance costs and would give a positive role to such marginal areas as embankments. Development and management proposals should have a particular regard to the value of retaining. Reason 4. PPS9: Biodiversity and Geological Conservation (2005) states that enhancing biodiversity in green spaces will contribute to urban renaissance. Schedules 2 and 4 of the Conservation (Natural Habitats &c) Regulations. In cases where habitats of these species may be affected by development. conditions and agreements will be used to facilitate the survival of individual members of the species. as wildlife refuges.45 The Council will seek to increase the ecological interest of areas currently deficient in accessible wildlife sites. Careful management can help to reduce the loss of wildlife and can also contribute to the increase in biodiversity. Management of Wildlife Sites O24 The Council will encourage landowners and managers to consider forms of management that will aid the conservation of natural features within their sites. Vacant sites can also be used. a licence will be required prior to permitting interference with a sett.Where necessary the Council will seek to enter into agreements to achieve these aims. especially with the help of local people. Access to and within these sites will be encouraged. Reason 4. either temporarily or permanently. The opportunity sometimes occurs on redevelopment to secure open space and in some cases this could appropriately be managed for ecological interest.43 Where development is permitted which may affect protected species. Protected and priority species are listed in Part One. Appropriate surveys of sites will help to identify if the species are present (See Policy D3).them. In particular the development of ecological management plans will be encouraged to ensure the maximum degree of biodiversity. replacing or creating features of nature conservation interest. particularly for those with mobility impairments and where this does not conflict with protecting wildlife habitats from disturbance. encourage the creation and maintenance of wildlife habitats within school grounds and support the setting up of urban / nature study centres.

Map 6: Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites © Crown copyright Areas more than one kilometre from a publically accessible Site of Metropolitan of Borough Importance for Nature Conservation 86 OPEN SPACES .

47 Ecological awareness and education is an important factor in the Borough’s Agenda 21 strategy and the emerging Greenwich Biodiversity Action Plan.The nine acre site provides a diverse range of habitats to study and enjoy.The Greenwich Environmental Curriculum Centre in Eltham promotes environmental and outdoor education and is extensively used by local schools.Reason 4. OPEN SPACES 87 . The Council wishes not only to protect wildlife but also to increase the opportunity for residents (particularly of school age) and visitors to increase and enhance their environmental knowledge. There is also a new environmental interpretation centre on Deptford Creek.

encouraging butterflies. grasshoppers and other invertebrates. Contains ancient parkland trees. scrub and acidic grassland. Supports a wide range of plants and animal life. Grade 1 NC8 Woolwich Common (45) Eltham Warren Golf Course. a variety of grasses and wild flowers. Some hedgerows. Site is manages as a meadow. NC1 Site (area in hectares) The River Thames and tidal tributaries (2295) Description Valuable habitat supporting many plant and animal species. (ponds and the moat in the grounds of the palace). Site may be important for bats.22) Blackheath and Greenwich Park (161. including rare species.Table O2: SITE OF NATURE CONSERVATION IMPORTANCE Sites of Metropolitan Importance No. Series of ponds supporting a variety of amphibians.4) NC4 NC5 NC6 NC7 Kidbrooke Green and Birdbrook Road Nature Reserves (2. and the Environmental Curriculum Centre (21. Many regionally uncommon species. Wetter areas. Important for wildfowl and wading birds. small woodlands managed as bird sanctuaries. Largest area of green open space in central south-east London. Acid grassland and semi-improved natural grassland. The area has potential for further improvement through management. Also forms a river corridor. Comprises Oxleas. Gravel Pit Lane.3) Avery Hill Fields (36. Range of grassland communities. Some neutral grassland. NC9 NC10 NC11 88 OPEN SPACES . Nature Study Centre contains a range of habitats and is an important educational site. Under consideration by English Nature for SSSI status. including great crested newt (specially protected UK BAP species) and the palmate newt (the rarest amphibian in London).1) Royal Blackheath Golf Course (24) Pippenhall Meadows (6. including an interesting area of wet natural grassland.Terraces have been created on the Greenwich peninsula to provide opportunities for saltmarsh communities to establish. Contains some of the oldest hedgerows in the Borough.. Ancient and secondary woodland with areas of heathland and acid grassland.The river walls provide a feeding habitat for the nationally rare black redstart (London BAP species). Local Nature Reserve and part SSSI.4) Eltham Palace Fields (34. Mosaic of small meadows and pastures divided by hedgerows. Jack and Shepherdleas woods. scrub and woodland. add to the habitat diversity of the site. NC2 Shooters Hill Woodlands (112) NC3 Bostall Wood and Heath (159. a lake and several ponds. a pond and an interesting area of wet natural grassland. Part SSSI Habitat for great crested newt (specially protected UK BAP species) bordered by woodland. and forms one of London’s most extensive areas of ancient woodland.39) Sites of Borough Importance. A large area of open land with fine old hedgerows.9) Mostly acidic grassland.

Series of wetlands providing a range of wetland habitats from reed beds to deep water. Water voles present (priority species in UK and London BAPs). Part of the Millennium Village development. Ecology Park is recent habitat creation scheme containing a range of habitats. NC13 NC14 NC15 NC16 Shrewsbury Park. Dothill Allotments and Woodlands Farm (90. Extensive reed beds. Woodlands Farm is a working farm. NC12 Site (area in hectares) Sidcup Road Grassland and Harmony Wood (9. Grass snakes occur. Recently created lake with good marginal vegetation.82) Description Neutral grassland with small areas of acid grassland to the north of the A20. Shooters Hill Golf Course.5) Plumstead Common (Winn’s Common. Southern Park is amenity grassland with contains extensive plantings of native trees and wildflower meadows around the edges. Water voles to be re-introduced following decontamination work. managed for environmental education. Bleak Hill and the Slade) (29. Gilberts’s Pit is a geological SSSI. An extensive mosaic of habitats.16) Tump 53 Nature Park (1. Scrub. Site well used for environmental. Gilbert’s Pit and Maryon Wilson Park (25) Greenwich Cemetery (9. secondary woodland through scrub to rough grassland and wetland. Natural banks of the Little Quaggy stream support wetland vegetation.5) Twin Tumps and Thamesmere (10) NC17 NC18 NC19 NC20 NC21 Closely mown acid grassland with some scarce species of clover.5) Charlton House Lawn (0. Semi-improved neutral and acid grassland.No. educational purposes. Supports variety of wildfowl and dragonflies. Several springs. Acid and wet neutral grassland and secondary woodland.4) Thamesmead Historic Area and Wetlands (2. used also for environmental education. tall herbs and brackish flora on surrounding land. ranging from ancient woodland. NC22 NC23 Greenwich Ecology Park and Southern Park (5) OPEN SPACES 89 . Open areas of water containing diverse aquatic flora and aquatic invertebrates.74) Maryon Park. Extensive areas of acid grassland and secondary woodland. Large waterbodies of Thamemere support common waterfowl.78) Oxleas Meadow (10.5) Birchmere (5. Part Local Nature Reserve Neutral grassland containing a range of grasses and wild flowers. Two tumps and adjoining moats fringed with reeds. Diversity of aquatic and marginal plants.

95) NC30 NC31 NC32 NC33 NC34 NC35 Royal Blackheath Golf Course South (21. scrub and wetlands. Proposed Environment Agency river enhancements will increase the value of this site. Rockliffe Gardens contains dense shrubberies and a small pond. Nesting site for song thrush (UK BAP priority species). Emergent vegetation in ditches. Hedgerows. Water voles present (priority species in UK and London BAPs).28) Westcombe Park Railsides (6. Variety of grassland. Deptford (0.9) Quaggy River at Blackheath Park (3.97) Deansfield (2. Some neutral and acid grassland. scrub and grassland. Grade II No.31) The Ridgeway (10) Description Comprises secondary woodland with areas of possibly ancient woodland. One of the best sites in the Borough for ferns. Section of river with natural banks but little aquatic vegetation.16) Plumstead Railway Cutting (2.71) Belmarsh Ditches (1. Recently landscaped park with range of habitats including flower rich grassland. Mosaic of rough grassland.43) Eltham Park North (6.3) NC36 NC37 NC38 90 OPEN SPACES . Diverse rough grassland with scattered scrub. Some scrub and secondary woodland.Young trees colonising from adjacent woodland (Shepherdleas Woods NC2) Meadow grassland with common wild flowers. Secondary woodland. areas of developing woodland. Secondary woodland. Wide variety of grasses and common wild flowers. butterflies and other animals.6) Gallions Reach Park (3. Sizeable area of undisturbed habitats.2) St Nicholas Churchyard.4) Blackheath to Falconwood Railsides (16. neutral grassland and associated scrub. NC24 Site (area in hectares) Repository Wood and Charlton Cemetery (14. Valuable habitat for common birds. NC25 NC26 NC27 NC28 NC29 Eastmoor Street Park (1. Secondary woodland with small areas of rough grassland and bracken. including linnets (a UK BAP priority species). Support a range of common birds and animals. Close mown acidic grassland. Small lake supporting common waterfowl. scrub and rough grassland providing habitats for a wide range of common birds and other animals. lake and ponds. Numerous mature trees.Sites of Borough Importance. An important green corridor Recently created park with a range of habitats. with some uncommon species. tall herbs and scattered scrub. ponds and ditches. with some rare species of grass. bramble scrub and rough grassland. Part of an important green corridor. Supports good populations of common birds. A valuable green corridor.33) Woolwich Cemeteries and Rockliffe Gardens (15. Diverse grassland.1) Plumstead Cemetery (12. small pond and native shrubs and trees. butterflies and invertebrates.

Eltham (1.08) The Oaks. The river here is in a vertical concrete channel. Kingfishers are regularly seen. permanent ponds.7) Southwood Recreation Ground. gravestones support numerous lichens.6) The Westcombe Woodlands (1. Future strategy and management under review. Secondary woodland with dense shrub layer. scrub and rough grassland providing habitats for a wide range of common birds and other animals. Vegetated walls support scarce ferns. New Eltham (2.06) Description Secondary woodland.The Quaggy has been restored to the surface in a natural-looking. NC40 NC41 Sites of Local Importance No.16) The Tarn (3.3) River Ravensbourne (0.37) Eaglesfield Wood (2. Small secondary woodland with dense shrub layer. NC42 Site (area in hectares) St John the Baptist Churchyard. Facilities include a boardwalk and pond-dipping platform. Used for environmental education by adjacent school. Secondary woodland set aside as a bird sanctuary. Several large trees. which pass through between the Creek and the naturalised river channel just upstream in Brookmill Park. Small secondary woodland. seats and interpretative signs. flowing through a flood plain with a mosaic of damp grassland and wetlands. and several smaller. Woolwich (1. but is still of importance for fish. Well used for environmental education.53) St Marys Churchyard. outdoor classroom.No. Large pond with good marginal vegetation. Woodland.02) NB Site is too small to be visible on the Proposals Map Sutcliffe Park Flood Alleviation Scheme (6.88) Description Diverse grassland between the graves. A valuable green corridor. Sportsfield surrounded by tall grassland and scrub. School nature garden contains a range of habitats including pond. Small stream and area of damp grassland. NC39 Site (area in hectares) Mottingham and New Eltham Railsides (11. A sizeable lake with extensive reed beds and other marginal and emergent vegetation. possible ancient. wildflower meadow and scrub. flounders and sand gobies. Environment Agency flood alleviation scheme. as well as temporary wetlands. NC43 NC44 NC45 NC46 NC47 NC48 NC49 OPEN SPACES 91 . marshy area. rough grassland and pond. Plumstead (0. including eels. Grassland with common wild flowers and mature trees.57) Anglesea Road Open Space and School Wildlife Area (0. meandering channel.

Bats may also be present. Small park with very attractive pond with good marginal vegetation. NC54 NC55 For further information see ‘Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation in Greenwich’ – ’ September 2004 92 OPEN SPACES .0) Twinkle Park (0. Neutral grassland and old hedge.09) NB Site is too small to be visible on the Proposals Map Well Hall Pleaseaunce (4.75) Mycenae House Gardens (1. A moat. NC50 NC51 Site (area in hectares) Academy Place Orchard (1. stream and several ponds provide additional habitats.6) invertebrate. Wild area of grassland. Recently restored Victorian garden with mature trees. Supports common birds and (0. Diversity of habitats for common birds and other animals. Mature poplars.3) Description Recently planted orchard with a wide variety of fruit treed.Sites of Local Importance No. NC52 NC53 Plumstead Common Nature Reserve Small woodland. dense shrubberies and grassland. East Wickham Open Space (0. possibly ancient. facilitating its use for pond-dipping by school groups. Managed as a nature reserve. shrubbery and herbaceous borders. A boardwalk surrounds the pond.17) Informal open space. Mature garden with large trees. rough grassland and nettles which may be of value to breeding butterflies. mostly in Bexley. on a covered reservoir.

the conservation of the water environment. To protect areas liable to river or tidal flooding. water. To reduce the generation of waste and to encourage re-use and recycling of waste. noise. energy conservation. They deal with those aspects of planning which make people’s surroundings safe. protection from flooding.2 The Council’s concern for the environment is reflected in its Sustainable Development Policy (2003).The general policies on environmental protection are: To encourage environmentally sustainable forms of development.3 The Greenwich Agenda 21 Strategy seeks to forge direct links into the planning system and local regeneration through the introduction of pilot sustainability indicators. It calls upon developments to ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 93 . in part. The Council will encourage developers to use the BREEAM (Building Research Establishment Environmental Assessment Method) independent rating system to demonstrate how their proposals achieve sustainable development objectives. SE1 SE2 SE3 SE4 Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 5. especially from transport and industrial processes. comfortable and compatible with the natural environment. The policies within this chapter are concerned with land use and the planning implications of the need to care for the environment and the provision of safe public services. (Policies H7 and D1). and reduce the impact of pollution. smell and toxic materials.1 Concern for the quality of the environment underlies most of the Council’s planning policies. through the application of the UDP Policies. air and water • Implement a waste minimisation and recycling strategy to meet and exceed government recycling targets • Continue to implement energy and water conservation in council properties and promote these issues in the community • Promote the development and implementation of renewable energy sources and purchase renewable energy for council property when possible • Reduce emissions that are recognised to contribute to climate change • Promote sustainable construction practices within the development industry • Practice environmentally responsible ‘Green’ procurement The Council Sustainable Development Policy will be addressed. noise. and the disposal of waste. Specific policies on wildlife conservation are in the open space chapter. They specifically deal with air. and the protection of the amenities of sensitive residential and working environments. and land pollution.5. To protect and improve the environment in terms of air and water quality. 5. is reflected in the Greenwich Strategy (2003) and the Council’s Sustainable Development Policy (2003). the reclamation of contaminated land. which states that the Council will: • Promote sustainable development through all Council strategies • Act and campaign against pollution of land. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 5.

Many of the environmental issues discussed in this chapter are also the subject of the Building Regulations (1991) and compliance with these is mandatory. The Borough is wholly within the operational area of Thames Water. Planning permission will not normally be granted for new developments or extensions of existing industrial. produced by the Environment Agency are a series of 5 year Action Plans for river catchment areas. 5.The Ravensbourne and Marsh Dykes LEAP was published in 1998. the Thames Tideway LEAP in 1999 and the Darent LEAP in 2000. unless ameliorating measures can reasonably be taken and which can be sought through the imposition of conditions. E2 E3 94 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION . sewerage and sewage treatment.8 Control of Pollution PPS23: Planning and Pollution Control (2004) sets out the Government’s planning policies relating to pollution control.6 5. water and soil pollutants or grit. A small area within New Eltham and Avery Hill Wards drains into the River Cray system and is in the Environment Agency Southern Region’s area. The Environment Agency functions of safeguarding the water environment.7 Policies 5. It sets out advice on the relationship between controls over development under planning and pollution control legislation.5 5. including water pollution control and flood defence.4 The Borough is a statutory Waste Disposal Authority (WDA) and forms part of a voluntary grouping of authorities (South East London Waste Disposal Group: SELWDG) which co-ordinates their duties under the Environmental Protection Act 1990. dust. economic.address the thirteen themes which embrace social. which is addressed within the detailed policies in this chapter. leisure or other uses that produce significant and unacceptable levels of noise and/or vibration at site boundaries or within adjacent sensitive areas.The approach seeks waste minimisation. fumes. especially residential areas. Local Environment Agency Plans (LEAP’s). it aims to create a clean and well cared for environment and ensures the best use of natural resources. which is responsible for water supply. 5. The Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy: ‘Rethinking Rubbish in London’ was published in September 2003. and views disposal as a last resort. commercial.They seek to protect and enhance the local environment of the area.The Greenwich Strategy recognises the importance of the environmental well being of Greenwich. The indicators form a useful checklist for developments. in consultation with the Environment Agency. Pollution E1 Planning permission will normally not be granted where a proposed development or change of use would generally have a significant adverse effect on the amenities of adjacent occupiers or users. ecological concerns. Government guidance has established a hierarchical approach to waste management. are exercised over most of the Borough by the Environment Agency Thames Region. Housing or other sensitive uses will not normally be permitted on sites adjacent to existing problem uses. and especially where proposals would be likely to result in the unacceptable emission of odours.

where the applicant can demonstrate that the proposals are designed to minimise light pollution. Negotiating reduction of activity or installation of ameliorating measures.These categories will be applied where appropriate. dust. smells. E2 and E3 5. The London Plan states that Boroughs should reduce noise by promoting sustainable design and construction and well managed. Assessment of all the environmental impacts in one Environmental Statement will assist the determination of applications.9 To protect the amenities of areas where people live and work the Council will seek to separate them from problem uses. PPG24. Problem uses are defined as those which would result in the unacceptable emission of noise. odours. Policies on the location of commercial and industrial uses which may cause such problems are set out in the Jobs and Local Economy chapter.10 5. Conditions imposed will be appropriate to the development and thus may vary from restricting hours of use or operation of machinery to specific periods. such as the position of the buildings on site. ii. Planning and Noise introduces the concept of Noise Exposure categories [NEC’s] ranging from A-D. Lighting proposals which would adversely affect residential dwellings. Refusing planning permission for consolidation or expansion of problem uses. 5.15 To improve the amenities of occupiers and users of adjoining sites adversely affected by existing operations. dust. Applicants are advised to approach the Council at an early stage in the development process to determine whether an Environmental Statement is required to be submitted with the application. grit or vibration. or vibration by: i.11 5. fumes. iii. Encouraging relocation where appropriate. internal layout of buildings. or imposing conditions on planning permissions. Light Pollution E5 Planning permission will be granted for developments for new outdoor lights.14 E4 Reason 5. light.12 5. For most developments arrangements can be made to mitigate the effects of noise. iv. Taking enforcement action where appropriate. Excessive noise and/or vibration can be intrusive to future occupants or users of development. The Council will seek to reduce nuisance caused by existing uses from the emission of noise. Minimising the adverse effects of noise and/or vibration of proposed development can be sought by imposing conditions requiring the inclusion of noise and/or vibration attenuation measures in any planning permission where development or a change of use is proposed on sites or in buildings adjacent to a permanent significant noise and/or vibration source. sites of nature conservation value and protected or priority species and their habitats will be regarded as unacceptable. Encouraging such measures as the use of sound insulation materials on noise sensitive facades facing classified roads can reduce noise from traffic schemes. grit. Policy E6 deals with air pollution. It guides the consideration of planning applications for residential development near transport and mixed sources of noise. water and soil pollutants.Reason for E1. window details including insulation and boundary treatment. Planning applications for major developments may need to be accompanied by an Environmental Impact Assessment subject to Circular 02/99: Environmental Impact Assessment and the Town and Country Planning (EIA) Regulations (England and Wales) 1999.13 5. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 95 . fumes. designated locations for noise generating activities.

such as residential. It is important that development proposals do not prejudice the implementation of the Air Quality Action Plan to reduce the specified pollutants. and the smoke. such as setting dwellings back from the road and the use of ventilation systems. and locationally by the linking of development to public transport (See Policy M3). Air quality assessments accompanying planning applications should be based on the Technical Guidance Note for developers and consultants issued jointly by London local authorities (ALG 2001) and should indicate impact both with and without minimisation measures. Reason 5. causing visual intrusion for neighbouring uses. Residential areas are particularly prone to this. Thus when considering development proposals a minimisation in airborne pollutants will be sought. in fulfilment of the requirement of the Environment Act 1995.18 The declaration of the whole Borough as an Air Quality Management Area indicates the seriousness of air pollution in the Borough. may be particularly susceptible to air pollution. and their amenity should be protected. Policy O13 deals with the control of floodlighting of sports facilities. Proposals for such development should show how ameliorating measures have been taken into account in the design of the scheme. In addition it will seek the co-operation of developers: technically in providing systems capable of operating efficiently on ‘cleaner’ fuel sources.16 The impact of lighting on residential amenity and on the environment are material considerations in the decision making process. Floodlights and outdoor lighting of developments can illuminate an area much wider than the area of immediate activity. Such planning applications should be accompanied by an assessment of the likely impact of the development on air quality. Development proposals with the potential to result in a significant deterioration in air quality will be resisted unless measures to minimise the impact of air pollutants are included. Greenwich designated the whole of the Borough as a AQMA in 2001 and the Air Quality Action Plan was published in 2002. Areas of poor air quality are identified in the Air Quality Action Plan. The Council will pursue traffic restraint. and Local Authorities are required to carry out periodic reviews of air quality and to assess present and likely future air quality against the air quality standards and objectives prescribed by the Air Quality Regulations. Nitrogen Dioxide and Sulphur Dioxide).Reason 5. Lighting can adversely affect species such as bats. traffic reduction and other measures to reduce vehicle emissions including promoting the availability of less polluting alternative fuels. 5. was published in September 2002.17 E6 5. This Act outlines a new system of local air quality management. In areas of poor air quality. Greenwich Peninsula has been designated as the first Low Emission Zone (LEZ) in the UK. grit and dust controls of the Clean Air Act 1993. Some uses.The Council will examine the potential to create further LEZs through the use of Section 106 agreements. (Particulates.The impact of air pollution can be reduced through design measures.The Mayor’s Air Quality Strategy: Cleaning London’s Air.19 E7 96 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION . Air Pollution The Government has displayed a strong commitment towards improving air quality. proposals for development which may be sensitive to air pollution will be required to demonstrate appropriate mitigating design solutions.The Council also has responsibility for enforcing Local Authority Air Pollution Controls [LAAPC] introduced under Part l of the Environmental Protection Act 1990. most recently through the National Air Quality Strategy.Where the objectives are not likely to be achieved an Air Quality Management Area [AQMA] must be designated. operationally through encouraging ‘Green Transport Plans’.

The use and burning of fossil fuels causes air pollution. Energy Efficiency E8 The Council will encourage development that is energy efficient by influencing layout and orientation. Achieving these reductions will also require transport emissions to be cut and increased energy efficiency and conservation within the domestic. including the re-use of materials.The London Regional study recommends the adoption of a target for London of 2. (including energy from waste). The Mayor’s Energy Strategy: ‘Green light to clean power’ was published in 2004. to address their current transport impacts and put in place initiatives to reduce commuter and work related travel and minimise the environmental impacts of necessary transport needs.22 5. layout.23 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 97 . 5. iv. commercial and industrial sectors.All developments should: i. LPG and CNG and other means of reducing atmospheric and air pollution from vehicles. and their extraction and transport causes further environmental harm. of estimated electricity demand by 2010.21 5. Regional studies were commissioned to consider how these targets could be met. policies within the Plan’s Movement Chapter aim to promote fuel efficiency and reduce the need to travel. design. and be subject to an assessment of the impact on the amenity of the local environment. be environmentally and resource efficient to build and to operate (see Policy D1). iii. In addition. especially those with many staff. orientation and energy consumption of the construction and use of buildings. and are looking for new and innovative ideas to exceed the target. taking into account the existing character of the area. Energy Conservation is also a key principle of design . unleaded petrol. noise pollution and reducing energy use.The Council’s Energy Strategy was published in April 2002. design and use of materials where these do not conflict with other policies of the Plan. relieving congestion. access to and the use of fuels with low sulphur content. Green Transport Plans allow organisations. v. Greater London Authority and the Association of London Government) are disappointed that the target is so low.20 To contribute to a reduction in air pollution and the emission of ‘greenhouse’ gases. However. Increasing the proportion of electricity derived from renewable sources is part of a wider national strategy to reduce consumption of conventional fossil fuels and associated production of greenhouse gas emissions. incorporate measures for water conservation. use materials from local sustainable sources wherever possible. ii. the sponsors of the regional study (Government Office for London. incorporate a waste segregation system (see Policy E15). Land use planning affects transport. Traffic restraint and reduction measures will also seek to develop more sustainable travel patterns. Energy Conservation The Government has established a target that 10% of UK electricity requirements should be met from renewable sources by 2010.as detailed in Design and Conservation Policy D1.14%.Reason 5. including new technologies will be encouraged.

Renewable Energy E9 The Council will expect all new developments with a floorspace greater than 1000 sqm or residential developments of 10 or more units to incorporate renewable energy production equipment to provide at least 10% of the predicted energy requirements where there is no conflict with other policies in the Plan. The Council will encourage the development of renewable energy projects and developments which include renewable energy facilities and energy saving technologies where there is no conflict with other policies in the Plan. Reasons for E.8 and E9 5.24 To help reduce energy consumption, protect natural sources of material [especially tropical forests], and to aid recycling of waste products in accordance with the Council’s Sustainable Development Policy (2003). The London Plan states that Boroughs should include policies to improve energy efficiency and increase the proportion of energy generated from renewable sources. Government Policy is to stimulate the use of renewable energy sources wherever they are economically attractive and environmentally acceptable. Buildings in use account for a significant proportion of energy use: the planning system can help to reduce energy requirements, by ensuring the provision of renewable energy production equipment in new development or refurbishment / conversion of existing buildings. Encouraging energy efficiency by promoting improved design, form, layout and orientation of development and use of appropriate materials can lead to reduced consumption of energy and environmental cost of running the building.This could include the use of passive solar design principles and developers are referred to ‘Planning for Passive Solar Design’. (BRESCU 1999). Savings of energy for heating, lighting, cooling and ventilation can all be achieved depending on the building type, although passive solar design principles are best suited to newly built buildings. This approach will also contribute to national efforts to reverse the damaging effects of energy consumption on climate change. 65% of the electricity used in the Council’s administration buildings, is ‘green electricity’ from low carbon fuels. The Council will introduce measures to improve thermal insulation in its own properties to the standard set by the Building Regulations and wherever possible aims to exceed this standard. Developers will be encouraged to do likewise. Water conservation measures may include where appropriate; water efficient toilet and shower facilities, grey water recycling systems, compostable toilets and/or garden water conservation systems. When assessing applications particular regard will be paid to the existing character of the area and the appropriateness of the design. Planning Policy Statement 22 (PPS22): Renewable Energy, states that Local Authorities may include policies which require a percentage of the energy used in new residential, commercial or industrial development to come from on-site renewable energy developments. Proposal 12 of the Mayor’s Energy Strategy requests that Local Authorities set targets for renewable energy generation. Proposal 13 states that applications referable to the Mayor would be expected to generate at least 10% of their energy needs from renewable energy on site where feasible. There are various types of renewable energy and regard also needs to be paid to technologies which may emerge in the future. Within Greenwich, the most promising sources of renewable energy generation are likely to be solar heated hot water, photovoltaic cells and combined heat and power.The various renewable energy technologies will have different environmental impacts, and it has to be recognised that some technologies may not be suitable in Greenwich. This requirement may be relaxed where the applicant can demonstrate that the installation of renewable energy production equipment is not viable given the location, design and type of development. Combined Heat and Power (CHP), on it own and in conjunction with Community Heating systems, can provide

5.25

5.26

5.27

5.28

98

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

cost effective, reliable energy and heating at high levels of efficiency and relatively low levels of pollution. CHP engines are already used at a number of Council-sponsored and private sector buildings in the Borough, including the Waterfront Leisure Centre, Woolwich, the Glyndon Road Estate and Amylum UK Ltd, Tunnel Avenue. Community Heating is in use in the Greenwich Millennium Village. 5.29 Applications should include an energy assessment which sets out the predicted energy requirements of the development, and how it is proposed to supply at least 10% of this requirement from renewable resources.Alternatively, a full and complete explanation would be required of the reasons why this target could not be met. London Renewables publication Integrating renewable energy into new developments; Toolkit for planners, developers, and consultants provides guidance on assessing energy requirements and the cost and feasibility of different technologies. (http://www.london.gov.uk/mayor/environment/energy/docs/renewables_toolkit.pdf) Proposals of a scale or nature likely to have a significant environmental impact should be supported by an environmental assessment, as required by Circular 02/99: Environmental Impact Assessment and the Town and Country Planning (EIA) Regulations (England and Wales) 1999. Hazardous Materials E10 Proposals which concern the storage, handling, production and disposal of hazardous materials will only be permitted subject to conditions to safeguard public health and if safety and the ecology of the natural environment can be maintained. The Council will seek to control the location of new establishments where hazardous substances are present and the development of land within the vicinity of such establishments. Reason 5.30 Hazardous materials can compromise the fragility of the natural environment and present a risk to public health and safety. Proposals involving such materials on development sites will be subject to conditions including a safety audit and survey for hazardous materials and the advice contained in Circular 04/00: Planning Controls for Hazardous Substances. Contaminated Land E11 A preliminary site investigation, prior to the determination of a planning application, will normally be required if a site is known or is likely to have been in contaminative uses. Where contamination is found, the council will need to be assured that the development can be built and occupied safely without any adverse environmental or health impacts, otherwise conditions requiring full remedial action will be imposed to deal with: i. ii. iii. the particular type or types of contamination; the problems of the ground exhalation of gases; and the restoration of land to beneficial use.

Reason 5.31 To avoid the health and safety hazards associated with polluted land and to protect the community and to comply with PPS23: Planning and Pollution Control (2004). Contaminated land and potentially contaminated land is defined as: “land that has substances in or under it, thereby posing a real or possible risk to humans and their environment, or causing or likely to cause pollution of controlled waters”. Contaminated land is often found on sites which have a history of landfill, or which have previously accommodated a polluting industrial use. Once these sites, or sites adjacent to these areas become available for redevelopment it is essential that a full technical investigation is

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

99

carried out. Guidelines, as published by the former Department for the Environment,Transport and the Regions concerning contaminated land and the Borough’s Land Use Registry of Contaminated Sites place a requirement upon Local Planning Authorities to prepare a strategy detailing how the sites identified in the registry will be dealt with. The Council’s Contaminated Land Strategy was published in 2002. The strategy also provides advice on investigation and remediation measures, including defining levels of pollutants that constitute land as being contaminated and what levels could result in significant harm. Contaminated sites may have archaeological value; this should be taken into consideration when conducting investigation / remediation works, in accordance with Policies D30 and D31 and PPG16 (Archaeology and Planning). Site Servicing E12 The Council will seek to ensure the provision of satisfactory services to areas where new communities are being established. New development should take place where it can take maximum advantage of spare capacity in existing infrastructure. Where this is not possible development will be phased to give sufficient time for new infrastructure to be provided. The Council will insist on the provision of adequate services before giving permission for development or redevelopment and may require developers to contribute to off-site and on-site works so that sites can be properly serviced. Reason 5.32 To ensure that community need for up-to-date services is met. While in general development, sites can be adequately serviced there may be cases where development should be phased or developers should contribute to service provision. Prospective developers should ascertain the adequacy of services at an early date, in particular the electricity suppliers should be contacted about development in Thamesmead, and in the area between the Woolwich Road and the Thames. Electromagnetic Fields E13 The Council will have regard to the current advice as given by the National Radiological Protection Board concerning the electromagnetic effects from radio frequency and power frequency electromagnetic fields when deciding applications for housing or other sensitive land uses on adjacent sites. Reason 5.33 The Council and the public are concerned that there may be a risk to the health of residents in close proximity to electromagnetic fields.The National Radiological Protection Board has a statutory duty to advise on such risks. Telecommunications Development is covered by Policy D11 and Satellite Antennae by Policy D12. Waste Disposal PPS10: Planning for Sustainable Waste Management (2005) and the Government’s national waste strategy ‘Waste Strategy for England and Wales 2000’ set out the Government’s planning policies relating to waste management.They set out a policy framework for sustainable waste management within which stakeholders can plan and take waste management decisions, which reduces the amount of waste we produce, and, where waste is produced, deals with it in a way that contributes to the economic, social and environmental goals of sustainable development.The ‘Waste Hierarchy’ outlined within the Waste Strategy for England and Wales 2000 is a step towards tackling waste disposal within the principles of sustainable development. Policies regarding waste should place an emphasis on those options at the top of the hierarchy.The waste management options are:

5.34

100

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

• • • • 5.35

Reduction Re-use Recovery, including recycling, composting and energy recovery Disposal.

The Council will apply the principle of The Best Practicable Environmental Option (BPEO) when considering waste management options. This procedure establishes the option that provides the most benefits or least damage to the environment, in both the long and short terms. The Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy: Rethinking Rubbish in London was published in September 2003, and will also be a consideration when making planning decisions on Waste Management facilities. The Mayor published ‘Recycling and recovery facilities: sites investigation in London’ in July 2005 as part of a London-wide review of waste sites. It is expected that this will inform the proposed Sub Regional Development Framework for East London, to be published in 2006.The Borough is part of the South East London Waste Disposal Group (SELWDG). SELWDG maintains close liaison with other WDAs. The development of South East London Combined Heat and Power (SELCHP), at Deptford, as part of the Borough’s association with the SELWDG has provided the Borough with a facility that both processes non-hazardous waste and reduces reliance upon landfill sites. This is a preferable option to landfill disposal, as the waste hierarchy in the Government’s Waste Strategy for England and Wales 2000 indicates. In addition, SELCHP contributes towards energy recovery, with energy generated through incineration, being sold onto the National Grid, and some materials are also recycled.The Council is contractually committed to using the SELCHP Waste Disposal Facility until 2024, which has sufficient capacity for the predicted level of non-recycled waste in the Borough. No further incineration capacity or landfill capacity is required during the Plan period; other sites for waste disposal either within, or outside of the Borough, will not be sought. The Council have contractual arrangements to process 105,000 mt of waste a year at SELCHP until 2024, and to process up to 30,000 mt of mixed dry recyclate a year at the Materials Recycling Facility (MRF). The Council are allocated permits to consign waste to landfill under the Landfill Allowance Trading System (LATS); the annual LATS allocation varies over the Plan period from 35,000 mt to 53,000 mt.The proportion of the Borough’s municipal waste sent to landfill is about 30% compared with the London-wide rate of 73% (London Plan Table 4A.). The forecasted yearly municipal waste arisings for 2003/4 are 124,000 mt, rising to 159,000 in 2010/11. The Council have sufficient capacity for the forecasted yearly municipal waste arisings for the Plan period and will have unused LATS permits which can be sold to other Boroughs. The Council are investigating the possibility of developing an anaerobic digestion facility in the Borough, which will enable a greater proportion of green and kitchen waste to be processed.The existing and proposed waste facilities have sufficient capacity for the Plan period. It is therefore not considered necessary to identify new sites in the UDP. However the Council will also, through the review of its Waste Disposal Plan and Recycling Plan, seek to increase the use of the more sustainable options of waste reduction, reuse and recycling. The land use policies in this Plan seek to ensure that the Borough’s land resources are managed so that the Waste Disposal and Recycling Plans can be implemented.

5.36

5.37

5.38

5.39

5.40

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

101

Waste Reduction, Reuse, Recovery and Disposal E14 The Council will encourage waste reduction, reuse, recycling, energy recovery - with waste disposal as a final option. In addition, the Council will apply the ‘proximity principle’ and seek to minimise the effect of developments on the surrounding area; encouraging rail and river movement and optimising location to minimise environmental impact.This will apply in particular when considering applications for: i. ii. iii. iv. Recycling facilities; Waste transfer facilities; Developments involving the handling, transport treatment, storage, recovery and disposal of hazardous wastes; Waste transportation.

Reason 5.41 5.42 The Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy proposes that waste authorities should apply the proximity principle and the hierarchy of waste management. An increased emphasis is now placed upon the minimisation of waste production, the reuse and recycling of waste materials, and that waste disposal is environmentally responsible. The Environmental Protection Act 1990 sets out a framework and targets for waste management policies and planning policies. The Government aims to have 30% of household waste recycled or composted by 2010 (Waste Strategy for England and Wales 2000). Statutory Borough targets are to recycle 10% of household waste by 2003/4 and 18% by 2005/6 (Guidance on Municipal Waste Management 2001).The London Plan targets are to exceed 25% by 2005, 30% by 2010 and 33% by 2025.The Public Service Agreement target is to recycle 19% of household waste by 2004/5.The Council is on course to achieve these targets; in June 2004, the proportion of household waste recycled was 16% There is an existing Licensed Waste Transfer Station at Nathan Way, Thamesmead. A Materials Recycling Facility (MRF) opened on the adjacent site in November 2004. The Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy proposes that waste authorities should make household recycling collections of at least three materials; the MRF will enable the kerb-side collection of 5 mixed dry recyclables (glass, cans, plastic, paper and cardboard) from every property in the Borough.The MRF will also serve neighbouring Boroughs and will enable residents of this Borough and the sub-region to recycle more materials more easily.A re-use and recycling centre, which will enable the processing and re-use of discarded electrical goods and furniture, is due to open in August 2006.This will assist manufacturers and retailers to comply with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive. The provision of handling plants close to the source of waste (‘the proximity principle’) is desirable. However this needs to be balanced against the need to ensure compatibility with surrounding land uses and that the proposal does not have a detrimental effect on the environment from processes producing noise, dust or fumes. Major developers on riparian sites should first consider the use of river transportation for the removal of demolition spoil and import of materials. Alternatively, sites should have good access to rail or river transport. Minimise Waste at Source E15 The Council will encourage on site provision for the reduction of waste and the separation of recyclable materials when considering large-scale commercial, industrial, health and major residential applications.

5.43

5.44

102

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

48 5. Proposals which include provision for the reduction of waste. Surface water should be disposed of as close to source as possible. All new residential developments should provide refuse bins and recycling boxes.50 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 103 . permeable / porous surfaces. Such land shall be sensitively sited in relation to local communities and businesses. This involves moving away from traditional piped drainage systems to engineering solutions that mimic natural drainage processes. Reason 5. which requires that waste be treated as close to source as possible. There are a wide range of techniques.49 To avoid the risk of flooding. The Government through PPG25’ Development and Flood Risk’.45 The London Plan states that Boroughs should work to minimise the level of waste generated and should apply the principles of the Best Practical Environmental Option. Greenwich Environmental Management Services [GEMS] operates a Waste Exchange database for businesses wishing to trade rather than dispose of waste arisings. Without careful consideration the siting and design of development can increase the likelihood of flooding in areas downstream. grassed swales and balancing ponds. Reason 5. that aim to reduce problems of river pollution and flooding caused by conventional urban drainage systems.5 hectares.47 Such facilities will allow material suitable for recycling to be separated and leachate and methane producing material to be deposited in less environmentally sensitive land fill sites. SuDS control surface water run-off as close to its origin as possible before it is discharged to a watercourse or to the ground. pollution and other detrimental impacts on the environment. To implement these techniques effectively developers need to consider their use at the earliest possible stage. or attenuated before discharge to a watercourse or surface water sewer.46 E16 5. 5. Where large-scale development takes place land should be set aside for the duration of the construction period to facilitate the sorting and storing of waste inert material. Residential schemes should incorporate measures for community recycling that minimises waste disposal.Reason 5. including water butts. groundwater or aquifer pollution. or the separation at source for recycling in terms of storage spaces and access for specialised vehicles will help to reduce damage to the environment. the Environment Agency and the London Plan promote the use of “soft” sustainable drainage systems (SuDS) as the most sustainable form of surface water drainage for new developments. Drainage and Flood Protection E17 All development will be controlled so as not to give rise to flooding or surface. to protect public health and to safeguard sources of extractable water. Surface water should not be allowed to enter the foul system. The Environment Agency can advise on site specific requirements for developments on sites larger than 0. This is particularly important in catchment areas (Map 7) and on riverside sites.

and it can be demonstrated that there is no increased risk of flooding to other sites. Development in undeveloped areas at risk from fluvial flooding will only be permitted in exceptional circumstances. The Council will consult the Environment Agency on planning applications for development in flood risk areas. flooding is predicted to occur at least once every 1000 years but not more than once every 100 years (i. In light of anticipated sea level rise and climate change the Council will encourage riverside development proposals to examine the opportunity to retreat flood defences to increase flood storage. 0.This information is taken from the Flood Zones Map produced by the Environment Agency. In developed areas at risk from fluvial flooding.e. Planning applications for development on sites of more than 1 hectare within these areas must be accompanied by a flood risk assessment appropriate to the scale of and nature of the development.53 The tidal and fluvial defences are an essential means of protecting low-lying areas from flooding.This must demonstrate that there are no reasonable options available in lower flood risk areas. the level of flood risk.52 E19 5.E18 Areas within Zones 2 and 3 at risk from fluvial flooding are identified on the Proposals Map.e.Where works are being carried out in proximity to a tidal or fluvial flood defence the Council will seek to safeguard and where possible extend public access to the waterfront and protect and enhance existing ecological features. the level of flood risk. >1% probability). flooding is predicted to occur at least once every 100 years (i. are shown on Map 7. tourism. the existing flood defences and access to flood defence facilities for operational and maintenance purposes. 0.18m ODN 5. In Flood Zone 2. Where development is proposed in a flood risk area. and the protection afforded by the existing defences. Reason 5. A sequential test should be carried out where development is proposed on an unallocated site within a flood risk area.1% probability of flooding). In Flood Zone 3.Areas at risk from tidal flooding. Not only can the development itself be put at direct risk but through a reduction in the storage capacity of the flood plain and an impeding of the flow of water. in consultation with the Environment Agency.This sets out the responsibilities of all parties. Government Advice is contained in PPG25: Development and Flood Risk (2001). Generally consideration will be given to maintaining and/or improving the existing ecological features. biodiversity and visual connections with the river (See Policy W2). Where development relating to the tidal defences is permitted the Council may use this opportunity to extend the public access to the waterside in support of its policy to promote opportunities for leisure. It should be noted that as flood alleviation works are carried out the areas at risk will change.1-1% probability). but protected by existing flood defences.e. riverside walks and cycle ways along the Thames.The tidal flood risk areas are protected by existing defences to a 1:1000 level (i. other areas can be subjected to an increased risk of flooding.The areas at risk from fluvial flooding are shown on the Proposals Map and the areas at risk from tidal flooding are shown on Map 7. the guidance requires a flood risk assessment appropriate to the scale and nature of the development.54 104 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION . ensure that new developments safeguard existing tidal and fluvial flood defences.51 Development within an area at risk from fluvial flooding can have two adverse effects. and the protection afforded by the existing defences to be carried out. development will only be permitted where appropriate flood defence measures are taken. The Council will. The relevant flood defence levels are:Bugsby’s Reach (upstream of the Thames Barrier): 5. Reason 5.

works ongoing to extend protection to 2100). ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 105 . but protected by existing defences against a ‘once-in-a-1.000 years’ event (until 2030.Map 7: Flooding and Attenuation Areas © Crown copyright Area in Ravensbourne Catchment in which additional run-off must be attenuated Area draining to Marsh Dykes in which additional run-off must be attenuated and/or stored Areas at risk from a o nce-in-a-hundred years’ tidal flooding event.

2m ODN Barking Reach: 7.23 ODN These flood defence levels are likely to increase in the light of anticipated sea level rise.55 Adequate access to flood defence facilities such as embankments. 106 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION . Existing tidal flood defences are designed to protect London at a 1:1000 flood risk level until 2030. 5. maintenance and emergency purposes.1m ODN. tidal sluices and pumping stations. must be retained.Woolwich Reach and Gallions Reach (Downstream of Thames Barrier): 7. and where appropriate improved. Blackwall Reach: 5. for operational. the Environment Agency is working to ensure protection until 2100. Greenwich Reach.

and the longest waterfront of any London Borough. its economy. This sustainable approach will 6. there are 20 Conservation Areas.4 DESIGN & CONSERVATION 107 .6. and London as a whole. trees. It also contains areas of poor environment. the design. to ensure the creation of a safe and accessible environment. To improve areas of poor quality environment.The Greenwich Strategy recognises how the role of a high quality environment contributes to the health. To promote the use of previously developed land and to ensure new developments make efficient and appropriate use of land. visitors. to promote environmental improvements. Maritime Greenwich is an inscribed World Heritage Site. and those who work in and travel through the Borough. woodland. appearance and usefulness of urban space and the quality of the townscape.The general policies on design and conservation are: The Council will encourage a high quality of design in all new developments and alterations to existing developments which positively contribute to the improvement of their accessibility. and to ensure that the natural environment is not adversely affected. safety and wellbeing of all communities and aims to make the most of Borough’s historic heritage.1 The quality of the external environment affects residents. a royal heritage stretching back several centuries. areas of deprivation. the external appearance of buildings. wildlife habitats. for the Borough. fine views. and the way the Borough is seen by the outside world as well as by those who live here. 6. This chapter is concerned with environmental quality in terms of urban design. New development should be seen as contributing towards a better quality environment as part of a coherent urban design framework which looks at how the urban environment is used and how it has an impact on the way development is planned.2 SD1 SD2 SD3 SD4 SD5 Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 6. including historic landscapes.3 The Borough contains areas of unrivalled townscape quality and buildings of national importance. open land. and older industrial and commercial areas with environmental problems.The control of development has to be seen in the context of the need to conserve this heritage whilst encouraging appropriate new development. and contains policies designed to promote a high standard of design. wetlands and wildflower meadows. Higher standards of environmental quality and design are important in assisting the regeneration of the Borough and contributing to the quality of life. To preserve or enhance areas of recognised and valued character. to preserve and enhance the existing character. safety and the built and natural environment. almost 1000 statutory Listed Buildings. sites of ancient monuments and areas of special character. historic gardens and parks. Specific policies on the natural environment and its protection and conservation are included in the Environmental Protection and Open Space Chapters. To preserve or enhance Conservation Areas. It is also concerned with conservation and heritage issues. It has an impact on the Borough’s image. DESIGN & CONSERVATION GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 6. and to protect Listed Buildings of architectural or historic interest and their settings.

the reuse of previously developed land and the efficient and appropriate use of land.The character of the Borough and the guidelines for design should not be used to prevent good imaginative design. With its 13 kilometre waterfront. Firstly. Elsewhere.The Council has produced design guidelines to provide more detailed guidance for achieving a coherent and coordinated urban fabric. in an Urban Design Strategy for Woolwich Town Centre and a Streetscape Manual for Greenwich Town Centre. character of adjoining buildings. the pressures may be less intense. for in appropriate locations. Environmental Quality policies cover heritage issues including Conservation Areas and Listed Buildings. The northern part of the Borough has seen developments along the Waterfront in particular. There are. and topography.7 6. in line with Government guidance. the Borough can offer opportunities where the very best modern designs can rival their historic counterparts in their imagination. and thirdly Environmental Improvement policies conclude this chapter. a proper relationship with the street. but interrelated categories. Design advice is available for specific Conservation Areas.6 6. significant change resulting from inward investment and regeneration.facilitate economic and social development that also safeguards the environment in which we live. New development in particular should take note of urban design principles and specific guidelines set out in the policies. and redevelopment on a scale unrivalled in the Region. The detailed policies are set out below in a number of distinct. by preserving the best of the past. by carrying out environmental improvements. Secondly.5 Changes to the existing environment should help meet the needs of local people and should help to promote good living and working conditions generally. and by helping to provide safe and secure environments for all. including respect for the locality. context and scale. It is important on this context to promote. local materials. areas of poor environment and deprivation where not only does good design need to be encouraged but where environmental improvements need to be targeted and promoted. The World Heritage Site Management Plan (2004) considers sympathetic design and conservation for the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site. a process endorsed by the Council’s Local Agenda 21 Strategy.The Council attaches great importance to the need to encourage and promote a higher quality environment through design and conservation policies. and concern for the needs of local residents. A high quality of development will assist in the regeneration of the Borough by making it more attractive to investment as well as to residents and workers. the creation of a legible environment. style and ability to create a new environment worthy of the historic context. Sites including the Peninsula and Royal Arsenal have provided the Borough with the unprecedented opportunity to incorporate quality design with integrated transport links and new developments. high quality buildings in a modern idiom will be welcomed. 6. but no less important for residents who value their surroundings and wish for a pleasant and safe environment. there are policies relating to urban design.The target is that over 90% development will be on brownfield sites. The Borough has and continues to undergo. 6. also.8 108 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . by achieving high standards of design in new developments.

layout and design that the development contributes to a safe and secure environment for users and the public. use of appropriate materials. height. .how the design relates to and enhances its urban context. landscape setting. Maintain adequate daylight and sunlight to adjoining buildings and land. . .patterns of activity.existing townscape. . vii. Maximise energy conservation. and skylines. both traditional and modern.the cultural diversity of the area.Policies Urban Design D1 Development proposals should be of a high quality of design and will be expected to: i. DESIGN & CONSERVATION 109 .how the development would relate to established patterns of movement and activity in the wider area. bulk and massing of adjacent townscape. Promote local distinctiveness by providing a site-specific design solution.features of architectural. through effective layout. . vi. ii. movement and circulation. v. ix. ridges and natural features.the implications of the development for urban sustainability. . orientation. viii. .the potential for a mix of uses. Integrate with existing path and circulation networks and patterns of activity.the quality and nature of materials. .topography.the principles behind the architectural and landscape design. historical. archaeological. Create attractive. including disabled people. iii. . detailing and landscape design. views.the effective use of land. .the scale. Provide a positive relationship between the proposed and existing urban context by taking account of: . . local landmarks. manageable well-functioning spaces within the site. . (Policy D7) Achieve accessible and inclusive environments for all.established layout and spatial character. iv. biodiversity and their setting.the architecture of surrounding buildings. . .an analysis of the site and its environs. Achieve the Building Research Establishment’s BREEAM excellent rating which addresses a wide variety of environmental issues D2 Major development proposals and new build developments proposed for sensitive locations should be accompanied by a Design Statement setting out: . Demonstrate through proposed land uses.

The particular requirements for residential extensions are set out in Policies D9 and D10 and Advice Note 2. and account has been taken of creating a sustainable environment. safety. that the development reacts to its urban context. Good design should contribute positively to making places better for people. . The Building Research Establishments Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) is a flexible and independently verified environment assessment method.000 sqm. listed building consent applications (except for internal works) and planning applications (except for changes of use and most minor householder developments) must be accompanied by a design and access statement. materials. accessibility and treatment of spaces between buildings.within the setting of a listed building or scheduled ancient monument. A high quality environment can be produced by careful design of townscape elements layout. Reason for D1 and D2 6. or which fails to take the opportunities available for improving the character and quality of an area and the way it functions.within an area of special character. To achieve sustainable development. .within the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site. . Good and imaginative design for individual schemes can make a direct contribution to upgrading overall townscape quality.‘By Design: Urban Design in the Planning System – Towards Better Practice’ provides advice on implementing the Government’s commitment to good design. with environmental performance expressed on a scale of pass to excellent.11 110 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . relationship of buildings to each other and their surroundings. developers are encouraged to attain the excellent standard. massing. They seek to ensure that new development is designed individually for the specific site and urban context in question. . From 10 August 2006.developments of more than 5. Design Statements are intended to explicitly demonstrate that a range of design issues have been taken into account in key locations and circumstances. 6. Planning Policy Statement 1: Delivering Sustainable Development (2005) states that high quality and inclusive design should be the aim of all those involved in the development process. (DETR/CABE.Developments and sensitive locations requiring a Design Statement include: . The statement should include sufficient material to fully illustrate the design and impact of the proposal.10 6. .The Borough is not of uniform character but is made up of areas with distinct identities and developments should reflect this.sites fronting the River Thames. . 2000).developments of more than 25 dwelling units.within or adjacent to conservation areas.The above policies are a basis for achieving good urban design and provide a benchmark from which development proposals can be assessed. under the Planning & Compulsory Purchase Act (2004).within or affecting historic landscapes. Design which is inappropriate. . that there has been an appropriately qualified and experienced design input.9 The Council attaches great importance to the achievement of high quality design that adds to the high quality of the Borough’s environment and to Greenwich distinctiveness. should not be accepted.The London Plan acknowledges that good design is central to all the objectives of the plan.

To protect trees and their root systems from damage as a result of the development both during and after building operations. iii. hedges and other features where these will contribute to the development.D3: Development proposals will be expected to take account of ecological factors as well as display a high standard of landscaping. Examples of such improvements are given in the policy and would be secured by legal agreements where appropriate. provision of public art. Development decisions will be based on the requirement: a. including protected species (See Policy O22). This policy recognises that there may be developments where it will be relevant for improvements to the urban and natural environment to be included. signs. iv. (See Policy O21) ii. c. That landscaping schemes should include environmentally appropriate planting using locally native species and demonstrate appropriate irrigation plans for landscaping. To achieve an appropriate replacement of trees taking account of size. creation and possible management of ecological habitat and interpretation projects. footways.g. b. The Council will seek to achieve improvements to both the urban and natural environment in line with Policy SC2. e. d.The emphasis will be to soften the impact of the development in its setting and provide visual interest in the street scene and to contribute to nature conservation. Layouts need to be designed around existing vegetation and landscaping proposals should be an integral part of the application. To ensure that planting design does not impact negatively on personal safety and accessibility.13 The Council’s overall approach to community benefits and planning obligations is set out in Policy SC2. Reason 6. green corridors. tree ridge lines. The protection and enhancement of natural river features and corridors by appropriate landscaping and design. wildlife habitats.12 Development sites that pay insufficient regard to existing ecological and natural landscape features can lead to an incoherent urban form and the unnecessary destruction of existing nature conservation interest. Reason 6. The Council will consult the Environment Agency on development proposals that directly affect the Boroughs rivers and watercourses. The retention of trees and the protection and enhancement of natural and ecological features. in particular paying attention to the needs for: i. D4 DESIGN & CONSERVATION 111 . An appropriate level of survey to enable decisions to be made about the existing trees on the site. coverage and species where it is agreed that existing trees can be felled. A survey of flora and fauna on sites of defined ecological importance and on sites over 1 hectare to enable decisions to be made regarding their conservation. street trees. The regard for the biodiversity and geological features of the site and the surrounding area. These features should be respected and the area’s natural character enhanced. surface materials. boundary walls. v.

Reason 6.The conversion of large residential dwellings should regard parking provision as an important consideration. footpaths. extension or change of use) of buildings and land to which the public have access should.15 Many buildings and open spaces are inaccessible to disabled people. pollution and loss of amenity. convenient and appropriate to the type and scale of the development. Parking can cause considerable problems in terms of noise. Parking should be provided in accordance with the parking standards set out in the Movement Chapter (Policies M23 to M27). provide suitable access for disabled people. The Disability Discrimination Act 1995 contains provisions to improve access to services for disabled people. parking and service areas should be attractive. emphasis will be placed on providing for the safe and convenient movement of pedestrians in an attractive. well lit environment. older people and people with young children. where practical and reasonable. Developers and other agencies should consider the needs of disabled people who might use the building or outdoor spaces as a place of work. Reason 6. Safety and Security in the Environment 112 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . cyclepaths. Parking and service arrangements should work effectively and be designed to minimise their visual impact.14 The success of a development depends to a considerable extent upon the ease of access for pedestrians and vehicles. or as visitors or customers. ensuring that the amenity of neighbouring properties would not be unduly affected. Commercial developments should also incorporate significant landscaping within their design to ensure the parking provision does not dominate the site. Access for People with Disabilities D6 Applications for development (including the alteration. safe. particularly in residential areas.Parking and Access Arrangements D5 The design and layout of access roads. (See Policies H5 and H6 and Advice Note 3: Planning Standards for Conversions). In residential areas. Advice on the colour used for cyclepaths should be sought from the Council to ensure conformity with cycle networks’ standards. particularly for people with disabilities. Proposed developments must comply with the guidelines on access for the disabled ‘Designing for Accessibility’ (published by the Centre for Accessible Environments and available from the Council’s Access Officer).

and will encourage tree planting in appropriate places. Avoiding the creation of spaces with ill defined ownership and ensuring there is a clear distinction between public and private space. It is not the intention of this policy to promote development in the form of ‘defended enclaves’ protected by security gates. Streets and Movement’ (1998) and Design Bulletin no. lesbians and gay men. or fear of crime. iv. ii.32: Residential Roads and Footpaths.This advice is supported by guidance from the Department for Transport. Entrances for example should be clearly visible. PPS1: Delivering Sustainable Development (2005) advises that development plan design policies should aim to create safe and accessible environments where crime and disorder. Design that enables a building and its surrounding space to function and be used effectively is important. Secure ‘enclave’ developments are not considered to generally reduce crime and the fear of crime because such developments do not address the public realm and do not provide lively frontages. does not undermine the quality of life or community cohesion. It is therefore both desirable and important that new developments should both provide a safe environment and improve it in areas where it is poor.Safety and Security in the Environment D7 The Council will require all development to be designed to provide and improve personal safety and security in the environment particularly for women. play areas and open spaces are overlooked by inhabited buildings.16 People’s use of their environment is restricted by both the reality of danger to personal safety and their fears of insecurity. vi. Ensuring the development is well integrated into the existing pattern of pedestrian and vehicular movement and extends links with existing public routes. path networks to link buildings and spaces should follow natural desire lines that people expect to take. minority ethnic communities. enforce this. Generally security is better promoted by ensuring that developments are permeable and overlooked as much as possible. is encouraged. and contribute towards natural surveillance. v. accessible only to residents. children. Buildings and spaces around them should contribute towards developing public perception of the environment and their use of the spaces within it.This is particularly so for disadvantaged groups. and Ensuring that good quality lighting is provided for streets and paths. particularly as part of new developments and townscape improvement schemes and particularly of native species. older people and people with disabilities. 6.17 DESIGN & CONSERVATION 113 .The design of new developments can contribute to personal safety by: i. An Advice Note ‘Designing for Personal Safety’ gives further guidance. Ensuring that landscaping. Trees D8 The Council will seek to maintain tree coverage. Reason 6. Ensuring that community safety measures such as CCTV are provided where it is practical and appropriate. Ensuring that paths. The planting of trees. iii. especially in areas of deficiency. planting and building does not create dark or secluded areas. Good design will help people find their way around. notably ‘Places. and the care of existing trees. while maintaining the privacy of the inhabitants of these buildings. Tree preservation orders will be used to protect trees of environmental importance and visual amenity where their health or amenity is threatened.Traditional street patterns rather than cul-de-sac designs for example.

Reason 6. ii. Detailed guidance for extensions are set out in Advice Note 2. Two storey extensions to the side of semi detached houses will not be permitted unless they are designed to avoid a ‘terracing effect’ in conjunction with adjacent extensions. masts. Proposals for rear. technologies to camouflage telecommunications apparatus have been fully explored. consideration has been given to locating a site which causes minimal visual impact subject to operational needs. the street scene and the surrounding area and respect the amenities of adjoining occupiers. 114 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . such as site. listed buildings.20 Inappropriately designed extensions can adversely affect residential amenity. side and other additions should be limited to a scale and design appropriate to the building and locality. the possibility of sharing facilities. coloured and landscaped so as to minimise visual impact on its setting and local environment. In most cases a pitched roof will be required on side or rear extensions when they would be visible from the public highway. Rear extensions will not be permitted where these could cause an unacceptable loss of amenity to adjoining occupiers by reducing the amount of daylight. v. and erecting antennae on existing buildings or other structures has been fully explored and demonstrated.Tree planting will not be encouraged in places where this would be detrimental to existing nature conservation interests. ii. interfere with a pleasant outlook or result in an increased sense of enclosure. and any proposal meets International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) guidelines for public exposure.They will need to meet the following criteria: i. such as valuable grasslands. any proposal is sited. iii. conservation areas and historic landscapes are preserved or enhanced. Detailed guidance for extensions are set out in Advice Note 2.Reason 6. iv. D10 iii. sunlight or privacy they enjoy. the special character and appearance of the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site.18 The Borough’s trees are important elements of the landscape and contribute to its visual and ecological character. Residential Extensions D9 All new roof extensions should be designed to respect the scale and character of the host building. Telecommunications Development D11 Planning permission will normally be granted for telecommunications development provided that: i. designed. Reason 6. vi. privacy and outlook.19 To ensure that roof extensions do not have an adverse effect on the appearance of the building or street scene and do not detrimentally affect residential amenity. In Conservation Areas work to or the felling of trees requires consent.

Satellite Antennae D12 Satellite antennae must be sensitively positioned on buildings in order to minimise their impact on the environment. considered concerns about the health effects from the use of mobile phones. and the Government. Much minor telecommunications development is covered by permitted development rights and therefore does not require planning permission. Proposals for telecommunications masts will be required to demonstrate compliance with these guidelines.” However. there are no grounds for additional planning controls on telecommunications masts on health grounds. particularly in residential areas. although is subject to prior notification procedures. PPG8: Telecommunications (2001) confirms that emissions from mobile phone base stations should meet ICNIRP guidelines for public exposure. Telecommunications have the potential to contribute to sustainable development by enabling more people to work and carry out other functions from home. base stations and transmitters. the siting and appearance of the proposed development. However. to buildings where they will be open to public view.23 6. traffic levels and pollution. The Council realises that there are concerns about the health risks telecommunications masts may pose.24 DESIGN & CONSERVATION 115 . Such procedures allow the local planning authority to consider. Reason 6. The Stewart Report (2000). the group did recommend tightening planning control over mast erection. where the cumulative effect can be particularly severe. Detailed guidance regarding the siting and appearance of mast and ancillary apparatus is given in PPG8. and on blocks of flats. In Conservation Areas satellite antennae are not normally acceptable when located on front or side walls or on chimneys. as a result of the Stewart Report and PPG8. 6. It recommended compliance with International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) guidelines for public exposure. the Council. New development should examine methods of reducing the need for satellite antennae by introducing centralised facilities. The report also states that the possibility of harm cannot be ruled out with confidence and that the gaps in knowledge are sufficient to justify a precautionary approach to mobile phone technologies.The benefits that these developments bring are recognised and the policy seeks to allow such developments subject to criteria which aim to minimise their visual and environmental impact and to encourage the shared use of facilities. However. Conservation Areas. within 56 days. PPG8 encourages planning authorities to include policies on telecommunications development in their development plans.22 6.Reason 6. are concerned about the impact of telecommunications on the environment and the Council will seek to ensure that the townscape will not suffer an unnecessary proliferation of telecommunications structures and the lowering of environmental quality. while finding that the balance of evidence suggested no health risk.They are not considered acceptable on Listed Buildings where the character of the building is adversely affected. thus reducing the need to travel.21 Modern telecommunications are an essential and beneficial element in the life of Greenwich’s residents and workforce.25 The installation of satellite antennae can have an adverse visual impact on the facades of individual buildings and the overall townscape. It concluded that “the balance of evidence does not suggest that mobile phone technologies put the health of the general population at risk.

iii. New shopfronts should not adversely affect highway and pedestrian safety. these should be given due regard. or in Conservation Areas. sited to minimise visual clutter and obstruction. through normal consultation procedures. however it is important that it is designed and sited to be both functional and visually attractive. Street furniture should be purposeful. telephone boxes. The Council will also seek to influence the design and siting of street furniture provided by other authorities i. Greenwich Town Centre Streetscape Manual. Externally located grilles or security shutters will not normally be acceptable on traditional and historic shopfronts. Where design guidelines have been prepared for such areas. Modern materials may be acceptable where the appearance of a traditional shopfront can be created. particularly for those with mobility restrictions. consistent and attractive in design that is sensitive to the local character of the area.The Council has produced an Advice Note “Design Guidance for Shopfronts”. Where proposed. “Design Guidance for Shopfronts in Greenwich Town centre” and “Design Guidance for Shop Signs. using traditional materials as far as possible. Where traditional shopfronts contribute to the character or appearance of an area.e. security grilles should be of the open mesh variety. All new shopfronts must be accessible to people with disabilities. especially a conservation area.26 Well designed shopfronts and signs can contribute towards the overall environmental enhancement of an area. Particular areas within the Borough may also advocate a style of street furniture relating to their historic connection or tourism function. v. New shopfronts including fascias and signs should be designed to respect established proportions in the immediate area. their retention and repair will be encouraged. public utility boxes.e. i. Solid metal grilles over shopfronts are particularly inappropriate as they are perceived to make a street appear more dangerous. The proposed replacement of traditional shopfronts should respect the features and proportions of the original shopfront. ii. For shopfronts and signs within Greenwich Town Centre the Council has produced two design guidelines. creating problems and fears about personal safety. Advertisements and Illumination in Greenwich Town Centre”. Illuminated fascias and external lighting will not be permitted where they affect the character of the building or the amenities of the adjacent area.27 Street furniture plays an important role in our built and natural environment. 116 DESIGN & CONSERVATION .Shopfronts and Signs D13 The Council will require applications for planning permission for shopfronts and express consent for signs to take into account the following criteria: i. which provides additional guidance for shopfronts within the borough. Reason 6. Reason 6. vii. vi. Where the proposed replacement of traditional shopfronts is concerned this objective will be pursued where it is practicable. iv. Street Furniture D14 The Council will encourage street furniture to be of a good quality.

Reason 6. Conservation Areas D16 Planning permission will only be granted for proposals which preserve or enhance the character or appearance of Conservation Areas. design and the means of access.31 DESIGN & CONSERVATION 117 .g. East Greenwich. Development on sites in the vicinity of a Conservation Area and which would have a visual effect on its character or appearance. Do not adversely affect the amenity of residential areas. Shrewsbury Park Estate. Ashburnham Triangle. open spaces. and which might cumulatively harm the character or appearance of the area e. Conservation Areas or Areas of Special Character and are not in a position where they would have an adverse effect on the setting of a Listed Building. iii.Advertisements D15 The Council will normally give express consent for large poster or other advertisement displays provided they: i. Article 4 Directions will be used to control changes to the appearance of buildings and their settings that would otherwise not require planning permission. TfL will be consulted where they are the designated Highway Authority. Their size can often look out of place with their surroundings and they are sometimes located where they are likely to create a road safety hazard. taking into account local scale. PPG15 and the Circular direct the designation of Conservation Areas in recognition of the area’s “special architectural or historic interest. should respect the setting of that area. Applications for the erection of buildings within Conservation Areas should in most cases be submitted in full. Trenchard Street and Greenwich Town 6.. The Borough’s Conservation Areas have special qualities and character which could be adversely affected by inappropriate development (see Map 8 and Proposals Map). building form and materials.28 Advertisement displays can often be unsightly. In any instance where it is decided that an application ought not to be considered separately from all or any of the reserved matters. particularly the sensitive locations identified in the policy. Rectory Field. ii. the character or appearance of which it is desirable to preserve or enhance”. Circular 14/97 also places a requirement on Local Planning Authorities to pay special attention to preserving or enhancing the historic environment.30 6. Reason 6. detract from the character of an environment and have an adverse effect on the amenity of the area. PPG19: Outdoor Advertisement Control (1992) emphasises outdoor advertising is essential to commercial activity but can be prominent and unsuitable in some locations.Where the character or appearance of a Conservation Area is threatened by inappropriate development the Council will seek to control these through the use of Article 4 Directions.Article 4 Directions have been issued for West Greenwich (Randall Place & Churchfields). window replacement. the established pattern of development and landscape. Progress Estate. Where outline applications are appropriate they will normally be required to provide details of siting.29 National policy on Conservation Areas and Listed Buildings is found in PPG15: ‘Planning and the Historic Environment’’. the procedure specified by Article 3(2) of the General Development Procedure Order (1995) will be invoked. Do not adversely affect public safety including pedestrians and drivers. Harmonise with the scale and character of the surrounding area and are not fixed to flank walls where they would be unduly dominant.

32 Conservation Areas will contain a number of buildings which are not listed but do contribute to the character and appearance of the area and are worthy of retention. In line with the guidance in PPG15 (paras 3. Reason 6.34 Repairs and alterations. D19 D20 118 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . The Council will need to be satisfied that any such works will not lead to this result. features of interest should be respected and left in-situ wherever possible. even on a small scale. indicating all the proposals in detail. Any application for substantial demolition will be required to produce convincing evidence to demonstrate that every effort has been made to sustain existing uses or find new ones. including elevational drawings where appropriate. Listed Buildings D18 There will be a presumption in favour of the preservation of Listed Buildings. iii.33 Listed Buildings make an important contribution to the townscape of the Borough and the Council attaches great importance to their protection and preservation.The Council will also promote the enhancement of conservation areas by the preparation of character appraisals and statements. The condition of the building and the cost of repairs relative to its importance. Conservation Area consent for the demolition of buildings will normally be given only when planning permission has been granted for redevelopment which complies with the requirements of Policy D16. and will be assessed against the following criteria: i. and harmonise with their special architectural or historic character. to clearly show the development in the context of the street scene. The Council will resist proposals for development which would detract from the setting and proportions of a Listed Building or group. Listed Building Consent will only be granted for demolition or partial demolition in exceptional circumstances.19) applicants for listed building consent must be able to fully justify their proposals and will need to demonstrate why works which affect the character of an existing building are desirable or necessary. The merits of alternative proposals for the site.163. can jeopardise the architectural integrity of the building. Reason 6. Applications for Listed Building consent should be accompanied by plans to scale. The adequacy of efforts made to return the building in use. When demolition is permitted it will be subject to the building remaining until a contract for redevelopment is let. D17 Demolition of buildings and structures that positively contribute to the character or appearance of a conservation area will be resisted. ii. Reason 6. The policy also enables the Council to assess the comparative quality of existing and proposed development and ensure that new development will enhance the character and appearance of the Conservation Area. Where consent is required for internal alterations. Proposals for external or internal alterations or additions to Listed Buildings should respect the integrity of the buildings.Centre.

Woolwich Goldie Leigh Hospital Shrewsbury Park Estate 16 17 18 19 20 Rectory Field East Greenwich Sun in Sands Well Hall Pleasaunce Westcombe Park DESIGN & CONSERVATION 119 .Map 8: Conservation Areas 13 17 11 20 12 4 1 2 18 16 7 8 15 10 14 3 5 9 19 6 © Crown copyright 1 2 3 4 5 West Greenwich Blackheath Blackheath Park Greenwich Park Progress Estate 6 7 8 9 10 Eltham Palace Charlton Village Woolwich Common Eltham Green Deptford High Street 11 12 13 14 15 Plumstead Common Ashburnham Triangle Royal Arsenal.

Reason 6. proposals for the demolition or unsympathetic alteration of Locally Listed Buildings will be discouraged. World Heritage Site The Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site was inscribed in 1997.The Local List will be updated on a regular basis. Proposals for changes of use of Listed Buildings will only be granted planning permission if it is no longer in its original or other established historic use and the new use is beneficial to the building and is compatible with its character and features of historic interest. It was the 16th such site in the UK. maintenance and use.38 Whilst not benefiting from the same degree of protection afforded to statutory listed buildings. a Register of Listed Buildings at risk from neglect and decay. In order to secure their continued beneficial use other plan policies may be applied more flexibly should the individual circumstances dictate.The Council will assist English Heritage in revising the Register and in promoting appropriate action to bring about their repair and reuse. The Council will promote action. In considering proposals affecting buildings on the Local List of Buildings of Architectural or Historic Interest. Reason 6. Grants from English Heritage may be available for this purpose. Reason 6. The Council will assist English Heritage to maintain and revise regularly.The policy for the Site is included in the Greenwich section of the town centre chapter. locally listed buildings are an important part of the Borough’s built heritage and consequently every effort will be made to ensure their long term retention.Reason 6. Historic Landscapes D24 Proposals which would adversely affect the character or appearance of historic landscapes will not be permitted.36 The use for which some Listed Buildings were originally designed is sometimes no longer tenable. Consequently. (Policy TC7). If buildings in this situation are left empty there is a danger they will fall into disrepair. Such a change of use should not conflict with other policies in the Plan. in conjunction with the Boroughs maintains a Register of Listed Buildings at risk from neglect and decay. substantial weight will be given to protecting and conserving the particular characteristics that account for their designation. where appropriate.37 English Heritage in London. Policies D16 and D17 apply. D22 D23 6.Where these buildings are located within a Conservation Area.35 D21 The setting of a Listed Building can be fundamental to its character and appearance and often forms part of its original design and layout. including the use of building repair notices and urgent works notices.39 120 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . to bring about the reuse and repair of buildings on the register.

are an essential part of the Borough’s heritage too. Paul’s Cathedral from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point cross the West Greenwich conservation area. In the case of the Greenwich Park view a height threshold of 30 metres (A. in the protected areas. (Above Ordnance Datum). Paul’s Cathedral from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point shown on the Proposal Map will be protected from the intrusion of new developments: i. From there they traverse the Boroughs of Lewisham. gardens and their settings. In order to preserve the integrity of existing views but allow sufficient scope for redevelopment it will be necessary to control the height of new buildings or structures within reasonable parameters. The setting of the Cathedral in the skyline will be maintained by ensuring that the height. It is characterised by the sharp change in levels from the Blackheath plateau down to the low-lying riverside areas. Development within the wider setting consultation area. which include parks. Strategic Views D25 Strategic views of St. Paul’s Cathedral seen from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point.The three sites in Greenwich. By the careful consideration of proposals which could infringe on the development plane from Blackheath Point. English Heritage has prepared a register of parks and gardens of special historic interest.The foreground of views from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point consist of the historic areas of Greenwich Town Centre and Deptford.O. Southwark. whilst the development plane from Blackheath Point will be applicable in considering the impact of the proposal on these areas. Their unique character should be protected from the adverse effects of development. location and materials of proposed buildings within the defined wider setting and backdrop consultation areas do not adversely affect its prominence. Paul’s Cathedral in relation to both the skyline and the foreground of views from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point will be protected and enhanced.Reason 6. are Greenwich Park.D. including Deptford Creek. Careful consideration of building materials and tone can make a proposal more sympathetic in long distance views.) will be applied. and the development plane in the case of the Blackheath Point view.Well Hall Pleasaunce and Eltham Palace.45 DESIGN & CONSERVATION 121 . which are listed on the register. By limiting all proposed developments within the viewing corridor from Greenwich Park to a height of 30 metres A. will not normally be permitted. Reason 6. The Council will consult other local authorities when a planning application is submitted for a development that exceeds the 30 metres (A. Reason 6.O.The Framework is to be published as Supplementary Planning Guidance to the London Plan incorporating Management Plans for each of the views. Paul’s Cathedral.44 6.40 Historic landscapes. In the London Plan it is proposed to replace these views with a London Protection Framework which will include the strategic views as ‘London Panoramas’ and also include ‘River Prospects’ and ‘Townscape and Linear Views’.42 The foreground of the view(s) is important to the setting of the Cathedral. The setting of St. even if not directly obstructing the views will be resisted.43 6. and development that would adversely affect this.) threshold from the Greenwich Park view.D. D26 6.41 Government directions require the Council to protect the designated strategic views and wider setting of St. The strategic views of St. ii.O.D. which would exceed the height thresholds and which would seriously detract from the views of St.

Marys Churchyard towards Mast Pond Wharf and beyond Docklands panorama from the Wolfe Monument Eltham Palace to Central London Millennium Dome from Central Park (from Pilot P.H. forecourt) Local View Zone b c d e 122 DESIGN & CONSERVATION .Map 9: Local Views k g h f i b a c d e j © Crown copyright a Shooters Hill to Central London Shrewsbury Park to the lower Thames Castlewood towards SE London Eaglesfield Recreation Ground towards Bexley and the lower Thames Eltham Park North to Central London f g h i j k Winns Common to the lower Thames Thames-side panorama from the Thames Barrier open space St.

f.E. particularly where these provide views of the River Thames and its banks (see also Thames Policy Area W2). c. Thames side panorama from the Thames Barrier open space. e. Mary’s Churchyard towards Mast Pond Wharf and beyond.Tower Hamlets and the City of Westminster and the Corporation of London. London. Consultation between these authorities and the Mayor of London is essential to secure the objectives of this policy. Eaglesfield Recreation Ground towards Bexley and the Lower Thames. g. b. St. j.The London Plan encourages Boroughs to designate and manage local views. Local Views D27 Planning permission will be given for development which would not have a seriously adverse effect on the overall perspective and essential quality of the Local Views as listed below and as identified on Map 9: a. Winns Common to the lower Thames. Reason 6. All these views are from publicly accessible spaces and offer panoramas. DESIGN & CONSERVATION 123 .46 These views are an important element in the character of the Borough. d. Eltham Park (North) to Central London. Millennium Dome from Central Park. Shooter’s Hill to Central London. vistas and other views of landmarks and water-space recognised for their contribution to the local built and natural environment. Eltham Palace to Central London. Docklands panorama from the Wolfe Monument. h. i.Camden. Shrewsbury Park towards the lower Thames. k. Inappropriately designed or sited buildings or structures within the views can have an adverse impact on the quality of the view. Castlewood towards S.

ii. Charlton House. Areas considered to be particularly inappropriate for high buildings are: i. Proposals should relate positively to topographical features and other high buildings and contribute positively to the image and built environment of London. the River Thames and other waterways vi.g. viii. Guidance on tall buildings (2001) published by English Heritage and CABE gives further advice. historic parks and gardens. local views. v. Proposals should take account of proximity to public transport facilities/interchanges. to facilitate interaction at street level. the Green Chain) 124 DESIGN & CONSERVATION . Reason 6. high environmental quality. Greenwich Park. f. Proposals should secure a complete and well-designed setting. Planning applications for high buildings will be assessed using the following criteria: i. iii. the world heritage site. conservation areas. or major open landscape (e. Blackheath. e. vii. Royal Artillery Barracks). b. iv. h. architecture and the need to meet functional considerations and can make a positive contribution to the environment. d. Thamesmead Town Centre and at key locations in the Waterfront area. including hard and soft landscaping. Proposals should enhance the skyline by ensuring that the roof top design is of high quality. strategic views.High Buildings D28 Planning permission for high buildings will be granted within Woolwich Town Centre.g. metropolitan open land and other open spaces. Proposals should be of outstanding architectural and urban design quality and act as a landmark. However. c. in certain locations high buildings may be considered appropriate. listed buildings and their settings. Areas within or with a visual relationship to areas of special character (e. Areas with a visual relationship to important and famous buildings (e. both locally and in relation to the local and wider area from which it will be visible. World Heritage Site and buffer zone and Conservation Areas). Proposals should take account of visual impact on: a. Proposals should be set in a Borough (or wider) urban design analysis. Old Royal Naval College/ National Maritime Museum.g. assessed in particular on their standard of urban design. Proposals should emphasise or contribute to a point of civic or visual significance or a centre of urban activity or regeneration.47 High buildings and structures are inappropriate in most areas of the Borough due to being out of scale and character with their surroundings. The Borough’s character comprises extensive areas of low-rise townscape including suburban residential areas and large areas of green open land. Other areas also particularly sensitive to the presence of high structures and buildings are set out below. ii. their settings and views from them. and g.

Bostall Ridge. including scheduled monuments.50 Archaeological remains are a finite and fragile resource vulnerable to modern developments. restoration and enhancement of character.The Borough’s archaeological heritage represents a local community asset that is desirable to preserve and utilise both as an educational and recreational resource. special consideration will be given to the safeguarding. Eltham Common.iii. Shooter’s Hill.The objectives of new development can often conflict with the need to preserve. but where this is not feasible the remains should either be investigated. there will be a presumption in favour of the physical preservation of the remains in situ and to allow for public access and display and to preserve their settings. enhancement and preservation of sites of archaeological interest and of their settings. and nature conservation value.48 Areas of special character are areas that form a key part of the landscape character of the Borough. historic parks. In Greenwich these include the Blackheath/Greenwich Park open spaces. A landscape strategy for the improvement of the Blackheath open space has been prepared (2004). Shooters Hill. excavated and removed from the site. Major high points. PPG16 gives guidance on how archaeological remains should be preserved or recorded. Abbey Ridge and Bostall Woods areas (Bostall Woods. Potential 6. At identified sites of known archaeological remains of national importance. Eltham Park. The Thameside area is covered by the Thames Policy Area designation (See Policy W2) Archaeology D30 The Council will expect applicants to properly assess and plan for the impact of proposed developments on archaeological remains where they fall within ‘Areas of Archaeological Potential’ as defined on the constraints Map 10. Shooters Hill Golf Course. They are defined on the Proposals Map and the policy seeks to ensure development proposals do not adversely affect their character. Castle Wood. It recommends that UDPs should include policies for the protection. as well as a map defining where these policies apply. tree slopes and ridges. Reason 6. including developed sites where protection of the skyline is paramount (e. For sites of lesser importance the Council will seek to preserve the remains in situ. D26 & D27) iv.Woolwich Common. ancient countryside. Appropriate conditions/legal agreements may be used to ensure this is satisfied. The Countryside Commission in its document “Strategic Guidance for Heritage Land in London” has identified the Shooters Hill Ridge area as Heritage Land due to its high landscape value. or investigated. excavated and recorded before destruction. recording and publication of archaeological finds before development takes place by use of planning conditions/legal agreements as appropriate. Skylines and distant views both to and from the Areas of Special Character will be protected. Eltham Ridge). Oxleas Wood.The Council will seek to secure the co operation of developers in the excavation. Reason 6.49 D31 DESIGN & CONSERVATION 125 . famous or locally important views (see Policies D25.g. Areas of Special Character D29 Within Areas of Special Character defined on the Proposals Map. In certain instances preliminary archaeological site investigations may be required before proposals are considered. or to remove and record such remains.Avery Hill and sports-ground). scale and quality of open spaces and associated buildings. Areas where high buildings would spoil traditional.

Map 10: Areas of Archeological Potential © Crown copyright Areas of High Potential NB Thames riverfront Area of High Potential has been extended to the low water mark 126 DESIGN & CONSERVATION .

The support of local archaeological groups is essential to this process. Reason 6. e. Encourage co-operation amongst landowners. particularly by local groups.52 D33 The Council recognises the importance of such improvements as contributing towards overall environmental enhancement of areas and improving the quality of people’s lives. nature conservation purposes. DESIGN & CONSERVATION 127 .developers should be alerted early on in the planning process of likely remains so as to secure their preservation. The Council will encourage the temporary use of vacant land awaiting development. 6. developers and archaeological groups by promoting the principles laid down in the British Archaeologists and Developers Liaison Group Code of Practice. ii.g. and if applicable make provision for the preservation or recording of such finds by a recognised archaeological organisation. The potential for discovery of significant remains in large areas of the Borough is high. Environmental Improvements D32 Subject to the availability of resources the Council will initiate environmental improvements. for appropriate uses. whilst the opportunity to record and preserve such finite resources is usually restricted to one occasion.51 The Council will also: i. Reason 6. and will work with voluntary groups and other agencies to encourage environmental improvements in areas of poor environment. iii.The Greenwich Heritage Centre is a potential location for the retention of remains. Pursue land use policies which are sensitive to the potential threat development can pose to archaeological remains and adopt a flexible approach to the design of new development in areas where the preservation of archaeological remains is paramount. areas of deprivation. and assist in nature conservation schemes.53 To overcome problems of unsightliness and blight. Encourage developers to allow an appropriate level of archaeological investigation where significant remains are unexpectedly discovered during construction. Early discussion with the Council and English Heritage is encouraged. and industrial and commercial areas. However the temporary use is not intended to prevent the long-term use and/or development of the site. particularly in the Waterfront.

128 DESIGN & CONSERVATION .

B. SM4 SM5 SM6 SM7 MOVEMENT 129 . then users of cars and powered two wheeled vehicles. changes to the strategic public transport and road networks in respect of Deptford Church Street junction realignment. meeting the requirements of the Road Traffic Reduction Act and Local Air Quality Management Plans. To seek equitable levels of mobility and accessibility for all groups of people. which is often not a desirable achievement in a world of finite resources and environmental concern.The emphasis is therefore on the importance of reducing the need to travel and carefully locating new development. people’s activities and the transport network that serves them in order to reduce the need to travel. The main emphasis of policy is to achieve a sustainable transport system and not necessarily to secure greater mobility. and will be safeguarded as and when appropriate. To promote a fully integrated public transport system that is extensive in coverage and meets the needs of residents. cycling and public transport. ii.1 The overall aim for transport is to achieve a more sustainable relationship between land uses. To assist the local and London economy commensurate with safeguarding the environment. the following priorities should be considered in preparing development proposals and transport policies and projects: i. particularly in respect of sensitive local areas. a high frequency Metro style rail network of turn up and go services.The general movement policies are: To effectively link major transport generators and attractors to the current and foreseeable transport network. and safeguarding the environment through mechanisms such as traffic management. particularly in respect of safer journeys to school. parking control and development control. such as walking. This would include necessary new infrastructure and services. SM1 SM2 To encourage the use of sustainable forms of transport. Thames Gateway Bridge and to have regard to notification requirements in respect of a third Blackwall crossing (to Silvertown Way in L.7. particularly major generators of travel demand. SM3 pedestrians. MOVEMENT GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 7. Greenwich Waterfront Transit is another strategic scheme the Council supports. workers and visitors in the Borough. To safeguard the Crossrail route. businesses. Policy emphasises better provision for walking and cycling. and particularly safe and convenient movement for pedestrians and cyclists. and common high standards. the Council will promote the movement of freight by more sustainable modes such as water and rail. at no or minimal cost to the environment. particularly for those presently disadvantaged in mobility terms. improved interchanges. cyclists and public transport users first. Generally. by restraining road traffic. To promote safe transport in general. where it can be served by public transport. people with disabilities. Newham) Woolwich Rail Crossing and DLR (Woolwich) Extension. encouraging other environmentally friendly transport and appropriate traffic management and calming measures.

especially on the North Kent Line. The objectives of Government guidance in PPG13 .3 7. However. and iii) reduce the need to travel especially by car. 55% in Woolwich Riverside and 51% in Woolwich Common.g. Bus links to the Jubilee Line North Greenwich Station from the South of the Borough need to be improved. adds to problems with local air quality. Road transport is seriously affected by the amount of traffic commuting through the Borough. and a London Metro. This planning guidance. the Woolwich Ferry and the bus service through the Blackwall Tunnel. Transport for London are responsible for procuring and subsidising bus services provided under tender by private bus operators. For example road improvement benefits the motorist. There is an existing capacity problem on rail routes. the Mayor’s London Plan and Transport Strategy.2 The 2001 Census indicated that 41% of households do not have access to a car or van.Transport are to integrate planning and transport at the national. environmentally sensitive roads. the claims of the car are restrained in order to safeguard the 7. in contrast to 27% in Coldharbour and New Eltham. service. reduced or simply scrapped. Many areas of the Borough are also in need of comprehensive traffic calming and problems associated with parking around stations and in town centres needs to be addressed. this is scheduled to open in early 2009. further reducing the revenue collected and increasing congestion on the roads. These cross-river facilities have been improved by the completion of the Jubilee Line Extension to Greenwich Peninsula and the Docklands Light Rail Extension from the Isle of Dogs southwards to Greenwich and Lewisham. which prevents an increase in services.This has the effect of forcing more people into private cars. causes traffic accidents and injury and reduces the efficiency of bus services. turn up and go.6 130 MOVEMENT . ii) promote accessibility to jobs. It is primarily road traffic which has caused the whole of the Borough to be declared an Air Quality Management Area.4 7. regional. Express and orbital routes also need to be developed. Most services in the Borough are provided by London Central and Stagecoach Selkent. Public transport is therefore an essential form of movement for travel to work and services for a large proportion of the population. But this disguises significant differences between areas with wards in the north of the Borough having very high rates of car and van non availability e. and providing for Borough needs are reflected in the range of Movement policies in the Plan. links between North and South in the Borough and Thamesmead.The Council would like to see better enforcement of traffic restrictions. Construction has started on the DLR extension to Woolwich. Thames Gateway Bridge and DLR (Woolwich) extension also need comprehensive public transport (server) strategies as part of the scheme.5 7. creates more hazards for both cyclists and pedestrians. The Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001) includes various proposals for improving rail services in London including a new rail crossing of the Thames at Woolwich (DLR).This traffic puts increased pressure on local. leisure facilities and services by public transport. Proposals are already under consideration for a South London Metro which would include the rail services in the Borough provided by South East Trains – the North Kent Line is a pilot scheme for South London Metro. as do links to the Queen Elizabeth Hospital.Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 7. For example 76% of traffic travelling North through the Blackwall Tunnel in the morning peak hour originates outside the Borough. shopping. The main areas of public transport deficiency are the limited cross-river service. walking and cycling. strategic and local level to: i) promote more sustainable transport choices. Walking also makes up an important element of all journeys for which provision needs to be made.The only cross-river facilities for non-car owners are the foot tunnels.A major problem facing the travelling public in the Borough can be deterioration in service provision as bus routes are re-organised.

Existing and proposed utilisation of public transport and impact upon capacity of networks. locating major activities such as schools and shops at public transport. reducing the divisions between communities made by major urban routes. In addition the policy will have additional benefits for health. as well as reducing the number of road traffic accidents. ii. arranging highways networks after these priorities. v.7 The Council’s transport policy of prioritising reduction in the use of private cars and increasing the use of public transport and walking or cycling. building into development costings provision for segregated roadways for Waterfront Transit (see Policy M10) as well as more conventional highways. including meeting Health of the Nation targets for coronary heart disease.General Principles M1 When planning transport provision for single large developments and extensive sites where comprehensive development can take place. younger and older people. walking and cycling is also to ensure that the mobility needs of women. people with disabilities and non-car owners are catered for. can make a substantial contribution to achieving improvements in outdoor air quality. developers should pay regard to: i.8 Policies Development and Transport . cycle networks and pedestrian networks. cyclists and public transport users first.The emphasis in the Plan towards sustainable forms of transport such as public transport. and increasing the number of ‘safe’ places for children to play. people with disabilities. M2 The Council will normally require a Transport Assessment of developments that employ a large workforce and/or attract significant numbers of trips. cycling and pedestrian nodes. The policies may also help improve the environment by reducing traffic jams. Increased provision of ‘safe’. 7.The scope of the assessment will reflect the scale of the development and the extent of the transport implications. Close liaison with Transport for London (TfL) and the relevant railway undertakers will be necessary. Reliance on motorised transport is not simply a cause of air pollution and traffic congestion. The needs of the Dome and Waterfront pose particular opportunities and challenges in respect of transport. as relevant. minority ethnic groups. 7. vi. MOVEMENT 131 . anti poverty and equal opportunities. The best method to increase physical activity is to try to incorporate it into the normal daily routine by promoting walking or cycling to the shops or to work and by promoting accessible public transport.environment and the legitimate demands of those without access to a car. building into highways networks traffic calming and design criteria for speeds no greater than 20 mph and the creation of home zones. designing for the needs of pedestrians. it has also resulted in a significant decline in “physical activity”. iv. well-lit walking areas and cycle lanes may be necessary prerequisites for persuading people to make more journeys by these means. Transport policies and provision also play a key role in serving the main Council objectives of regeneration. stroke and obesity. iii.

especially through economies of scale. iii. schools. use of public transport and car sharing. Travel Plans M3 Development proposals that will have a significant transport implication will be required to be accompanied by a Travel Plan before any granting of planning permission.10 Travel Plans (TPs) are useful tools to ensure that a development minimises the adverse environmental consequences of the travel demand that it generates.The implementation of Travel Plans will be secured through a condition or planning obligation on the planning permission in line with Policy SC2. the developer will be expected to liaise with the Council to determine an appropriate transport strategy for the scheme. are sought. reduced parking and traffic reduction targets in this UDP.9 In order to provide development and its consequent transport requirements in a sustainable way this policy is geared towards securing sustainable development compatible with the wider objectives of the UDP. Annual monitoring (for a 5 year period) allows mechanisms to be put in place to check and improve rates of reduction if necessary. cycling. minimise the need for car-based trips (especially single-occupant trips) and.The Council will use its powers through conditions on planning permissions and S106 agreements to secure the outcomes described in this policy in line with Policy SC2. including walking. Single large developments and extensive sites are defined as being of more than 25 dwelling units or more than 500m2. ii. retail. and 132 MOVEMENT . As such they contribute to meeting sustainability. Planning agreements and conditions on planning permissions in line with Policy SC2 may be used in pursuit of this policy. to poorly served areas of deprivation to ensure these are not isolated by the absence of affordable and reliable services. where travel is necessary. leisure.Reasons 7. they are individually tailored to the development and achievable targets.A TP should aim to minimise the need to travel to and from the site. TPs are appropriate for a range of development types which generate a significant level of travel demand. including employment. in line with those of the Mayor’s Transport Strategy. In the early stages of any major development proposal. maximise the use of sustainable forms of transport.Travel Plans are secured and agreed as part of the planning process. Reason 7. It goes on to state that “the Government considers that travel plans should be submitted alongside planning applications which are likely to have significant transport implications”. PPG13 promotes the widespread use of travel plans amongst businesses. i. Thamesmead. between residential areas in the South of the Borough and employment areas in the North. including the Jubilee Line North Greenwich Station. Public Transport Extension of the Public Transport Network M4 The Council will advocate and work in partnership with relevant agencies to extend public transport into the following under-served parts of the Borough. thus re-enforcing the poverty trap. Co-ordination of TP’s between different sites can bring benefits. education and health uses.There will be an onus placed on developers that they demonstrate the compatibility of their plans to this policy when submitting a development proposal. hospitals and other organisations.

Reason 7. New transport schemes should also be accompanied by comprehensive public transport proposals in order to maximise their catchment potential. the Waterfront.11 These areas are poorly served by public transport. Approximately 7% of the population have difficulties using public transport. (See Policy SC2). Good server networks to existing transport hubs will be promoted.13 Land uses and transport facilities must be integrated.12 M6 When considering developments that generate and/or attract significant amounts of public transport need/demand the Council will take into account accessibility to and from and of public transport. improvements to and expansion of bus and rail services will also be sought. according to a survey by the Greater London Association for Disabled People. It is appropriate that where developments will make significant demands on public transport their scope for contributing to public transport provision should be assessed. Greenwich. Public transport generally is sustainable and more available to all and it should be promoted as such.14 M7 The Council will safeguard land and otherwise support the introduction of public transport services on the river. hinders further development and regeneration and it can exacerbate poverty and social exclusion. Reason 7. In particular improved access to public transport for disadvantaged groups is sought. M5 Such major new transport developments as the Thames Gateway Bridge and DLR (Woolwich) extension should be accompanied by comprehensive public transport server network strategies. Public transport operators will also be urged to improve the accessibility of their vehicles and rolling stock for the use of people with disabilities and to provide new or improved services.The Disability Discrimination Act requires all buses to be accessible by 2017 and Transport for London intend to achieve this objective sooner. to the Queen Elizabeth Hospital generally. MOVEMENT 133 .This causes problems for existing population and industry. Of these 53% never went out of their homes in a given week.iv. Woolwich and Thamesmead. Accessible Public Transport 7. especially to provide improved access to public transport for disadvantaged groups.The existing network of public transport should be fully exploited in the interests of efficiency and maximising accessibility. a 400 metre maximum walking distance from a bus stop and an 800 metre standard from a railway station. Use of the River 7. Capacity and frequency improvements to public transport networks will also be sought. v. As a guide to developers and public transport operators. will be sought for housing developments. especially to provide access to health and other services. particularly between Central London. At present many people with disabilities experience specific barriers which either stop or restrict their use of conventional public transport.The transport needs of people with disabilities should be integrated into the forward planning and development of the public transport system. For relevant developments the Council will also examine the scope for planning obligations for public transport infrastructure in line with Policy SC2.

18 134 MOVEMENT . iv. promote a modal shift from the car and help the area’s regeneration. DLR Extension to Woolwich (see proposals map/site schedule m4) Crossrail Project Orbital Rail Services between Abbey Wood and Victoria Station. Planning applications affecting safeguarded land will be notified to the appropriate promoting bodies. bus services have great potential to make good rail network deficiencies. leisure. with connections to existing lines in the Thames Gateway at Abbey Wood. There is need for better bus linkages along the South Circular Road and these and other opportunities for improved east/west public transport will be examined with Transport for London. It is due to open in 2009. Safeguarded rail routes are shown on the Proposals Map.15 At present the river is under-used for transport.17 7. to link centres and cater for unmet demand in South London.Reason 7. The Woolwich Ferry is an important existing cross-river link. All new infrastructure should be accessible for people with disabilities. Crossrail is a Hybrid Bill proposal for national rail links from Maidenhead and Heathrow in the west to Shenfield and Abbey Wood in the east. ii. Development of the Waterfront areas must allow for the introduction of a service (see Movement Schedules).16 All schemes will be developed with due regard to safeguarding amenity and the environment. Because of the long development times involved in rail schemes. Public transport provision. tourism etc. Safeguarded and other Rail Schemes M8 The Council supports the following rail schemes which it will pursue with the relevant agencies: i. 7. The capacity of the DLR between Bank and Lewisham will be improved by increasing the length of trains from 2 to 3 cars. including riverbus services. Lewisham and Peckham should be considered. Capacity limitations on existing networks need to be resolved to ease overcrowding and promote greater use of the system. can give links across the River as well as along it to Central London and will give expanded opportunities for work. Policy M37 considers the use of the river for freight. Crossrail Safeguarding Directions were issued by the Secretary of State for Transport on 22 February 2005. New piers have been provided at the Royal Arsenal in Woolwich and on the Greenwich Peninsula. and Capacity improvements for passengers on rail lines through and at interchanges in the Borough. A route from Abbey Wood to Victoria via Woolwich. It has the potential to reduce overcrowding on rail services in the Borough and open up new routes across London.The DLR (Woolwich) extension will overcome the barrier effect of the River Thames. Reason 7. An orbital rail service is needed to overcome the problems associated with a predominantly radial system. (The Docklands Light Railway (Capacity Enhancement) Order 2005). iii.

Reason 7. Bus lanes also benefit cyclists and must allow for use by them. Where possible the Council will press for physical segregation to enforce priority. or by the developer actually constructing the transit roadway as part of the development scheme. Development and redevelopment gives opportunity for such improvements. Woolwich and Thamesmead to Abbey Wood. The system could be a tram or some form of bus and would incorporate the existing segregated bus route from Charlton to North Greenwich. and level access/boarding with step free/gap free platform stops. ii. water mains. funding and implementing the system by: • safeguarding of segregated roadways for transit. clean fuel systems. Support other measures that assist passengers in using buses. Reason 7. as well as for passengers to use buses in general.The accessibility of any system should be a major consideration in its design and preferred choice of technology. Developments may give opportunities in this respect. increases the efficient use of road space. The network will run west to east along the whole Waterfront from Greenwich serving North Greenwich Jubilee Line Station. quality vehicles and stops. land reservations for Transit routes.20 GWT is a public transport system characterised by high levels of route segregation and priority. just as is normally expected in respect of other site infrastructure such as sewers. which carry large numbers of people. ii. iii. This presents major opportunities in developing. Greenwich Waterfront Transit M10 The Council will promote Greenwich Waterfront Transit (GWT) and ensure that it is fully integrated with development proposals along the route by means of: i. interim public transport arrangements.Bus Priority M9 The Council will: i. Measures assisting buses in making the most effective use of road space could include bus lanes. • developer contributions to transit in cash (through S106 agreements). 7. and • integration of stops with high trip generators. bus termini and turning points and bus priority at signals. Implement the London Bus Priority Network and London Bus Initiative in its area and otherwise encourage the introduction of suitable bus priority measures in order to improve the reliability and efficiency of bus services. and appropriate design of transit stops and access to them. conventional highways etc. Special attention may be needed for buses at points of traffic congestion and at important junctions. The Council will put forward specific measures in its Interim Local Implementation Plan (ILIP) as appropriate and resources allow. The area through which transit will run is characterised by major areas of comprehensive redevelopment. The Mayor has agreed the scheme proceed as a bus based system to be built with upgrade capability to tram.19 Priority for buses. iv.21 MOVEMENT 135 . exemption from banned turns. planning agreements with developers in line with Policy SC2.

and will. Retention and Improvement of Public Transport Facilities 7.24 M11 Good interchange within public transport and between public transport and private transport will be sought as opportunities arise. particularly in respect of personal safety. bus). are particularly discriminated against by poorly designed and difficult facilities.23 Elsewhere with on-street running. and this benefit needs to be extended further southwards in the Borough.25 Integration of public transport as far as possible into an integrated. and westwards to Deptford/Conways Wharf. Physical difficulties deter use.26 M12 The Council will work with relevant agencies on a programme of safer and improved stations.The scheme. Consultation on the principle and general alignment of Greenwich Waterfront Transit (GWT) was carried out in Summer 2001. Developments which improve such facilities will be sympathetically considered by the Council. The Council can only advocate solutions to the latter problems. Further detailed consultation on the alignment of additional phases of GWT may lead to safeguarding through Supplementary Guidance and subsequent reviews of the development plan. such as across the River via Blackwall/Thames Gateway Bridge. but within a reasonable timescale for all parties concerned. In particular. such as bus garages. and integration with other transport networks (pedestrian. reliability and punctuality. improvements to bus infrastructure and vehicles will promote greater usage. Whilst actual implementation of GWT is the highest priority. Transport Interchanges 7. access for people with disabilities.The preferred route for part of Phase 1 (Abbey Wood to Woolwich) has been agreed in principle. is included in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001). attempt to ease problems of physical interchange. Consideration should also be given for the provision of cycle access and parking. Reason 7. transit will be given high levels of priority to ensure fast trip speeds.22 7. which is one of four new Intermediate Mode schemes proposed in London. Essential bus infrastructure. cycle. and improved buses/bus infrastructure. is crucial in retaining and 136 MOVEMENT . Also. and this will be operational by 2010. Many rail stations need physical improvement. GWT is sought to be in place within the next 5-10 years and developer contributions are time limited. comprehensive and seamless system promotes passenger convenience and usage. This will assist securing the contribution.7. such as bus garages. In considering proposals for development the Council will seek to retain and improve bus and rail facilities. this should not preclude initial research into the scope for yet further extension. Woolwich and Eltham Town Centres will also be pursued with relevant agencies. Development opportunities for this will be exploited where they arise. as do poorly integrated timetabling and different fares and tickets. A comprehensive programme of interchange improvements at Greenwich. southwards to Eltham and Kidbrooke. comprehensible.27 Improved facilities encourage use of public transport. The new Jubilee Line station on the Greenwich Peninsula gives a major opportunity for new and expanded bus services to interchange with the Underground. Reason 7. new transport schemes referred to above (See Policies M8 and M10) will be expected to exploit full interchange with existing services. People with disabilities and those coping with shopping and children. but in its development and development control functions it can.

This will enable: i. as male harassment can and does. unless material considerations arise which would justify or enable development in exceptional circumstances. occur. The whole Borough is considered sensitive to over flying by all types of aircraft due to its predominantly residential nature. Reason 7. Heliports and Airports M14 Generally. Any proposals for the extension/intensification of use of London City Airport will be assessed as set out above.As such. existing or planned. Reason 7. Proposals in surrounding areas that are likely to cause over flying. noise. Heliports and like facilities will not be permitted in the Borough.. vi further service development and extension to be pursued.improving bus services. or approaching. Accessibility M13 An “Accessibility Map” will be drawn up for the Borough to assess the coverage of the area by public transport modes. Parental facilities should also be available for men. They have particular need in public places. An ‘Accessibility Map’ is an important tool for integrated land use and transport planning – the Public Transport Accessibility Level (PTAL) map developed by TFL is available for this purpose as general guide.30 In a built-up area like the Borough such forms of transport are intrusive. iii. such as rooms for feeding. Consideration of further service development along routes that are at. to areas where coverage is poor. Any planning applications for such a proposal would be required to address and make clear environmental impacts when submitted. reductions in existing levels of over flying will be sought and proposals generating an increase in noise and/or frequency will normally be opposed. planning decisions to ensure major and higher density developments are focussed where accessibility is high. particularly for buses. MOVEMENT 137 . ii. reduced parking standards where access by alternatives to the car are plentiful and where the economy of the area will not be adversely affected.Transport or other benefits are generally considered insufficient to outweigh environmental cost and the diversion of resources from more generally available transport facilities. Women are more dependent on buses than men and form the majority of bus passengers. Schemes for redevelopment will be examined to see if relevant new provision could be made.28 The Council will seek particular provision for women. Flights into Heathrow are becoming an increasing issue for the Borough. often associated with child care. and for women only to wait.29 It is necessary to know the existing pattern of public transport in the Borough in order to identify areas where it is deficient. 7. although the score for each site will need to be assessed on an individual basis. environmental and/or safety problems will normally be objected to. to promote public transport and to guide decisions about the scale and location of development. etc. capacity.

especially if they could be used for more radial. Should this crossing proceed the Council will require a tunnel.g. 7. for which lands will be safeguarded as shown on the Proposals Map: i.. • a bridge between Barking and Thamesmead.16). Schemes on the Transport for London Road Network (TLRN) will need agreement with TFL. (See Policy O23). (No Safeguarding required as it is within the existing highway . iv. (See Proposals Map / Site Schedule m2). Third Blackwall Crossing between North Greenwich and Silvertown. which would have dedicated lanes for public transport. (iv). and these are included in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001). car-based commuting. (ii). All schemes supported by the Council are expected to pay due regard to environmental and aesthetic considerations in their execution and to their potential for creating or improving wildlife habitat. and to give bus priority (where relevant). Schemes (i).g. Shooters Hill Road/Well Hall Road Junction Filter Lane Provision (See Proposals Map / Site Schedule m7). • Easing congestion and permitting traffic management to relieve surrounding areas. not a bridge. and/or adjustment to the road network to give environmental benefit elsewhere through extensive traffic management. Three possible river crossing schemes have been proposed.The indicative priority order is: • a DLR extension to Woolwich (see paragraph 7.18). These have been developed as a package that will significantly increase access by rail and will provide an improved level of access to the London Thames Gateway area for road based modes. possibly intermediate schemes. and • Environmental benefits e. Reason 7. especially those related to the economic development of the Borough e. Schemes (i). Schemes under this policy are limited in nature and geared to either specific development/economic aims. transit vehicles etc. (iii).Roads Safeguarded Schemes M15 The Council supports the following road schemes. Schemes (ii)(iii).g.specific system to be determined). The Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001) states that “It is important for the road crossings to maximise regeneration benefits while minimising encouragement of additional car use. (iv). Proposals for the existing Beresford Street/Plumstead Road in Woolwich which creates major problems of environmental intrusion and severance are considered in the Town Centres chapter (paragraph 8. The continued regeneration of the Docklands area and the Thames Gateway will require the provision of new river crossings.33 138 MOVEMENT . and • third Blackwall Crossing between North Greenwich and Silvertown. ii. (iii). (See Proposals Map / Site Schedule m3).31 Some Road improvement is necessary to provide for: • Strategic movements. (ii).32 The Council does not support road schemes that lead to a generalised increase in road capacity. Deptford Church Street junction realignment.This will be a key issue 7. trams. Schemes should also be designed to improve safety and convenience for pedestrians and cyclists.see Proposals Map / Site Schedule m6) Thames Gateway Bridge with a dedicated public transport corridor (for use only by public transport vehicles such as buses. e. iii.

strategic centres. as set out below: Strategic roads will be roads whose function is: i. in association with restraint policies. environmental considerations will still dictate their size. Roads are only to be constructed or improved when they serve primarily other purposes. Link strategic roads. they can provide an adequate level of service and in turn relieve local distribution and access roads of through traffic. London distributor roads are those which: MOVEMENT 139 . The Council will apply the following criteria to highway planning: i. This can be done by ii. iii. Local distribution and access roads are those which: Are used by traffic passing through a particular area. A complementary approach is to make the best use possible of existing roads. Reason 7. To reduce traffic demands on London distributor roads so that.35 New road construction can help meet movement needs.Traffic here must not overwhelm the character of an area. and function as main bus routes. To link London to the National Road System serving the rest of the country.34 Road building alone does not relieve congestion. but at a financial and land use cost. the crossings.in the decision on. and in particular for those by coaches and goods vehicles. However. and design of. to link the Thames Gateway Bridge directly to the A2 road or to threaten Oxleas Wood. and buildings in the immediate vicinity. it just provides for otherwise restrained demand. General Criteria for Road Schemes M16 In general the Council wishes to keep new road building in the Borough to an absolute minimum. and/or as part of a programme of traffic management. cyclists and buses in the allocation of (scarce) road space. and is therefore not sustainable. To provide for longer journeys. as well as providing access to land. Roads will not be sought where they provide merely an increase in capacity for general traffic. or in association with major public transport improvements/priority. Reason 7. or any future proposal. iii. As a general rule the effectiveness of the use of roads should be measured in terms of the number of people moved rather than vehicles.The presumption should be in favour of the better management of the (finite) road space available. As such there should be a general presumption in favour of pedestrians. Road Hierarchy M17 The Council will designate roads in the Borough as a hierarchy of strategic. But strategic roads should not be such as to encourage the transfer of trips from public transport to car. ii. viz. and local distribution and access roads. the design of junctions and the amount of traffic they should carry.” The Borough is totally opposed to any possible resurrection of. London distributor. development/regeneration.

This will help assist and achieve conservation and environmental goals. Areas for traffic management will be prioritised and progressed in the context of the Borough’s annual Borough Spending Plan (BSP) submission to TFL. to contribute towards traffic management schemes to mitigate any traffic impacts that may otherwise arise. public demand and by reference to an area’s character.defining roads in the Borough and structuring the use of them accordingly. the needs of residents. Further. Reason 7. potential problems will be anticipated and the need for later remedial measures obviated. In managing the hierarchy. Environmental Areas M18 The Council defines Environmental Areas as those bounded by strategic/TLRN roads. visitors and others will take precedence over any traffic demands.37 M19 140 MOVEMENT . under a planning obligation. An Air Quality Management Area for the whole Borough has been declared to improve the local environment.38 It is desirable. The relationship of a development and associated scale of traffic generation/attraction to the roads hierarchy will be a material consideration in determining a planning application. Special regard will be paid to the needs of pedestrians and cyclists when devising traffic management proposals. TFL is the Highways Authority for roads designated as part of the Transport for London Roads Network (TLRN). In such areas traffic management schemes will be devised as necessary to secure the removal of through/extraneous traffic. New roads in new housing developments to be adopted will be required to have appropriate traffic calming measures incorporated in them before any dwelling is occupied. due regard would need to be paid to the more vulnerable users pedestrians (especially children). and/or to promote road safety. Developments in such areas may be required. Opportunities can also be taken to conserve or improve the physical fabric of such areas.This will be done principally by an assessment of the severity of the traffic problem in an area. Reason 7. See also Policy H7. London distributor roads and local distribution roads. shopping and places of town or landscape value ranking more highly than others in importance. with residential.Thus the priority of areas for treatment will have to be determined. However. shoppers.36 By definition. resource availability and road capacities can be a major constraint. the provision of “Home Zones” will be encouraged to change the emphasis of residential roads to environmentally safer roads. and is a statutory consultee on proposals that might affect the network. in environmental areas. cyclists and people with disabilities. 7.This reflects the needs of road safety and the provision of high environmental standards in residential areas. The roads hierarchy will also guide traffic management and route signing strategies helping ensure appropriate traffic uses the most appropriate route. in pursuing schemes of traffic management. If introduced at the outset of a development. to improve/conserve the environment. sensible and the right time to require developers to incorporate traffic calming measures into the design and construction of highways in housing developments that are to be adopted.

Eltham and Woolwich Town Centres. under a planning obligation. and Greenwich Peninsula / North Greenwich Station. The traffic volume is high and comprises a large proportion of heavy vehicles. In addition. • Deptford. Developments in such areas may be required.40 In order to protect the local environment and the local road system from heavy traffic. Such development will not normally be permitted in locations other than those immediately or highly adjacent to at least a London distributor or a higher order road. Eltham and Greenwich Town Centres. to contribute towards traffic management schemes to mitigate any traffic impacts that may otherwise arise. Reason 7.Specific Improvements M20 Other specific places where traffic management and environmental improvements will be pursued are as follows: • Greenwich.39 These are important residential. Relationship of Development to the Road Hierarchy and Town Centres M21 Development proposals generating or attracting significant amounts of traffic must pay full regard to the Road Hierarchy and environmental areas. shopping and work locations which are suffering badly from the effects of traffic.Town centre uses will be subject to the sequential approach set out in Policy TC16. MOVEMENT 141 . and • As part of a comprehensive programme of works to secure safe routes to schools. There will also be a general presumption that major developments should seek to locate in the first instance at the major transport hubs in the Borough . Reason 7.Woolwich. to relocate existing development causing traffic generation or attraction problems. promote good travel habits in children and give benefits to areas generally where they are sited. Greenwich is a Conservation Area and World Heritage Site containing buildings and attractions of international importance. A safe routes to school programme will encourage less car use. and East Greenwich. For development with significant traffic generation/attraction potential it would assist the determination of any planning application if the developer were also to submit a statement showing what considerations have been given to minimising road traffic impacts. Plumstead and Deptford have considerable areas of deprivation. development proposals likely to generate or attract significant amounts of traffic will not normally be permitted in such areas. Extensions to existing developments that exacerbate these problems will not be granted planning permission. • East Greenwich. Relocation of High Traffic Generators M22 The Council will undertake as need and resources dictate.The Council believes that in the context of environmental sustainability all agencies have a role in the common stewardship of the environment and should be able to demonstrate that their proposed actions have no significant detriment. and to the relationship of the development and access to/from it to public transport. • Plumstead.

These apply to employment generating development and are maxima. The standards are maxima.000 100-600 For the purpose of this policy “employment generating development” will apply to Use Classes A2. i. ii. for small shops parking provision off site is not required. and “Outer” elsewhere in the Borough viz: Area Inner London (Greenwich Town Centre and areas with a high PTAL rating) Outer London (Rest of the Borough) One off street space per m2 gross floor space: 600-1. land uses and development. 142 MOVEMENT . The first principle to be applied is that generally these should be located in town centres (large and small shops) or established parades (small shops). iv. m. and the parking strategy determined for a town centre. For conversions one space (maximum) off street for every additional unit should be provided except: i. Otherwise standards for retail uses as set out in the Mayor’s London Plan will apply as set out in Table M2. B8. For large shops (in excess of 500 sq. Car Parking Standards M23 The standards for car parking for new developments in The London Plan should be applied. iii. public transport accessibility.Reason 7. B1. B2. Generally there should be no specific provision for visitor parking. Because of the transitional character of the Borough the “Inner London” standards should apply to Greenwich Town Centre and other areas with a high PTAL rating. For non-food retail warehouses the onus should first be on the developer to justify the scale of provision proposed. This applies not only to new. Such gardens are an important street amenity and their complete loss to parking will not be considered. Generally. Otherwise standards set out above in (iii) will apply. where this would necessitate the complete loss of front gardens. and where there is adequate on street parking space. Exceptions will be judged on their merits. but also existing. M25 For residential developments the maximum provision for parking should be one space per unit. ii. gross floor space) the onus should first be on the developer to justify the scale of provision proposed by reference to parking already available in the whole town centre.41 Control and management of land use can help to prevent traffic and environmental problems arising. M24 For Shops (Use Class A1) the following principles and standards will apply.

They give opportunity as an effective tool of traffic restraint and reduction assisting the Council to meet its obligations under the Road Traffic Reduction Act. iii.e. an inevitable tension with regeneration/redevelopment objectives which needs to be resolved. i. public spaces etc. spaces that are under-utilised can be released and re-used for other purposes e. with each to be considered on its merits. other development.g. landscaping.g. Bed & Breakfasts. reduce the land-take of development.42 The London Plan recommends maximum levels of parking for broad classes of development. Parking controls can have a major impact on how people choose to travel. iii. ii. 7.M26 Parking standards for other developments will be as follows:These are maxima. enable schemes to fit into central urban sites. Reasons for M23 to M27 7. Hotels.. iv. Other large institutional developments e.43 7. developers would be expected to contribute to public transport. Restaurants. The standards described attempt to strike a reasonable balance between the needs of a development and a reasonable desire to have car access and considerations of sustainability. even less parking provision than might otherwise be considered acceptable or appropriate. Theatres. however. public transport and other alternatives. v. the developer to provide a justification for parking levels proposed.. ii. In residential areas where on street parking is already under pressure. Leisure Facilities etc. to be determined on its merits. M27 In all cases decisions on parking provision should also incorporate a consideration of the following principles: i. In lieu. equity and the management of the overall stock of car parking provision. Sheltered/nursing homes: One space for every 3 separate dwelling units. provision for people with disabilities (‘Reducing Mobility Handicaps’ by the Institute of Highways and Transportation is a relevant guide). and in areas of high public transport accessibility standards should be even lower i. monitoring and reviews of usage over time so that as public transport improves and car usage declines. In some such circumstances (almost) zero provision of car parking would be appropriate. particularly in the case of large shopping and mixed use developments. cycle and pedestrian provision through S106 agreements. the environment. Maximum standards should be used as part of a package of measures to promote sustainable transport choices. lower than 1:1 provision of off-street parking may be inappropriate.44 MOVEMENT 143 . hospitals:A comprehensive parking strategy will be required of the developer. that spaces provided in a scheme are generally available and not use specific. promote linked-trips and access to development for those without use of a car and to tackle congestion. There is. Public Houses. agreement with the developer that pricing and management structures should be subject to Council approval.

In these instances alternative provision or alternative contributions would be sought. Reason 7. Service Areas M29 New industrial. Reason 7. housing. etc. as far as possible within the curtilage of the development. In particular where it is not possible or desirable to include parking spaces in a development the Council may consider an acceptable alternative to be a contribution from the developer towards the following. iii. sight lines. provision for cyclists. vii improvement to Public Transport. ii.Community Benefits M28 Generally. in priority order: i. iv. minimising intrusion into the street scene and potentially hazardous manoeuvres on the public highway. Provision for emergency service access must also be made. traffic management. especially where emergency vehicle access is concerned. is necessary to service developments properly. and viii public off street parking. road safety schemes controlled parking zone(s). loading/unloading. while.45 New developments where relevant should contribute to transport infrastructure as a community benefit in order that they are served in a sustainable way. For some developments no substantive general parking may be desirable. in line with Policy SC2. road network improvements.. Planning permission may be refused if standards are inadequate. v. at the same time. and so that vehicles can leave the site forwards. for the following community benefits. shopping and commercial developments will be expected to provide adequate service areas. vi. 144 MOVEMENT . provision for pedestrians. the Council will seek developer contributions and apply conditions on planning permissions.46 Adequate space for turning.

iii. areas of need. Developments will need to take into account parking policies in the Borough. Reason for M30 and M31 7. in particular compatibility with town centre parking strategies will be required.48 7. Matters to consider would include the: i. It is necessary to regard all Parking Policies as being complementary. M31 For each town centre a comprehensive car parking strategy will be prepared. and certain important routes would particularly benefit by such a package of control and provision. Eltham. where congestion would arise. ii. In housing estates where on-street parking is a problem. An exceptional circumstance. Town Centres. In connection with traffic management schemes. by a number of types of transport. iii. Necessary parking to facilitate interchange with public transport is also necessary in the main centres of the Borough. such development does not require planning permission and the Council will therefore seek to bring the conversion of private residential garden space to off-street car parking fully within planning control. environmentally important areas. and where scope exists through the use of parts of estate greens to provide off-street parking commensurate with safeguarding local environmental standards. accordingly. where such off-street parking could be contemplated. some provision for off-street public car parks is necessary. iv.Together they are designed to ensure sufficient access to important activities (work. environmental standards and the beneficial functioning of land and business. volume of spaces and pricing. Main commercial/shopping/service centres. shopping.). Where environmental benefits would be gained.49 MOVEMENT 145 . v. care will be exercised in not providing too lavish a level of public parking in certain areas where it would encourage inappropriate levels of car use to the detriment of the environment. retrograde. iv. and economic vitality of the town centre. 7. would be where on-street parking would aggravate the safety and free flow of traffic and pedestrians in the area. However.47 As a corollary to on-street parking restrictions.Off-Street Public Parking M30 Having regard to the principle of sustainability in modes of transport. commensurate with safeguarding the needs of local residents. etc. the Council will seek to establish appropriate off-street public parking in the following areas: i. However. Greenwich). especially around rail stations and in areas of need. Parking can be controlled by a combination of time and/or price to ensure its most effective and appropriate use. Transport interchanges (Woolwich. and where public transport is an alternative. Private residential gardens play an important amenity and ecological role in urban areas and make a positive contribution to the street scene. ii.Their loss to bland tarmac or paved areas is. v. adequate Kiss and Ride and taxi facilities will also be sought at rail and bus stations. extension of CPZ areas. needs of shoppers/visitors. prevention of long stay commuter parking.

unsuitable facilities for cycle parking also need to be reviewed. unobtrusive. or experiencing poverty). The Borough will press relevant agencies to maintain/provide free cycle carriage on rail/riverbus. Cycling can give those otherwise less mobile in the Borough. (women. Cycle parking standards are shown in Table M1. 146 MOVEMENT .50 Cycling is beneficial to the individual. particularly schemes with flats. safe and in well-lit areas. the unwaged and those residents living in. As a standard condition. such as improved junction design will also be implemented where possible and required. that use must be made safe. road and traffic management schemes by: i.Thames Cycle Route and evolving local network (see Map 11). The use of footpaths in general. Specific provision for the cyclist will encourage greater use of the bike. safe cycle routes to schools will also be implemented. However. will be expected to provide secure cycle storage/parking spaces. New residential developments. drying out or changing clothes on arrival in bad weather. non-polluting and efficient relative to resources consumed. iv. Other physical provision. Providing cycle parking facilities. (See Table M1). Provision for secure cycle parking and other cyclists needs will be a condition on planning permissions for major new developments. Providing cycle routes in accordance with the London Cycle Network (LCN). The needs of cyclists will be particularly pursued in all new development. as appropriate. iii. major new developments will be expected to provide secure cycle parking and facilities for showers. Existing. particularly in conjunction with major traffic attractors/generators and new developments. and cycle use of bus lanes will be promoted. access to cheap. the riverside walk and the Green Chain will be examined in this context. as will their provision in association with new development and road schemes. ii. the provision of cycle routes will not be conditioned on this. It will be promoted through a variety of mechanisms including the London Cycling Action Plan. Reason 7. as segregation is often not achievable. the young. Freeing cyclists from the restrictions of existing and proposed traffic management schemes. While segregated cycle routes are often the safest. quiet. In particular.Cycling M32 Cycling will be promoted in the Borough. and developer contributions to cycle provision/networks will also be sought as appropriate in line with Policy SC2. Where possible these will be physically segregated from other road users.These should be sufficient in number. personal doorto-door and efficient transport.

Map 11: Cycle Network © Crown copyright Proposed London Strategic Network Existing London Strategic Network Proposed Thames Cycle Route and links Existing Thames Cycle Routes and links MOVEMENT 147 .

New developments and the redevelopment of existing public areas should seek to deal with such problems and will be assessed accordingly. Use its powers of development control in the pedestrian’s interests and in its role as Highway Authority have regard to the needs of people with disabilities in the design of highway improvements and pedestrianisation schemes and the requirements of people with visual impairments in the design of pedestrian crossings. so provision is important. ii. Green Chain. In particular. When introducing road safety measures. Expand the development of a network of pedestrian only priority routes.Access in Public Areas M34 The Council will take into account the needs of people with disabilities in the exercise of its functions that affect the environment (including planning and development control). accessibility and convenience will be promoted by the Council. iv. In particular the Council will seek to: i. Pedestrianisation will be sought where possible. look first of all at mechanisms to modify or calm driver behaviour rather than restricting ease of pedestrian movement. Plumstead and Eltham. Pedestrianisation and better pedestrian facilities can provide major townscape and environmental benefits. vii. Introduce pedestrian (priority) areas. should make provision for reserved parking and setting down/picking up points for vehicles for people with disabilities and less mobile people and suitable waiting areas should be provided. as appropriate but especially in Town Centres.Pedestrians M33 High standards of pedestrian safety. such as children and those without direct access to cars. iii. v. People with Disabilities . Generally improve the pedestrian environment. Greenwich. In determining planning applications and securing S106 agreements in line with Policy SC2. Many pedestrian facilities are capable of shared use with and for the benefit of cyclists. Reason 7. So will provision of a segregated network of paths linking major centres and open spaces by the incorporation of existing paths and the use of opportunities afforded by the riverside. Centres where it will be particularly sought are at Woolwich. and accounts for about a quarter of all London’s journeys. viii. open spaces. Safety and convenience are major objectives. Careful design of the pedestrian environment to enable access for people with disabilities is also particularly important. ensuring they are well lit. new development to which the public will have access. ensure the needs of pedestrians and people with disabilities are fully provided for. It will be promoted through a variety of mechanisms including the Walking Plan for London.Walking is particularly important for certain people.52 148 MOVEMENT . Walking is also an important means of getting to and from public transport services and is involved in most other journeys. road closure and redevelopment schemes. Schemes should allow for this as appropriate. signed. Every trip has a pedestrian element in it. Support improvement of the river foot tunnels at Greenwich and Woolwich.51 Walking is an important means of travel in its own right. 7. Ensure safe and convenient facilities for crossing roads and at transport interchanges. vi. A safe pedestrian environment is particularly important for women and older people who would otherwise hesitate to go out for fear of harassment and attack. safe and well maintained.

ii. Gadabout. Development proposals need to allow for reserved parking and setting down points near the centre of towns. etc. and that Strategic and London Distributor roads are the main freight network. MOVEMENT 149 .56 Freight Restriction on Road Freight M35 Road freight movements should be confined to suitable routes. residential roads being used only in the last resort for direct access. 7.) are particularly intrusive and environmentally damaging. By 2000 almost 70% of pedestrian crossings in the Borough were accessible to people with disabilities. pinch points. v. which are designed to meet the transport needs of community groups and people with disabilities. difficult roads in conjunction with land use areas of high sensitivity (Conservation Areas.The Council recognises that for reasons of safety and cost effectiveness. Many people with disabilities need specialist. Mobility Schemes The Council will support. Often this need can only be met by organisations with specific expertise and operating outside the framework of more conventional forms of transport. (See Policies D1 and M27). road improvement. Opportunities to provide reserved parking spaces for Dial-a-Ride and community transport vehicles adjacent to seated waiting areas for older people with disabilities in developments will be examined where relevant. iv.TFL is a key partner in developing freight strategies. adequate provision must be made for the parking of vehicles to set down and pick up passengers close to Town Centres. the provision of grants to purchase and operate mini buses for community and voluntary sector groups is best achieved in partnership with local community transport operators. the provision of community transport initiatives such as Dial-a-Ride.54 7. the provision of noise insulation for properties adversely affected will be sought. these will be changed to permit access and use by people with disabilities. and conditions on relevant planning permissions that require the applicant to have a freight movement policy that is approved by the Council. Reason 7. streets. the programme of dropped kerbs initiated by the Council will be sustained. In general.57 Lorries using narrow. open spaces.55 7. as resources permit. designation and signing of lorry routes. as far as possible. For example. only Strategic Routes are really capable of accepting major lorry flows. etc. and encouraging developments that minimise freight movement by road. Taxi-Card and the community transport scheme. Where lorry traffic is considered acceptable.This will involve consideration with other road authorities of: i. While conventional public transport remains inaccessible to many people with disabilities. leisure facilities. iii. It is recognised that the transport needs of community groups and people with disabilities are inadequately served by other forms of transport. local area lorry bans. door-to-door transport to get about at all.53 The Council constructs and manages public buildings. residential streets. As resources allow and where necessary.Reason 7.

or the provision of more satisfactory means of access. Policy W5 provides specific policy guidance on wharves which are formally safeguarded for river-based freight traffic. Transference to rail can help ease traffic congestion on roads.60 Many problems of freight traffic can be avoided by appropriately locating relevant land uses to begin with. Land west of White Hart Road is also designated as a rail freight site. should be considered as available. rail sidings and wharves without detriment to the environment.59 The advantages of water borne freight are similar to those of rail. with a view to their relocation.Rail Freight M36 In association with the Strategic Rail Authority. The use to be made of existing or proposed wharves will be an important consideration in determining relevant planning applications. 150 MOVEMENT . movement of freight by rail is more environmentally acceptable and resource efficient. This is within the Borough’s designated Aggregates Zone and is used for the transshipment of aggregates.58 Generally. Water Borne Freight M37 The Council will support proposals which increase the proportion of freight in the Borough that is water borne. Network Rail and the rail freight operators the Council will do all in its power to encourage the greater use of the rail system to carry freight. subject to appropriate environmental and amenity safeguards. Proposals using these may be given more sympathetic consideration than those which do not.These will be designated in due course through supplementary planning guidance. Reason for M38 and M39 7. buildings. (See Policy W5). etc. Areas of High Freight Accessibility are most likely to be those where close access is possible to the strategic road network. The use to be made of the rail system for freight will be an important consideration in determining relevant planning applications Reason 7. Much industrial land has water access and existing wharf facilities. sidings. Relevant proposals may be refused planning permission if they are poorly related to such areas. Areas of High Freight Accessibility M38 Developments generating or attracting large amounts of freight traffic will normally be expected to locate within areas of high freight accessibility. Some development sites could be integrated into the rail network and grant aid for new track. Reason 7. if necessary. Adverse Effect of Freight on the Environment M39 Existing land uses generating or attracting large amounts of freight traffic to the detriment of the environment of sensitive areas will be examined. The main rail freight facility in the Borough is at Angerstein Wharf.

At key tourist locations appropriate drop off and layover provision will be sought for visitors coaches.61 Coach traffic passing through the Borough and stopping/parking on the street is a problem. Developments may give opportunities to achieve this as a partnership with the Council. Generally. coach manoeuvring and parking on site. and other locations that attract significant numbers of tourist coaches. and may be a reason for refusal of planning permission. to accommodate the needs of visitor/tourist coaches commensurate with safeguarding the local environment. Reason 7. M41 M42 MOVEMENT 151 . Coach layover has been removed from the Cutty Sark environs as part of an environmental upgrade of the area. Eltham and Woolwich Town Centres. Coach Parking Strategies will be drawn up for Greenwich Town Centre/World Heritage Site. Suitable permanent.Coaches M40 Developments generating/attracting coach traffic (leisure and/or commuter) will need to make provision for dropping off and picking up. replacement off-street provision is required but has yet to be secured. provision for commuter coach parking will not be made in the Borough. The scale of coach traffic generated will need to be justified. particularly at visitor attractions such as Greenwich Town Centre.

Health Centres and Clinics Libraries Hospitals Rail Stations Bus Stations Cycle Parking Standard 1/125m2 with minimum of 2 space 1/250m2 with minimum of 2 spaces 1/500m2 with minimum of 2 spaces 1/500m2 with minimum of 2 spaces Out of town 1/350m2 Town centre/local shopping centre 1/125m2 Out of town 1/1500m2 with minimum of 4 spaces Town centre/local shopping centre 1/300m2 1/300m2 with minimum of 2 spaces 1 space per 10 staff 1 Space per 10 staff/students 1 space per 8 staff/students 1/100m2 with minimum of 2 spaces 1/50m2 with minimum of 2 spaces 1 space per 20 seats with minimum of 2 spaces 1 space per 50 seats with a minimum of 2 spaces 1 space per 10 staff plus 1 space per 20 peak period visitors 1 space per 2 students 1 space per unit 1 space per 5 staff plus 1 space per 5 staff for visitors 1 space per 10 staff plus 1 space per 10 staff for visitors 1 space per 5 staff plus 1 space per 10 staff for visitors See DOT 1996 TAL 3/96 Meet local demand Places of Work B1/A2 B1 B2 B8 Shopping A1 A1 A1 Educational D1 D1 D1 Entertainment A4 A5 A3 D2 D2 Housing Community C2 C3 D1 D1 C2 Transport Source: London Cycle Network Design Manual (1998) 152 MOVEMENT . Wine Bars Fast Food Takeaway Restaurants. Services Light Industrial General Industrial Warehouses Food Retail Non-Food Retail Garden Centre Primary Schools Secondary Schools Universities. Sports Centres. Cinemas Leisure. Swimming Pools Student Accommodation Flats Doctor and Dentist Surgeries. Cafes Theatres. colleges Pubs.TABLE M1: CYCLE PARKING STANDARDS Location Category Land Use Location Category Business Offices.

500 sqm net sales or 4.000 sqm GFA) Food superstore (over 2.000 sqm GFA) Non food warehouse Garden centre Town centre / shopping mall Source: London Plan (2004) 4 to 2 1 maximum 1 space per X square metres gross floor area 75 50-35 30 45-30 30-20 18 38-25 60-40 65-45 75-50 25-18 50-30 45-30 50-35 15 30 25 30 MOVEMENT 153 .TABLE M2: RETAIL CAR PARKING STANDARDS PTAL 6 inner / 5 outer London & 5 Retail land use Smaller food store (up to 500 sqm GFA) Food supermarket (up to 2.500 sqm net sales or 4.

154 MOVEMENT .

and to reduce congestion and pollution in town centres by promoting public transport. and are suitable locations for appropriately scaled town centre uses to serve their local catchment. usually including a small supermarket. ii. and the Borough’s largest and second shopping and office employment centres respectively. visitors and the business community. Provision of a minimum range of retailing and services will be safeguarded. leisure and other town centre uses. they are considered the most appropriate locations for a range of activities that attract and serve Borough residents. security. District and Local Centres. commercial viability and sustainability of the Borough’s Town Centres as retail. arts.TC2 and TC3: i. amenity. District and Local Centres) and Neighbourhood Parades. walking. A new Local Centre will be developed by Kidbrooke Station. STC2 To support the Borough’s Town Centre hierarchy of Major. They are appropriate locations for a variety of town centre uses scaled to serve the population of their sub-region without harming the vitality and viability of Woolwich or Eltham. Retail developments will be subject to need and sequential testing. access. 32 Neighbourhood Parades complement the formal retail heirarchy and typically have less than 20 shops offering basic convenience goods and services within walking distance. cycling. Woolwich and Eltham are designated Major Centres. employment. cultural and community facilities. iii. and the environment within the Borough’s town centres for residents. TOWN CENTRES 155 . leisure. including retailing. TOWN CENTRES GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 8. and its network of Neighbourhood Parades. workers and visitors.1. Six District Centres offer a significant range of both comparison shopping and a supermarket or range of food shops. and linked trips. The general policies for Town Centres and retailing are: STC1 To safeguard and improve the vitality. The Plan promotes the regeneration and revitalisation of the Borough’s network of Town (Major. and to preserve and enhance historic buildings. comfort. Proposals that serve this wider market must respect both its heritage and its service role to local residents. commercial and public services. STC3 To safeguard and enhance safety. service and residential centres for residents. as part of the Kidbrooke Development Area. and in addition a major visitor destination and an inscribed World Heritage Site. iv. Seven Local Centres offer a moderate range of shopping and service activities. By virtue of their accessibility and existing diversity of use. residential. STC4 To promote a high standard of design in town centre buildings and public and civic spaces. as set out below and in Tables TC1. STC5 To improve town centre accessibility by a choice of means of transport.8. Greenwich is the Borough’s largest District Centre. and other important heritage features.They are preferred locations for larger scale development in retail. leisure and entertainment.

830 116.000 10. 7.000 5.370 22. 9.450 35.000 3.400 50.750 8.500 6. Site rear / west of Lidl.000 sqm (gross) A1 and A2 and up to 19. Retail warehouses and supermarkets. Permission at Woolwich Royal Arsenal: 12-14. plus East Greenwich 2. Permission (outline) for non-food retail off Brocklebank Road/Bugsby’s Way. mostly on Woolwich Road or Bugsby’s Way.050 2.600 5.180 4. Major/district centres as defined in the London Plan.450 9.000 79.830 27.300 4.850 14.500 21.550 365.000 m2 floorspace) Woolwich 2 Eltham District Centres 1 (10-30.250 37.000 6. Excludes stand-alone local shops.400 78.570 300 1.300 11.550 Sources: GOAD. See tables TC2. 8. Outline planning permission granted to Meridian Delta Limited for up to 31.TABLE TC1:TOWN CENTRE HIERARCHY AND TOTAL RETAIL (A1/2/3) FLOORSPACE Location Total floorspace (m2 gross) Durable / Convenience Service / comparison Other Vacant Planning Permission Major Centres 1 (50-100.530 0 0 0 0 0 41.000 4.300 12.000 177.880 61.850 220.950 15.000 2. Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 8. Permission granted in 2000 at Greenwich Reach East.250 32.600 11.260 64.2 Background Town centres provide an important social and economic focus for the districts and communities they serve.030 78. 5. 6.050 3.460 3.300 75. 3.450 n/a 2.930 3. Blackheath and Lee Green are mainly located in Lewisham.200 5. See table TC2 and Proposal Map 4.050 5.000 3.420 43.While retailing normally underpins these 156 TOWN CENTRES .100 53.400 12.TC3 and Proposal Map.200 66.000 m2 floorspace) 3 West Greenwich 4 East Greenwich Blackheath 5 Lee Green 5 Plumstead High Street Thamesmead Larger town centres Local Centres & Neighbourhood Parades 6 7 Local Centres.000 4.000 m2 could be A3.350 sqm A3 on Greenwich Peninsula including within the Millennium Dome.000 0 21. Reviving the Borough’s town centres is a key objective of the Greenwich Strategy (2003). 32 Parades 6 ALL CENTRES / PARADES Out-of-centre 7.950 12.620 11.750 1.10. 8 All superstores / retail warehouses Greenwich Peninsula 9 TOTAL 71.880 1. of which up to c.880 7.000 500 19.360 9.950 287.850 104. mostly A3 with ancillary/non destination A1 only.000 m2 .350 91.880 21.220 3. Borough records and estimates 2003/4 Notes to Table TC1 1.300 16.850 400 1. Collectively they offer a broad mix of facilities.050 8.350 53.920 25. services and jobs in locations accessible to the widest range of people by a choice of modes of transport.

The redevelopment of redundant sites and conversion of underused premises can allow diversification into more sustainable roles. It is therefore important that on the one hand planning policies for the Borough both promote retail investment and protect the retail activity that remains. In addition the Arsenal redevelopment. It offers a major opportunity to diversify and transform Woolwich by stimulating the re-use of town centre development sites and redundant buildings. creating a demand for extended opening hours for retail and leisure activities. Activities such as tourism. the Royal Observatory and the former Royal Naval College (a campus for Greenwich University and 8.other activities. they must also facilitate the emergence of complementary.7 8. internationally famous for its historic monuments. including the assembly and compulsory purchase of key development sites. community. After a difficult period of general decline and retail contraction in the early to late 1990’s.5 8. The Council is using its role as planning authority to ensure that the Arsenal integrates with and complements the existing town centre.The western end of the Arsenal and the adjacent Warren Lane development site are being promoted for mixed-use development including commercial leisure uses such as a multiplex cinema. including the National Maritime Museum. in conjunction with other social trends and a buoyant economy in the late 1990’s. the Greenwich Retail Study (2002 & 2005 Update) notes that Woolwich remains vulnerable to competition and needs to improve its retail offer and market share to consolidate its recovery. and recognised to be in need of regeneration. An increasing number of people are working hours that differ from the traditional working week. Woolwich is constrained to the north by the Thames. and a preferred location for employment. On the other. Some of the Borough’s town centres have experienced a decline in both convenience and durable goods shopping.6 8. other regeneration programmes and the planned extension of the Docklands Light Railway. and office employment.8 TOWN CENTRES 157 . tourism and leisure uses. Part of the town centre falls within the inscribed Greenwich Maritime World Heritage Site. alternative or ‘niche’ roles where this would benefit the overall vitality and viability of a centre. UK leisure spending doubled in real terms in the last quarter of the 20th Century.These include Bluewater and concentrations of retail warehousing such as Charlton. It is designated as a Major Centre in the London Plan. yet access to the Royal Arsenal. Woolwich is the Borough’s priority location for major retail and multiplex development.4 8. Through the Woolwich Regeneration Agency the Council is also taking a more proactive role. and increasing vacancy levels that threaten their retail role and viability. have led to a selective resurgence in town centre fortunes. The Arsenal is being redeveloped for a mix of uses including heritage tourism. Borough Town Centres Woolwich is the Borough’s main centre for shopping. 8. office conversions and planning permissions elsewhere in the town centre provide a development pipeline of at least 3. Greenwich is the most significant of the Borough’s District Centres as designated in the London Plan. rather than competing with existing retail functions in Woolwich. the Borough’s town centres face stiff competition from out-of-centre retail developments that provide extensive free car parking. In this regard the threat to the retail role of some of the Borough’s centres is also an opportunity.Woolwich is experiencing renewed investment and interest stimulated by regeneration of the historic Woolwich Royal Arsenal. employment or residential use can in turn boost a flagging retail sector by attracting new customers. However. leisure. civic and community services. Riverside walk and Riverside Park is hampered by the busy A206. in partnership with the London Development Agency. without unduly compromising local services accessible to less mobile residents. a figure likely to be significantly exceeded as other sites come forward over the Plan period.3 Curbs on further out-of-centre development following introduction of the Sequential Approach in PPS6 Planning for Town Centres.000 new dwellings within the town centre.

13 Policies CENTRE-SPECIFIC POLICIES TOWN CENTRE TC1 The Council will seek to ensure that the reuse and redevelopment of the Woolwich Royal Arsenal and Warren Lane site integrate and connect with. adopted by the Council as Supplementary Planning Guidance (April 2000. Others such as Blackheath Hill are in prolonged decline with little remaining retail function.The Greenwich Retail Study (2002 & 2005 update) noted it has a stronger retail role than Woolwich. It complements Woolwich by providing a community focus for residents in the south of the Borough.Trinity Music College). with specialist Asian shopping and an extensive range of restaurants respectively. Greenwich is a visitor destination of international status. Woolwich as the Borough’s most important centre. providing direct access to Canary Wharf and the City of London. In general the smaller centres contain a lower level of retail activity than larger centres.The Plan seeks to balance protection and enhancement of the historic environment. 8. and the interests of local residents and businesses. and conflicts between its roles as a major visitor destination and a local shopping centre. Local Centres and Neighbourhood Parades primarily offer convenience and ‘top up’ shopping and services to their localities. 8. and will benefit further from plans to increase the DLR’s passenger capacity. Architectural attractions are complemented by the historic Greenwich Market and a wide range of pubs and restaurants. This is helping to bring forward a range of development proposals. Some such as Plumstead High Street and Blackheath perform niche roles. The DLR has also created new opportunities for commercial. the needs of visitors. despite having a relatively large number of units. cultural and creative activities on nearby sites in underused parts of Deptford Creek. Additional retail and leisure refurbishment or redevelopment will be supported within the town centre. Eltham is a designated Major Centre in the London Plan.10 8. Eltham is also conveniently located for the Green Chain Walk and important visitor attractions including Eltham Palace.12 8. and complement and enhance. These are identified on the Proposals Inset Map.The majority of the area within the defined town centre boundary falls within either the West Greenwich or Greenwich Park Conservation Areas. They play an essential role in maintaining a sustainable pattern of retailing and service provision within walking distance of the communities they serve. of particular benefit to the less mobile and the large number of households in the Borough that do not have access to a car. and the Borough’s second largest retail centre. District Centres.11 8. 158 TOWN CENTRES . There is scope for tourism development to capitalise on these historic assets. Tudor Barn and Well Hall Pleasaunce. concluding that the centre is relatively healthy . In addition to the policies in this Plan. and discussed further in the West Greenwich Development Framework. competing centres. a role that will be enhanced during the seven year South Greenwich SRB5 regeneration programme.although its modest size leaves it vulnerable to competition from larger. on identified sites and elsewhere as opportunities arise. and have higher levels of service uses and vacancy. to be updated). Greenwich also suffers from heavy through traffic and other environmental problems.9 Greenwich received a major boost with the completion of two new stations on the Dockland Light Rail extension to Lewisham. is a significant employment centre and secondary office location. further guidance on design issues in the public realm it set out in the Greenwich Town Centre Streetscape Manual (1999).

It is therefore the Borough’s priority location for major retail investment. vitality and viability of Woolwich. It occupies a pivotal position between the Arsenal and Macbean Street.14 The 31-hectare Royal Arsenal site is a designated Mixed Use Area (see Policy W3). currently under review).The Council aims to ensure that those elements that have yet to be finalised also complement. by facilitating increases in the quality. The Council will seek to ensure that the former Greenwich University Calderwood Street site in Woolwich Town Centre (Site Schedule mu27) is developed for a mix of uses to include activitygenerating town centre uses. and wider integration with. Reason 8. the southwestern part of the Royal Arsenal. and despite environmental and shopfront improvements is in need of further modernisation. which are suitable for mixed use.15 Woolwich has the largest retail floor space of any centre in the Borough. There is expenditure capacity based on current trends to accommodate a significant increase in both convenience (supermarket) and High Street comparison-shopping.Reason 8. leisure led development (Site Schedule mu13). and in particular its retail role. The Council will support developments in tourism. and TC2 TC3 TC4 TOWN CENTRES 159 . under review). and most of it is also designated as a Conservation Area. and further guidance is provided in The Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 Draft. leisure. rather than compete with. and has potential to consolidate its existing role in value retailing .The Royal Arsenal redevelopment is progressing in accordance with the approved Master Plan (1998. The Greenwich Retail Study (2002 & 2005 update) identifies a need to claw back substantial trade leakage to surrounding centres. revised 2000). but has experienced persistent shop vacancy in its western fringes.a market niche that is growing in importance. It also has a number of underused. It is a unique part of Britain’s military and industrial heritage. quantity and variety of retail floor space in the centre. where heritage uses are concentrated. two of which are being converted to residential use.The Warren Lane (‘teardrop’) site is designated for mixed use. entertainment. Reason 8. Town Centres are acknowledged to be suitable locations for retail. culture. These issues are examined in more detail in the emerging revised Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework. containing 18 listed buildings. the centre’s existing functions. leisure. The Council seeks to revitalise Woolwich as the Borough’s primary shopping centre. It adjoins.These principles formed the basis of the Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (1998 & 2000 update. Follow-up work in 2007/8 will also look at opportunities in. residential. and is being jointly marketed with. adopted as Supplementary Planning Guidance. Reason 8.16 Woolwich will become a major visitor focus but currently lacks appropriate facilities to complement its retail and service functions. older office buildings. Collectively these schemes will substantially extend and diversify the town centre. A range of potential development sites are identified in the Site Schedules. Increasing the resident town centre population will in turn support and boost its shops and businesses. the surrounding area. and enhance its appeal as a destination for Borough residents and visitors.17 The Council is seeking replacement uses that will make a similarly broad contribution to the Woolwich economy within a comprehensive mixed-use development. a natural route into Powis Street. office. the evening economy and town centre living that contribute to the diversity. equivalent to a 40% increase above currently trading floorspace.

National Maritime Museum and extending outside the town centre to include the Royal Park. the waterfront and the Royal Arsenal.20 The Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site was inscribed in 1997 under the 1972 World Heritage Convention. and between the town centre. Views and vistas to and from the World Heritage Site will also be protected by ensuring that developments in the buffer zone of the Site or directly visible from it are visually sympathetic. via Woolwich. It includes the historic centre of the town with the architectural masterpieces and designed landscape of the Old Royal Naval College. It formed the sixteenth World Heritage Site in the UK. The Council will seek to secure provision of an integrated transport interchange incorporating Woolwich Arsenal station. and the Council is promoting inclusion of a Crossrail station at Woolwich. safeguarded under Policy M8. the navy.The strong historical association of the area with shipbuilding.18 To improve the accessibility of Woolwich by public and non-motorised transport. Greenwich Town Centre TC7 The Council will protect and enhance the site and setting of the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site. which also presents an opportunity for associated retail/commercial development (see Site Schedule mu14 and the Woolwich Interchange Planning Brief. especially for residents without access to a car. These schemes are promoted in the London Plan and the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001). TC5 The Council will seek to secure safer and more convenient pedestrian and cycle access to and within the town centre.education functions (PPS6 Planning for Town Centres). seafaring.The severance of the Royal Arsenal and Warren Lane sites from the town centre by Beresford Street/Plumstead Road is an impediment to their redevelopment to support town centre regeneration. The Council is pursuing a package of measures to reduce the severance caused by Beresford Street/Plumstead Road including traffic calming and visual improvements. to Greenwich. Reason 8. and will promote and support the provision of Greenwich Waterfront Transit to serve Woolwich town centre. as defined on the Proposals Map. M10 and M11). Woolwich Town Centre is a suitable location for such major trip generating uses due to its accessibility to staff and the public by a variety of forms of public transport. Reason 8.19 The Council has expressed its formal support for the proposed Docklands Light Railway Extension to Woolwich from City Airport and the Royal Docks. It comprises one of the finest and most dramatically sited architectural and landscape ensembles in the British Isles. The safeguarded trans-London Crossrail routes are supported in principle (see Site Schedule m5). Reason 8. 2002). to reduce the need to travel by car. Safeguarding also remains in place for a rail link by tunnel between Silvertown and Woolwich (See also Policies M8. The Council will safeguard the alignment of Crossrail and the extension of the Docklands Light Railway to Woolwich. and to improve safety and environmental quality in the town centre. A site has been identified for a new transport interchange with the DLR near Woolwich Arsenal station. Development within it should preserve and enhance its essential and unique character and appearance. and to capitalise on the opportunity for associated retail and commercial development. in recognition of its outstanding and internationally significant universal value. royalty and the TC6 160 TOWN CENTRES . Part of the site is Grade II Listed.The Council also formally supports the Greenwich Waterfront Transit route Abbey Wood.

22 TC8 TC9 8. and there is a need to improve the range of accommodation and evening hospitality and leisure uses. This visitor destination role is complemented by a growing presence in further and higher education. leisure. At present Greenwich has limited success in attracting overnight visitors. the business community. although its role in providing convenience shopping. tourism.The Council will seek to capitalise on its cultural strengths as a visitor destination and centre for tertiary education.measurement of time and distance.25 TOWN CENTRES 161 . Design Guidance for Shop-fronts in Greenwich Town Centre and Design Guidance for Shop Signs. maintain its diversity and provide a balanced range of opportunities and services for residents. combine with the brilliant architectural expressions of them within a historic landscape. culture. Employment. To a significant extent this role shapes its wider commercial functions in retailing. The Council will support and promote the multi functional role of Greenwich town centre. Both the Site and the buffer zone are also protected by Conservation Area designation. or their settings in the longer term. national and regional tourist and visitor destination by virtue of its world-class heritage features and specialist markets. and that development proposals affecting sites or their buffer zones require careful scrutiny for their likely effect on sites.24 Greenwich is a well-established international. respect existing form and character. For shop-fronts and signs within Greenwich Town Centre the Council has produced two design guidelines. a sector that offers scope to bring further economic and educational benefits to the Borough. hospitality and leisure uses.21 PPG15 Planning and Historic Environment states that the inclusion of a site on the World Heritage List highlights its outstanding international importance as a key material consideration to be taken into account by local planning authorities in determining planning applications and listed building consent applications. The Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site Management Plan (2005) provides a framework for the activities that take place in the Site. Advertisements and Illumination in Town Centre. landscaping. whilst ensuring that they do not conflict with the need to protect the heritage qualities that make Maritime Greenwich such a special and unique place. 8. to make Greenwich unique. and demonstrate the highest standards in design.The growing prominence of the University of Greenwich and Trinity College of Music (incorporating the Laban Centre for contemporary dance) are helping to improve the profile. and to ensure that new development complements its existing form and character. Reason 8. Supplementary Planning Guidance on streetscape design is provided in The Greenwich Town Centre Streetscape Manual (1999) and Greenwich Town Centre Colour Guidance Note (2002). Reason 8. retailing. education and residential developments will be supported where they preserve and enhance its heritage and environment. Guidance stresses that sites should be protected for the benefit of future generations. detailing and finishing. It sets out aims and objectives for the Site and a programme of long and short-term actions.23 To maintain and preserve the architectural integrity and identity of the town centre. and will seek to expand and diversify its business base. The Stockwell Street Planning Brief (2000) provides advice for the largest development site in the core of the town centre (Site Schedule mu3). To achieve this planning authorities are advised to formulate specific planning policies for protecting World Heritage Sites. services and leisure activities for the local community is also vitally important (see Policy TC10). Refurbishment or new development in Greenwich must be appropriately scaled. hospitality. The Council will preserve and promote the enhancement of historic Greenwich town centre. vitality and viability of 8. students and visitors.

8. and the Council will use its enforcement powers where appropriate. and take-aways (A5) will only be permitted within defined shopping frontages in accordance with Policy TC18. in particular around Deptford Creekside. particularly for office and studio workshop-based activities including creative industries. and ancillary to. proximity to Canary Wharf and the ‘marketability’ of Greenwich. Reason 8.000 students in Greenwich.Greenwich town centre. the Council wishes to manage the overall provision of food and drink uses to secure a greater choice of A3 seated restaurants that offer a good quality evening dining. However. The Council will seek improvements in the management and facilities of the town centre’s markets through the cooperation of landowners and stallholders. For clarity it should be noted that A3 use applies to the use of a unit for the primary purpose of the sale of food or beverages for consumption on the premises. or 23% as at 2001. poor management and their proliferation can cause environmental problems. bar and take away facilities is more than sufficient (approximately 35 units. workers and visitors. See the West Greenwich Development Framework (2000. Under the General Development Order (1987 as revised) such activity is only allowable in A1 shops where it is functionally linked with. Applications for change of permitted use from retail (A1 or A2) to restaurants (A3) bars (A4).29 Markets are a traditional part of the character of Greenwich town centre and a popular attraction for visitors. Significant commercial development sites elsewhere in the town centre should include a reasonable balance of uses. On the other hand there is a need to increase. to benefit residents and the tourism economy alike. specialist or independent colleges and halls of residence in the wider vicinity including Deptford. start up and small business premises will continue to be important where they are viable and well utilized. In accordance with flexibility offered under Policy TC18 exceptions may be made for restaurants that cater to this market.28 TC11 Market development will be strictly controlled in Greenwich town centre to protect the amenities of residents and the qualities of the Conservation Area. and are helping to attract new business investment in the town centre area. This necessitates striking an appropriate balance between Greenwich’s various roles and utilizing or moderating pressures for residential development. Additional factors include surplus industrial land. Greenwich also experiences problems with un-permitted encroachment of snack-oriented A3 activity within A1 shops.27 The range of shops in Greenwich barely meets the needs of local residents. the main retail activity taking place. Their operations. Reason 8. Whilst the number of restaurant. modernize and diversify the business space available. Protection of existing industrial uses. 8. to be updated in 2007/8). 162 TOWN CENTRES . A4 & A5) should form part of a balanced mix. staff and students provide opportunities for Greenwich companies including local retailing and leisure facilities.These two universities accommodate about 10. In new developments with prominent pedestrian frontages food and drink uses (A3.26 Greenwich also offers opportunities to expand its currently modest role as a business and office location. good transport accessibility.There are also a number of smaller. TC10 The Council will safeguard A1 shopping facilities and encourage their development in Greenwich Town Centre to meet the needs of residents. within core and fringe frontages alone).

the preferred alternative 8. See also Polices M20. by number of units).30 Greenwich town centre suffers badly from congestion. 8. M28 and M42. It also currently lacks adequate leisure and youth facilities in relation to the area it serves.Tudor Barn and Well Hall Pleasaunce. Reason 8. positively address its image. Vacancy rates are very low within the defined retail frontages (6% in 2001 compared to 11% in 1998).The Greenwich Retail Study (2002) confirms earlier research findings that Eltham is under provided in food retailing. and therefore that road use priorities in the town centre should prioritise pedestrians and those using more sustainable forms of transport. In accordance with flexibility offered under Policy TC18 exceptions may be made for restaurants that cater to this market. bus priority and pedestrian priority schemes to reduce the effects of through traffic on Greenwich town centre and surrounding areas whilst improving convenience and safety for pedestrian. 1998 and 2001. and forge stronger connections with its catchment area and communities. employees and visitors. Reason 8. although scope for expansion in the town centre is limited due to its close proximity to residential areas.34 8.TC12 The Council will seek to introduce traffic management. 1997.33 Eltham is the Borough’s second largest but strongest retail centre for comparison or durable goods. under review) and the Site Schedules (mu12. Eltham Town Centre TC13 The Council will support and promote Eltham as a vibrant community and cultural centre for south Greenwich. restaurant and leisure facilities in Eltham. Given improved public transport connections to the town centre and through the north of the Borough. it is considered that visitors and commuters traveling by private vehicle should be encouraged to use public transport. and planning permission has been granted for one on Site Schedule mu2. improving journey times by public transport. Additional parking provision will be restricted to an essential minimum.32 Eltham town centre would benefit from a more clearly defined social and cultural role to complement and enhance its commercial strengths. to benefit residents and the tourism economy alike. and reducing pollution. mu15).Waterfront Transit will be promoted and sought to serve the area. and to the health and safety of residents. still pose a threat to the structure of historic buildings. heavy traffic volumes. In the event that the identified Eltham sites prove unable to accommodate all the capacity identified. pollution and vibration due to its position astride a major traffic route. The Council wishes to manage the overall provision of A3.31 TC14 The Council will seek to safeguard and improve the range of shopping. traffic restraints. and will encourage the provision of facilities to take better commercial advantage of its tourism potential.35 TOWN CENTRES 163 . Eltham could take greater advantage of its proximity to the Green Chain Walk and important visitor attractions including Eltham Palace. Reason 8. The SRB5 South Greenwich programme will provide opportunities to improve Eltham’s profile. Development opportunities have been identified in the Eltham Town Centre Development Guidelines. Provision of a new leisure centre is an objective in the Greenwich Strategy. including coaches. A4 and A5 food and drink uses to secure a greater choice of A3 seated restaurants that offer good quality evening dining.Although the lorry ban has improved the situation. and A1 retail representation is stable at 60% (town centre surveys.

the environment. and extending trading opportunities into the evening and weekends. M26 and M27. ii.The nature and extent of these uses will vary between centres. and improve public and pedestrian safety and comfort in Eltham town centre. particularly those suffering from retail decline.36 Eltham suffers from heavy through traffic. offering affordable and sustainable access to a range of facilities and services for all sectors of the community. Reason 8. Parking provision is consistent with the relevant standards and principles in Policies M23. As resources permit. simplifying multipurpose trips. Town centres tend to be the focus of public transport networks. DEVELOPMENT IN TOWN CENTRES Key Town Centre Uses and the Sequential Approach TC16 Town centres are the preferred location for retailing. Retail or indoor leisure developments or extensions on edge-of-centre or out-of-centre sites will only be acceptable where: i. providing the type and scale of development is appropriate to the size and role of the centre in the Borough’s town centre hierarchy. the Council will investigate traffic calming. to reduce traffic congestion. TC15 The Council will support and promote measures for bus priority. but would typically include some of the activities 8. These activities will be permitted in town centres. and streetscape improvements in partnership with the local community and the Eltham Town Centre steering group. There are no sequentially preferable sites. tourism and cultural facilities. vi. CCTV installation. The proposal would not demonstrably harm the vitality and viability of an existing shopping centre. and would benefit from further environmental improvements in addition to the town centre square project for Passey Place (2000). v. Reconfiguration of existing out-of-centre retail and leisure floorspace will be considered against Criteria (iii) – (vi). parking controls. iv.37 The importance of supporting and enhancing town centres is emphasised in PPS6 Planning for Town Centres and the London Plan.location for additional supermarket floorspace in the south of the Borough is the new Local Centre as part of the Kidbrooke Development Area (See Policy H4). hospitality. Proposals are. individually or cumulatively with recent or committed developments. and will seek to improve its streetscape and environmental quality. by attracting additional customers. leisure and other key town centre uses that attract or serve the public including offices. Promoting and protecting diversity can contribute to the vitality and viability of town centres. There is a need for the development.38 164 TOWN CENTRES . iii. Planning conditions or legal agreements will be employed on new developments including reconfigurations to minimize impacts on town centres. M24. conveniently accessible by a choice of modes of transport including walking and cycling. bus priority schemes. The proposal would not unacceptably impact on residential amenity. or will be made. Reason 8. traffic patterns or road congestion. reducing dependence on the private car.

Charlton Business Park (see Policy J3) accommodates the borough’s main concentration of out-of-centre retailing and offers scope for linked trips. PPS6 Planning for Town Centres confirms that indoor leisure uses (Use Class D2) are also subject to need assessment and the sequential approach. and to define a maximum floorspace permitted. and is thus preferable to other free-standing out-of-centre locations.The Retail Study Update (August 2005) will also be material. taking a flexible approach to store formats in relation to the sites available (see PPS6).41 8.43 TOWN CENTRES 165 . unless the retail element is both ancillary and minor in terms of both floorspace and especially turnover. are thus vulnerable to out-of-centre retail development. although other locations have also been identified as suitable for some of these uses (see also Policy T1 for hotels.g.39 Town centres are generally underpinned by retailing.identified in the policy. A3. 8. In defining a location as ‘out-’ or ‘edge-of-centre’. falling within uses A2. The Greenwich Retail Study (Donaldsons 2002) examines retail provision. Planning conditions and/or legal agreements will be applied to out-of-centre retail planning permissions to limit the range of goods sold.This Study is also specifically intended to serve as a capacity model and baseline information source to be updated for any significant retail applications submitted during the Plan period. Hybrid uses which combine wholesale and retail activity will considered individually against the most relevant parts of both policies. Given the conclusions of the Greenwich Retail Study and Update it is not envisaged that further significant retail development will take place outside town centres in the Plan period. 8. to establish whether there is need for any additional retail floorspace in the period to 2011. For ‘top up’ convenience shopping an assessment of need based on a demonstration that there is a local gap in provision of adequate top up shopping in walking distance of the proposed site will be sufficient. on Site Schedule mu29. A4. Retail (and leisure) proposals at edge or out-of-centre locations must first demonstrate need. B1. Reconfiguration of existing retail warehousing may help redress this imbalance e. It concludes that there is capacity underpinned by a need for regeneration for a significant increase in both convenience and comparison shopping floorspace in the Woolwich catchment. A5. C1 for community facilities.010 new dwellings). See also Policy J8 for wholesale uses. and Policies J4. DIY was the only sector where need was identified up to 2011. The Mixed Use Site Schedules identify a range of sites to accommodate new town centre retailing. C1. proposals outside or on the edge of town centres must demonstrate that there are no sequentially preferable sites available. and there is also scope to provide a medium to large supermarket and other local retail facilities as part of the Kidbrooke redevelopment (see Policy H4). In terms of retail warehousing.000 sqm of additional retail floorspace within a major mixed development including 10. centre size. moderate capacity for both in the Eltham catchment. town centre performance and shopping patterns in the Borough.42 8. distance from defined core shopping frontages and barriers to pedestrian movement will be relevant considerations.These activities can both benefit from and reinforce proximity to a healthy retail sector. alongside overcapacity in some other sectors.40 8. D1 and D2 of the Use Classes Order (1987 as amended 2005).This policy will therefore apply to all retail uses including retail warehouses and other formats open to the visiting public. J7 and W3 for offices). but limited capacity in the Greenwich catchment (which includes Charlton and also Greenwich Peninsula. In the event need can be established. where planning permission has been granted for approximately 31.

fringe or local category. and keep the shopping frontage active and viable. and by designating local centres in their entirety as Local Shopping Frontage. and 50% of Fringe and Local Frontage. or where they form a logical extension to an existing frontage. The calculation of the percentage limits on non-A1 uses will be based on linear length of designated shopping frontage. should be available for A1 retail use.46 8. and Will not be permitted if as a result either the Use Class category proposed or the combined total of A3. ii. it will be applied to an individual block of frontage. In larger centres fringe areas complement core retail frontages by providing locations for specialist shops and services which cannot afford core rents. Non-retail (A1) Uses in Protected Shopping Frontages TC18 The Council will support the provision of a range of activity generating non retail uses in town centres. Retail (A1) representation across all local centres was 52% in 2001. subject to the ground floor retail thresholds set out in Policy TC17.45 8. Reason 8. relevant to the application site. iv. Should directly serve visiting members of the public. rather than comparison shopping opportunities for larger items.47 166 TOWN CENTRES .44 The Council seeks to protect both retail activity and central areas within town centres where retailing is the dominant use. In district and local centres the calculation will be applied to the entire frontage designated by core. Core.Protected Core. v.These thresholds reflect existing trends in the Borough. At ground floor level a minimum of 70% of Core Frontage. A1 retail occupancy in core frontages of the Borough’s larger centres declined slightly from 72% to 66% between 1993 and 2001. and greater emphasis will be placed on safeguarding essential local services (see Policy TC19). vitality and viability without unduly constraining opportunities for an acceptable level of diversification. iii. Should include the installation and retention of a display window of good design. The 50% threshold in fringe and local frontages is intended to limit the loss of retail units in fringe frontages and local centres. including evening activities where environmentally appropriate.A4 and A5 uses would occupy more than 25% of all designated frontage premises within that centre 8. generate and not impede pedestrian activity. Non retail proposals: i. and protects the long-term viability of town centres for retailing. Being smaller they tend to offer basic convenience or ‘top up’ retailing and local services. Will not be permitted if as a result breaks between occupied A1 premises exceed two units in core frontages or three in fringe or local frontages. based on number of units). This policy will also be applied to new units within designated frontages. In major centres. fringe and local shopping frontages are identified on the proposals maps or in Table TC2.This best serves the interests of shoppers. In Neighbourhood Parades retail representation may be low. while the level of non-retail facilities in the fringe has risen from 31% to 45% (Council surveys. Fringe and Local Shopping Frontages TC17 The Council will seek to protect the overall viability of town centres by designating Core (Primary) and Fringe (Secondary) Shopping Frontages in major and district centres. Core frontages are not designated in Local Centres. to protect retail choice. Must not result in the loss of an occupied A1 retail unit where reasonable alternative premises are available elsewhere in that centre.

particularly in Eltham and Greenwich (see Policies TC10 and TC14). or where retail premises are vacant and cannot be let or sold for retailing. cultural or entertainment activities for their intended or an equivalent use.48 PPS6 Planning for Town Centres notes that encouraging a diverse range of Key Town Centre Uses within town centres can enhance their vitality and viability. Exceptions may be made to criterion (iii)–(v) for A3 restaurants. doctor and dentist. In determining applications for premises in neighbourhood parades or freestanding local shops the Council will firstly seek to safeguard existing essential local services.50 TOWN CENTRES 167 .51 Local shops. and provide a range of local employment.Through diversity town centres can better meet the needs and aspirations of local communities. providing their use does not unacceptably impact on residential amenity or traffic levels. It is intended to avoid stretches of ‘dead’ frontage lacking in pedestrian activity. Essential local facilities in Neighbourhood Parades and freestanding premises TC19 In considering proposals for Neighbourhood Parades and freestanding neighbourhood shops the Council will seek to safeguard existing A1 retail uses and the provision of a minimum range of essential local facilities including a general grocer. 8. as defined in the policy. the letting history of the premises. Exceptional cases must offer regular evening dining.49 8. social and health facilities within walking distance of residential areas are a valued element of the social fabric and help to minimise social exclusion.They particularly benefit residents without cars or with constrained mobility. Changes to other environmentally suitable uses will be considered where premises are vacant. and evidence of active and realistic marketing of the unit for retailing will be relevant considerations. chemist. Change of use in any such facility will be opposed if it would result in the loss without replacement of a valued local service. and it can be demonstrated that there is no demand or market for the permitted use or an alternative essential local service not currently represented. Arts. Exceptions will be made for the loss of health facilities as part of a managed modernisation programme (see Policy C2). Reason 8. who might otherwise be effectively deprived of the services they provide.Reason 8. which provides a focus of activity for other uses. to facilitate transition to more sustainable patterns of use. Cultural and Entertainment facilities TC20 The Council will seek to retain premises for arts. The policy applies limits to the extent and co-location of non-A1 uses to avoid the loss of a ‘critical mass’ of retail activity in protected frontages.The third objective is to safeguard other existing A1 retail uses. exceptions to retail safeguards may be made for community uses. particularly purpose-built facilities of borough-wide significance. newsagent. and to avoid the fragmentation of retail areas. Subject to other relevant policies. post office. and operators may be required to enter into a legal agreement to ensure this remains the case. In turn diversity is underpinned by a vital retail sector. Evidence of active but unsuccessful marketing on realistic terms will be relevant in such cases. or its loss would place the surrounding area more than 400 metres from the nearest alternative. In such cases the general levels of vacancy in a centre or frontage block.The Council will consider producing more detailed advice on food and drink uses in a Supplementary Planning Document. The second objective is to ensure the provision of any essential local service not currently provided within a 400-metre radius. which could undermine the centre as a whole.

and can generate civic spirit. Affordable housing will be sought in developments providing 15 or more dwellings (see Policy H14).55 168 TOWN CENTRES . Reason 8. The Policy seeks to prevent the loss of sites and premises for social.Town centres also tend to be highly accessible by public transport.53 There is a need to increase commercial viability. site servicing and access arrangements are inadequate for the intended purpose. See also Policy J9 for arts-related workspace. providing: i. tourism. ii. To ensure that offices are not prematurely lost to housing. ii. It would result in the loss of reasonable residential accommodation with separate access. and Separate and secure access to residential areas is provided. arts. iii. and improve personal safety outside normal business hours. Premises in current office or community use are not lost (see Policies J5 and C2). This needs to be balanced against the need to retain residential accommodation as far as is practicable.52 The Greenwich Strategy seeks to promote improved access to. providing such use is environmentally appropriate. parking provision 8. Town centre living TC22 The Council will promote town centre living through supporting mixed use town centre developments that contain a residential element above ground floor level. community activities or other Town Centre Uses will normally be permitted.These are of cumulative social and recreational benefit to local communities. Housing can also sustainably re use town centre buildings which are vacant or no longer suited to their original purpose (see Policy H1). and dwellings overlook public areas wherever practical. and facilities for. iii. and other economic benefits. providing a good quality and secure living environment can be created (see Policies D7 and E3). It would unacceptably harm the amenity of neighbouring residents. town centre housing may particularly suit the less mobile including wheelchair users. vibration and other forms of pollution. Due to the close proximity of shops and other facilities. Reason 8. Residential conversion of premises above shops. In centres with good public transport access. and suitable for car free housing. will normally be acceptable. evidence of reasonable and active site marketing for the permitted use will be required (see Policy J5). or Parking. foster development of the evening economy. Such facilities are typically located in or near town centres. and provision of dwelling suited to their needs will be encouraged wherever practical. Use of Premises Above Shops TC21 The use of vacant or under-used floor space above shops for offices. incorporating where appropriate measures to reduce to reasonable levels noise. generate jobs and find premises for small business and community uses in these locations. and vacant town centre buildings or parts of buildings outside protected shopping frontages that cannot be let or sold for their permitted use. arts and cultural use. Dwellings offer a good quality and secure living environment. cultural or entertainment uses. alternative sources of employment.54 PPS6 Planning for Town Centres notes that increasing town centre population can make a contribution to vitality and viability.Reason 8. except where: i.

Access to on street parking permits may be restricted by legal agreement. and businesses. cultural and entertainment events. refuse storage and litter. enhance customer facilities. or other environmental impacts. natural and historic environments.56 8. Reason 8. and a venue for outdoor arts. customers.They provide a focal point for day-to-day activities. minimise or mitigate unacceptable environmental and amenity impacts (see also Policies E1 and E2). and in particular Policies (D1D8. employees. 8. dust. safe and efficient backdrop for retail and other activities. vibrations. Controlling congestion and pollution.58 The Council seeks to balance general support for commercial activities in town centres with the need to safeguard and enhance their environment. Environmental protection TC23 Town centre developments will be required where necessary to install or implement appropriate measures to control or mitigate to acceptable levels noise. M26-M30). Beresford Square. E1 and E2).other than for occupants with disabilities is considered unnecessary and undesirable. improve movement and improve servicing within town centres. employees and customers by creating a more pleasant. Civic Spaces TC24 Development proposals that would diminish the character and use of town centre civic spaces will be resisted. Reason 8. Dial Arch Square and Passey Place make a valuable contribution to the character. General Gordon Square. materials and the layout of buildings and public space. URBAN ENVIRONMENT Improving the quality of the built and natural environments of town centres is a policy priority.57 TOWN CENTRES 169 . fumes and smells. townscape and activity of the Borough’s town centres. will benefit residents. and promoting quality in design. accessible. M25. The supplementary policies below seek to minimise adverse environmental impacts from retail and town centre activities. and commuted payments may be sought to improve public transport (see Policies H19. sets out the Council’s detailed policies to achieve quality in urban design and to safeguard and enhance the built. comfort and appeal to benefit local residents.The Policy aims to prevent. Proposals will be refused where their environmental impacts would unduly impact on the operation of local businesses or the amenity of nearby residents.59 Civic spaces such as Cutty Sark Gardens (See The Cutty Sark Gardens Planning Brief. whilst acknowledging that background levels of disturbance and/or pollution in town centres should reasonably be expected to exceed those in ‘suburban’ areas. The Design and Conservation and Environmental Protection chapters. 2006).

disrupt bus routes. Servicing and Parking TC25 Provision should be made for customer access. storage. existing public parking and the standards in the Movement Chapter.The right balance will help to reduce car use overall whilst also reducing illegal parking by customers and delivery vehicles. servicing. and will likewise expect safe and hygienic arrangements in new developments. minimizing or mitigating potential environmental problems. See Policies M23-M35. especially noise at antisocial hours and litter.61 Markets are a popular form of traditional retailing. TC26 The Council will seek to improve delivery access. but can generate problems for the environment. Car parking requirements will be considered in accordance with principles of traffic reduction. Council policy aims to protect nearby residents and businesses. and can create pedestrian hazards such as vehicular movements on footpaths. proposals for market stalls. On the other hand. It also seeks to ensure temporarily occupied sites remain fit for their usual purpose. including wherever feasible and appropriate drop off points. young children and older people. Conditions may be imposed to control hours of operation and to ensure that adequate arrangements are made for parking. as well as customers. The usual use of the proposed site and the operation of permanent businesses located in the vicinity. but one often involving a significant intensification of use on open land. Markets and Car Boot Sales TC27 Where planning permission is required. 170 TOWN CENTRES . residential amenity and other local businesses. the character of a conservation area or setting of a listed building. including people in wheelchairs.60 The Council seeks to balance traffic reduction priorities with the need to improve the environmental quality. or on the natural environment. parking congestion or the flow of traffic especially public transport. especially in residential streets. site restitution. and potential traffic and parking congestion. new markets and or car boot sales will be permitted unless they would unacceptably impact on: i. and play an important role in Woolwich and Greenwich town centres (see also Policy TC11). carers and parents with buggies. and the disposal and/or recycling of refuse. by controlling. Pedestrian and highway safety. It will look for opportunities to remove conflicts between on street servicing and bus movements. and high levels of car trip generation .often very early in the morning. Car boot sales are an alternative retail form increasing in popularity. Reason for Policies TC25 & TC26 8. Residential amenity. Excessive parking provision is a waste of land and can encourage further car use. and accessibility within town centres. iii. Reason 8. Such obstructions cause traffic congestion.They provide a range of benefits and help to meet local shopping needs. and where necessary to consider imposing restrictions on delivery hours. ramped access and/or lifts for people with reduced mobility. ii. safety. vehicle turning and waste storage arrangements in existing shopping frontages when considering applications for new uses. Recycling facilities should be provided in car parks of more than 200 spaces.Site Access. facilities and buildings should be safely accessible to all. servicing and cycle parking in all significant new town centre developments.

iii. The number of premises in designated centres and parades in food and drink use (A3. Hot food take-aways will be permitted providing: i.63 Hot food take away premises fall within Use Class A5. The proposed use and the level of activity it generates is appropriate in the location proposed. For this reason they are best located in town centres in accordance with the sequential approach and due to their potential for linked trips to local shops. Additional safeguards may be sought in relation to parking and traffic issues to reduce problems arising from illegal short term parking by customers. Hot food take-away outlets including drive-through restaurants TC28 Town Centres and Neighbourhood Parades are the preferred location for hot food take-away establishments including drive-through restaurants (Use Class A5). waste disposal. ii. It has since dropped back to 16% in 2001. and are also commonly associated with environmental and amenity problems such as litter.The overall level of food and drink use (including A5 takeaways) in any centre will be limited by policies for core. traffic movements. nor on the environment or the character of the area. Safeguards on amenity and the environment are set out in Policy TC23 (see also E1). and in relation to hot food uses can normally be mitigated by installation of suitable ducting and waste storage facilities. fumes.they serve a need not generally met by existing facilities. road or pedestrian safety. These apply a maximum threshold of 25% of premises for all food and drink uses to safeguard retailing and ensure a reasonable mix of facilities are available to local residents. markets and car boot sales may operate without the need for planning permission for up to 14 days in any calendar year unless there is an Article 4 Direction in force (removing General Permitted Development rights).64 8. Hot food uses will need to be designed and sited with additional care in areas of special character. Customer visits by car would not unacceptably impact on existing or proposed public transport provision. iv. 8. cyclist and pedestrians. Reason 8. Proposals outside Major.62 Under the General Permitted Development Order (1995) Part 4 Class B. or unless the land in question is a building or is in within the curtilage of a building. and restrictions on opening hours. A4 and A5) increased from 15% to 18% between 1993 and 1998.65 TOWN CENTRES 171 . and would not unacceptably impact on residential or workplace amenity. and because background activity levels are usually higher. creating pressures on premises in other uses. fringe and local frontages (TC17 and TC18). that there are no sequentially preferable sites available and that they are conveniently and safely accessible by public transport as well as by cycle and on foot.8. In effect this means that planning permission will always be required unless the site is on undeveloped land. District and Local centres predicated on serving a wider than ‘walk-in’ catchment demonstrate that:. late night noise and traffic. bus movements. and The proposal complies with applicable retail frontage policies and does not jeopardize the provision of an essential local service (see Policies TC17-TC19). This can unacceptably reduce safety and increase congestion by impeding traffic. They often attract significant numbers of customers. that is land with no associated buildings or with no permitted or established use (for the avoidance of doubt car parking and playing fields constitute development).

66 The Council seeks to maintain and support the existing network of town centres and shopping parades by focusing new retail investment within such locations.67 8. Accordingly considerations such as need and the sequential approach are applicable.68 172 TOWN CENTRES . On sites outside defined retail centres and parades. and it is demonstrated that there are no sequentially preferable sites available sufficient to accommodate the retail element on a stand alone basis. where existing shops tend to be much smaller than 150 m2. District and Local Centres are less vulnerable to competition from forecourt retail premises by virtue of their existing size and range of retailing. Major.Retail facilities in Petrol Stations TC29 The Council will normally permit forecourt retailing in Major. or in Tables TC2 and TC3. retail development on a site that is not abutting or wholly within it could undermine the parade by functioning as a rival destination and overwhelming existing convenience stores. traffic levels. v.These are defined on the Proposals and Inset Maps. and opposes them in out-of-centre locations where they do not. ii. iii. in accordance with Guidance in PPG1. Recent changes in filling station operations have seen retail functions expand from ancillary to general retailing. and Dedicated parking is provided for shop customers without obstructing the forecourt. providing: i. The shop is safely and conveniently accessible to pedestrians and cyclists. often including a small supermarket. Paragraph 8. The proposal will not unacceptably impact on residential amenity or the environment. The Policy will be interpreted more strictly where proposals would adversely affect Neighbourhood Parades.42 notes that the test of need for small convenience shopping proposals will take account of gaps in local provision. The proposal will not unacceptably impact on public transport operations. and in Neighbourhood Parades on sites abutting or within the existing shopping parade. In this respect the Council has defined ‘ancillary’ as less than 150 m2 net floorspace. The policy supports forecourt-retailing proposals where they contribute to the vitality and viability of town centres. Other local shops and services that rely on customers attracted to existing convenience shops in the parade then become vulnerable. PPS6 and PPG13. Whereas competition within the parade is acceptable. site servicing or other on-site activities. and will therefore generate shopping trips in its own right. iv. 8. Policy TC16 and its Reasons provide further advice on need and sequential testing. as above this figure it is considered that the retail function is a use in its own right. traffic congestion or highway safety. District and Local Centres. is comparable to ‘stand alone’ retail units being twice the size of a typical cornershop. forecourt retail (Use Class A1) floorspace shall not exceed 150 m2 (net) unless the proposal meets a demonstrable local need not served by existing local convenience shops. Reason 8.

TABLE TC2: DISTRICT AND LOCAL CENTRES SHOPPING FRONTAGES1 Name 1 District Centres Blackheath (Mostly in LB Lewisham) East Greenwich Street Blackheath Village Lee Road 2 Trafalgar Road Numbers Core: 1 .167 (odd) Fringe: 1-7 (odd) Core: 100 .14 & 18 . Safeway superstore TOWN CENTRES 173 .177 & 187 .13 (odd) Fringe: 15-19 (odd) Fringe: 1-17 (odd) Core: 142 .98C (even) 63A . site between Aldi & Iceland.33 (odd) Fringe: 35 .30 (even) 13 .119 (odd) Fringe: 2 .156 (even) 97 .139 (odd) Core: 2A .39 & 47 .110 (even).53 (odd) Woolwich Road 3 4 5 Greenwich Lee Green (Mostly in LB Lewisham) Plumstead High Street See Proposals Inset Map Lee Road Eltham Road Plumstead High Street Fringe: 121 . Thamesmead Twin Tumps Way Joyce Dawson Way Aldi.183 (odd) Fringe: 1 .79 & 137 .118A & 126 .32 & 44 .153 & 179 .57 (odd) Core: western side (Cannon Retail Park) Core: 2 – 4b (even) 1 – 5 (odd) Fringe: 6b – 20 (even) 7-21 (odd) Core Core Lakedale Road 6. 155 . 71 .232 (even).213 (odd) Fringe: 92 .

69.170 Local Centre Frontages (no core/fringe) Blackheath Hill Blackheath Hill Greenwich South Street Lewisham Road Charlton Village Herbert Road The Village Herbert Road Plumstead Common Sandy Hill Road Court Road Mottingham Road Footscray Road Station Approach 2 3 4 5 Mottingham (mostly in LB Bromley) New Eltham 6 Royal Standard Old Dover Road Stratheden Parade Vanbrugh Park Westcombe Hill Odeon Parade Tudor Parade Well Hall Parade Well Hall Road 7 Well Hall Notes to Table TC2 1. 34 .281. Even: 44 .44. Even: 2a .45.71 Even: 150 .16 All: 12 .74 Even: 24.6 Odd: 125 . 174 TOWN CENTRES . Even: 2a .413 Even: 336 .192 All: 1 .380.93 Odd: 369 .401. Odd: 57. 59 .143 Odd: 1 . Even: 2-32 Odd: 1 . Even: 276 . 405 .288 Odd: 77 .5 All: 1 .158 Odd: 275 .43.13. Even: 134 .TABLE TC2: DISTRICT AND LOCAL CENTRES SHOPPING FRONTAGES1 continued Name 1 Street Numbers Odd: 1 . Additional local centres are likely to be provided as part of Gallions Urban Village (outline planning permission).33 Odd: 1. 396-404 All: 1-5 Odd: 5 .48 Even: 156 .20 Odd: 53 .26 All: 1-17 Odd: 43a. and as part of the Kidbrooke Development Area (see Policy H4).15. Even: 2 .

15a.753. 120 . 52.25 Odd: 25 .758. 42 . 109 Odd: 103 . Crossways PH.48 Even: 150 . 416a . Woodman PH Odd: 201. 143 (cnr Sidcup Road) Odd: 731 . Even: 2.17 All: 1 .198 Odd: 1 .12.28 Even: 188 . 203 Odd: 91 . 11.229.102.116 All: 1 .122 10 Eynsham Drive 11 Fiveways 12 Hill Reach 13 Holbourne Rd 14 Humber Road 15 Kidbrooke 16 Kingsman Parade 17 Leslie Smith Square 18 McLeod Road 19 Middle Park 20 The Mound TOWN CENTRES 175 .379.436. Even: 38-40 (PFS).95. 55.78 Odd: 11 . 64 . 2a.TABLE TC3: PREMISES IN NEIGHBOURHOOD PARADES Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Abbey Wood Avery Hill Bexley Road Brewery Road Charlton Church Lane Charlton Road Conway Road Court Road Eltham Common Street Wilton Road Abbey Wood Road Avery Hill Road Bexley Road Brewery Road Waverly Road (corner) Charlton Church Lane Charlton Road Conway Road Court Road Well Hall Road Eynsham Drive Southwood Road Sidcup Road Hillreach Holbourne Rd Whetstone Road Humber Road Station Crescent Rochester Way Kingsman Parade Leslie Smith Square McLeod Road Newmarket Green The Mound William Barefoot Road Numbers Odd: 1 .144 Even: 2 . 2b Odd: 23 .139. Even: 416.74a Odd: 211 . Even: 728(PFS). 184 (cnr Penmon Road) Odd: 129 .60. 106 . Even: 2 .4 Even: 122 .15. 58 (PO). Odd: 369 .81.178. 96 .74.200. Even: 12 . 185a Odd: 61 . Even: 58 . 740 . Even: 10 . 56.13 Even: 72 .21 183.115 Odd: 1 .7.13. 44 . 50. 22.47.16. 185. Greyhound PH All: 1-7 Even: 70 . 436a Even: 164 . 107.84.

152 Odd: 293 . 80.133.168.317.27.86-94 Even: 170 .203 Even: 122a . 251 . 72. 70. 160 .202 All: 1 .10 Odd: 251 .212 Even: 18-26. 183 . 22 .13. Even: 92 .52-56. 66. Even: 2a (PFS) Odd: 117 .46.562 Odd: 95 .132.46 176 TOWN CENTRES .31 Odd: 239 . 25 . 94 (superstore) Even: 546 . Odd: 1 . 142 .101b.TABLE TC3: PREMISES IN NEIGHBOURHOOD PARADES continued Name 21 Plumstead Common 22 Royal Hill 23 Shooters Hill 24 The Slade 25 Southend Crescent 26 Swingate Lane 27 Teleman Square 28 Waterdale Road 29 Westhorne Avenue 30 Westmount Road 31 Wickham Lane 32 Woolwich Road Street Plumstead Common Road Royal Hill Shooters Hill Road The Slade Eltham High Street Swingate Lane Teleman Square Wickham Lane Kings Highway Westhorne Avenue Westmount Road Plumstead High Street Wickham Lane Woolwich Road Numbers Odd: 117 .158.279 Odd: 141 . 182. 76.245.155 All: 11 .263 79 (NW corner).129. 196 . Even: 8.

architectural. The choice of the Peninsula for the Millennium celebrations brought the Borough international status that is being drawn upon and channelled further into the local economies and communities. education. making the most of historic heritage. To promote the provision of facilities for tourists in appropriate locations. TOURISM GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 9. subject to the need to: i.9. The general policies for Tourism are: The Council supports and promotes tourism. ii. In addition to the new development around the Peninsula. Old Royal Observatory and former Royal Naval College. the amenities of the local community and the environment of the Borough.The Borough’s Tourism Strategy for 2004-2010 ‘Greenwich: A Place to Visit?’. Cutty Sark. ST1 ST2 iv. principally the National Maritime Museum. the Borough continues to capitalise upon its many historical assets. culture and tourism sectors.The latter supports the diversification of tourism across London and that the benefits are dispersed. Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 9.2 PPG21 Tourism (1992) and the London Plan (2004) stress the benefits of tourism and the need to ensure that tourism is sustainable. PPS6: Planning for Town Centres (2005) and Policy TC16 promote retail. and the expansion of tourism in the Borough. sporting and entertainment activities for participation and enjoyment by all sections of the community. modern businesses.3 9.Visitors come to see the royal. ensure that tourism is managed to provide benefits for local communities and businesses. protect the housing stock. iii. both interacts with the UDP and aims to focus tourism delivery agencies towards achieving a sustainable tourism economy. The Greenwich Strategy aims to reinforce Greenwich as a world renowned and welcoming tourist destination.The Council wishes to attract new hotel developments. the riverside locations and creative potential. culture. in order to assist the local economy and increase the number and variety of jobs available locally. The policies in the UDP welcome tourism in appropriate locations and support the provision of hotels and conference centres in the light of the general shortage of hotel space in an area that has many high profile tourist attractions. recognising that it has a positive and significant role to play in securing the economic and environmental regeneration of the Borough particularly in the Waterfront areas. scientific 9.5 TOURISM 177 . and recognises Greenwich Riverside as a Strategic Cultural Area.1 The Plan promotes the protection of the concentration of tourism activities around key sites. and that major tourist facilities are well served by public transport.4 9. particularly in the vicinity of Greenwich Town Centre. ancient woodlands. leisure and other key town centre uses which attract large numbers of people to locate within the Town Centres. Greenwich is undergoing great change as its maritime. diversify the tourism base of the Borough’s economy by seeking facilities which embrace a wide range of arts. industrial and military heritage is consolidated with new roles in providing sustainable communities.

The development of a Waterfront Transit link complements the picture. that all aspects of the development are accessible to those with sensory or mobility impairments. In addition. walkways. by linking areas across the Borough by a sustainable transport mode. The full benefits of this growth can be achieved as a result of inward investment into the Borough. particularly in the vicinity of Greenwich Town Centre. educational establishments and the Greenwich Local Labour and Business initiative. M40 and M41. M26. if those attracted to Greenwich are to be encouraged to lengthen their stay. iv. with a key factor being the under supply of visitor accommodation. ii. (Greenwich: A Place to Visit? Tourism Strategy 2004-2010) these issues must be addressed.7 Policies Location and Criteria T1 The Council will welcome proposals for major tourism development including hotels (over 10 bed spaces). that parking. See also Policies E1 to E3 and E5 to E7. The connection of Greenwich Town Centre to the DLR and to the underground network at Greenwich Peninsula has provided stronger links between the Borough and Central London. including linking waterfront sites through design. 9. within areas listed in the Mixed Use Schedules and in identified Waterfront locations with good public transport access (Policy W3). the number of graded bed and breakfast spaces has fallen by approximately 5% and there is a shortage of specialist types of business tourism facilities. particularly as a result of noise or disturbance. a high standard of design which complies with the policies contained in the Design and Conservation and Waterfront Chapters. M32.The current level of spending per visitor is low. conference facilities or interactive attractions in town centres. efforts must be made to use the Borough’s strengths and take advantage of the opportunities available. Other attractions including Eltham Palace. Skill shortages and training needs have and continue to be met through training schemes.6 The concentration of tourism activities around key sites. that the level of traffic generated by the development will not adversely impact on the surrounding environment (especially air quality) or on traffic congestion or bus services.With 6. v. cycling and (where relevant) coach facilities be provided on site to accord with Policies M23. M27. Charlton House. promoting the World Heritage Site Status of Greenwich and seeking development of tourism support industries. Such development will need to satisfy the following criteria: i. environmental improvements. iii.and nautical legacy that has made Greenwich a site of World Heritage Importance.500 serviced and non-serviced bedspaces available year round. the Royal Arsenal. Thames Barrier and the Green Chain network of open spaces. Since 2000. 9. however this includes seasonal University accommodation and a caravan park (Greenwich: A Place to Visit? Tourism Strategy 2004-2010). cycleways and improved public transport. Greenwich has an average of 3. has caused problems associated with traffic congestion and erosion of the environment. 178 TOURISM .9 million visitors to the Borough in 2001. that there will be no significant harm to the amenity of neighbouring residents and land users.

the Council will seek to ensure that the development uses the river for visitor transport. and focus the efforts of the Council. in actively promoting major tourist development e. Tourism related developments adjacent the Borough’s waterways will be encouraged to make use of the river wherever possible. In meeting the demand for accommodation in particular. hotels and restaurants.11 9. Most major tourist developments will provide benefits such as leisure facilities or job opportunities. be it through design. Criteria i. It is necessary to assess major hotel development against criteria as listed above. The sequential approach towards major tourist development. vii. bed and breakfast accommodation and guesthouses including permitting conversions of buildings from other uses providing that the following criteria are fulfilled: i. Bed and Breakfast Accommodation and Guesthouses T2 The Council will give favourable consideration to the development and extension of small hotels (up to 10 bed-spaces). ii.9 9.10 9. and securing economic benefits for local people. This approach has a number of advantages. can be used by local residents and businesses.8 Tourism development in the past has tended to be opportunistic rather than planned. The Council has prepared a guide of Hotel Sites for the Millennium. encourages environmental improvements and induces investment.The Council will continue to review the need for hotel sites and to identify further suitable locations in future planning briefs. the Council will seek to secure public access to them. hotels and visitor attractions in the Borough. in accordance with Policy SC2. the identification of sites for tourism development will also help avoid piecemeal development. Reason 9. including hotels and associated ancillary visitor facilities provide sport and recreation.12 TOURISM 179 . Small Hotels. that where development is proposed on sites adjacent to the River Thames or Deptford Creek. that facilities associated with the development. In particular developers of major tourist developments will be expected to use Greenwich Local Labour and Business (Policy J14). enabling them to be co-ordinated with other areas of economic regeneration. will help to structure future provision. to v. it raises the profile of the area. in Policy T1 are complied with.vi. or other leisure facilities. The site is close to existing public transport facilities. thus ensuring the optimum use of the site. 9. such as hotel leisure facilities. that planning agreements are used as appropriate to secure community and workplace benefits. and viii.g. encouraging sensitive location for what can often constitute an intensive form of land use and can create severe environmental problems in surrounding areas if the implications are not fully explored. the siting of buildings and activity or the use of the river itself. Where major tourist development. The use of the River Thames and Deptford Creek for tourism is supported. facilitates links between attractions. as part of its commitment towards encouraging tourism development within the Borough. This has resulted in the Borough experiencing many of the environmental problems associated with intensive tourism related uses whilst receiving few of the benefits. In trying to maximise the benefits of such developments towards the community and to avoid any problems arising from new development the Council will use planning agreements. encourages joint marketing and provides a strong base for facilities serving the tourist market. particularly shops. particularly on the Waterfront (see Policy SW1). although these may not necessarily meet the needs of the community.

particularly residential areas. Deptford Creek is an area for focused tourism. thus increasing their level of spending. Well Hall Pleasaunce. 2004). the emphasis will be on providing basic tourist infrastructure to establish a secondary focus for the development of tourism in the Borough. there is an identifiable shortage of ‘value for money’ hotel accommodation. there is limited group accommodation provision. a further 36. The Royal Arsenal.14 This approach seeks to upgrade the quality and diversity of tourism development and by doing so to improve the quality of tourism related employment available to local people across the Borough and provide key elements of the local business infrastructure. facilities for camping and caravanning in the Borough. and other forms of visitor accommodation that need to be safeguarded for their contribution to the Borough wide tourism strategy and to meeting local needs. Through managing tourism activities and promoting the attractions found wider afield within the Borough such as Eltham Palace.000 hotel rooms should be provided in the period up to 2016 and in particular.13 Over the plan period Greenwich will have established a number of hotels. The Council has prepared a Cultural Strategy and a Tourism Strategy which address the need to diversify tourism in the Borough. Conversions should. Significant improvements have resulted from the development of the DLR into Greenwich town centre. has the potential to be a tourism focus for Woolwich .Reason 9. Future tourism development in Eltham Town Centre should be geared towards providing ancillary facilities serving tourist attractions such as Eltham Palace in the Eltham area as a whole. Charlton House and Oxleas Woods.16 180 TOURISM .The ability to promote Greenwich as an overnight tourist destination or as an alternative place to stay as part of a London visit is undermined by a shortage of hotel stock (Greenwich: A Place to Visit? Tourism Strategy 2004-2010). with visitors being actively encouraged to lengthen their stay. Diversification T3 The Council will seek to diversify the tourism base of the Borough by encouraging the provision of a range of tourist facilities and ensuring that a geographical spread of sites are available for good quality tourism development. including the Firepower Museum and the Greenwich Heritage Centre. It is not envisaged that this demand could be fully met through the construction of new hotels. exhibitions and other high revenue generating developments.the variety of buildings. Diversification of tourism within the Borough should include developing facilities for conferences. In Greenwich Town Centre future effort and resources will be concentrated on improving existing facilities and relieving congestion. the benefits of tourism can be dispersed and built upon. however.15 9. It is through this diversification of the tourism product found in Greenwich that a more sustainable tourism economy could be developed. cultural and creative development contributing to mixed use policies and wider regeneration (see London Plan. 9. Reason 9. quality of architecture and accessible location lends this site to development that incorporates tourism facilities. Camping and Caravanning T4 The Council will seek to provide additional. The Borough is home to a range of accommodation and whilst it has a reputation of good value accommodation for the independent traveller. According to the London Plan (2004). be strictly controlled to ensure that they do not have a negative impact on adjoining areas. and protect existing. In Woolwich.

17 The existing camping and caravanning site at the Abbey Wood Caravan Club is well used. TOURISM 181 .Reason 9. Camping and caravanning facilities also help to meet the need for budget accommodation.

182 TOURISM .

as Open Spaces. and community interests to deliver lasting community benefits. Canary Wharf and the Square Mile. Major new development and infrastructure projects contrast with the legacy of dereliction and low investment when the previous Development Plan was adopted. and their intimate scale and character contrast with the Riverside industrial buildings and open spaces. conservation. environmental. WATERFRONT GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 10. and strategic open spaces such as Greenwich Park. 10. to secure the sustainable development of balanced waterfront communities.3 The Waterfront is an area of rich diversity.4 10. a range of regeneration initiatives are underway to capitalise and build on the Borough’s improved profile and infrastructure. and an archaeological and recreational resource. It is an area of strategic importance benefiting from improved transport connections to the West End.1 The Greenwich Waterfront area stretches from Deptford to Thamesmead. The Greenwich Strategy encourages more cultural activity in the Borough. and an essential part of the Borough’s character and landscape in their own right. bringing about the regeneration of the whole area and realising its economic. most of that will be accessible to the public from the Riverside Walk. other parts of London and the South East. social. promotes the Waterfront Area as a transport route. for recreation and leisure. The River Thames The River Thames is a major linear open space that frames some of the Borough’s key historic buildings.These include the Millennium Dome.The Borough contains 14 kilometres of fully tidal river frontage. which have generated renewed interest and act as a catalyst for further change. the Jubilee Line and DLR extensions. majestic buildings like the former Royal Naval College. Parts of the Riverside display a distinguished natural and historical heritage. The characteristics of the principal communities in the Waterfront Area and the development issues for their localities are set out below. Despite the changes underway. whilst protecting and enhancing their natural habitats. cultural and recreational potential. many dating back to the mid-19th century. However. The Waterfront Chapter aims to deliver national and regional planning objectives for sustainable land use by facilitating the regeneration of large tracts of previously derelict land. a transport route. National Maritime Museum and the Royal Observatory in the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site.5 10. It is a waterway rich in biodiversity. set within areas of high heritage value and thriving residential communities. including the Woolwich Royal Arsenal. The Waterfront also contains numerous tightly knit residential areas. some still suffer from a poor environment and inadequate community facilities. The Waterfront is also an area of dynamic change.10. including all land to the north of the North Kent railway line (see Map 12). Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 10. SW2 The Council recognises and will seek to enhance the value of the River Thames and Deptford Creek as waterways rich in biodiversity and environmental quality. The policies aim to achieve the right balance between development. The Borough has 6 wharves currently 10. to improve the quality of life and opportunities for local residents.6 WATERFRONT 183 .2 SW1 The Council will facilitate the redevelopment and re-use of remaining redundant land and buildings in the Waterfront during the Plan period.

Map 12: Waterfront Area © Crown copyright Waterfront Area 184 WATERFRONT .

Deptford Creek and the Thames. and addresses the competing needs.The town is rich in local history and famous for its historic buildings and monuments.7 The London Plan (2004) defines a Blue Ribbon Network that includes the Thames and London’s other rivers. It is an area with a significant maritime heritage.The Blue Ribbon Network recognises the special character of river and canal corridors as both a strategic and a scarce resource. streams and open water spaces. uses and demands that are placed upon them. near the mouth of Deptford Creek and at Victoria Deep Water Terminal on the west side of Greenwich Peninsula. and its replacement with a mixture of private and affordable flats and family homes. and Lewisham without adding to road traffic. It also seeks to further improve public access between Greenwich Town Centre. commercial.9 Greenwich Town Centre 10. containing local authority housing estates and a variety of small scale commercial and industrial uses. In response the Council has adopted the West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). and has improved accessibility by linking the Town Centre with Docklands. The London Plan identifies Deptford Creek~Greenwich Riverside as an Opportunity Area.There is also heightened interest in a number other sites around Deptford Creek. lies a Defined Industrial Area occupied by two of the Borough’s largest industrial WATERFRONT 185 .11 Development in the Creekside area will extend both the size of Greenwich Town Centre and its range of facilities. 10. Deptford Creekside Deptford Creekside lies to the west of Greenwich Town Centre. Downstream from Deptford Creek the waterfront is undergoing considerable development. canals. This will include the demolition of the New Haddo Estate.To the north. and the town centre also benefits from the Trinity School of Music and the refurbished Cutty Sark Gardens. Deptford Creek is experiencing considerable development pressure. 10. It suffers from traffic congestion caused by through traffic and visitors. The Framework seeks to ensure that emerging opportunities for the arts. on the west of Greenwich Peninsula. The extended Docklands Light Railway is encouraging further investment.12 The East Greenwich Riverside comprises two distinct areas. cultural and creative enterprise are harnessed to further regenerate the area and benefit local communities. incorporating the Creek area and the western end of Greenwich town centre.The proposed Waterfront Transit 2nd Phase would improve public transport links with other town centres and waterfront visitor attractions in the Borough. It is also an emerging node for cultural and creative industries as exemplified by the Laban Centre for contemporary dance in the neighbouring Lewisham Borough.10 Greenwich Town Centre is a World Heritage Site and a key visitor destination for London. and as far as Woolwich contains large areas that are predominately industrial in character. to improve public transport. East Greenwich Riverside 10. Significant recent projects include a major new residential development on the Western Reach at the mouth of Deptford Creek.8 10. It is intended to update the framework in 2007/8 possibly with Lewisham Council. Central London. It is benefiting from ongoing programmes of environmental improvement and housing estate refurbishment. despite a permanent ban on heavy goods vehicles.reserved for cargo-handling use under Safeguarding Direction and two deepwater mooring sites. and to upgrade community facilities and open spaces. 10.The former Royal Naval College and Dreadnought Seaman’s Hospital have been refurbished as visitor attractions and for use by Greenwich University. as Supplementary Planning Guidance. and straddles the Borough boundary with Lewisham. As part of the DLR project a mixed-use development has brought an improved range of retail and leisure opportunities to the Town Centre at Cutty Sark station.

It is expected that the development will be completed by the early 2020’s. public spaces and a Thameside promenade. in particular the Jubilee Line underground station at North Greenwich. East Greenwich Riverside displays a mixed.employers. The Dome will become a multipurpose entertainment and sports facility and provide large-scale conference capacity. which have improved access to the Peninsula from elsewhere in the Borough and from London as a whole. retail and light industrial uses. The development will bring significant regeneration benefits to the Borough and the wider Thames Gateway region.The Village is providing over 3. 10. is a Designated Aggregates Zone. and is generally well separated from residential neighbourhoods. 10. which whilst currently still safeguarded are proposed for de-safeguarding for alternative uses by the Mayor. The urban quarter will provide 10. Continued modernisation and improvements to its commercial building stock would be welcome. to provide local employment opportunities and business locations.The area also benefits from a railhead (see Policy J2). It includes the safeguarded Victoria Deep Water Terminal. office. Part of Badcock’s wharf is operating as a boat repair yard.010 new homes. high-density environmental quality.14 The Peninsula is the largest and most important development area in the Borough.Associated with the development are new retail and leisure facilities. which are either under-used or used for activities that generate problems for surrounding residential areas.13 To the south of the industrial area. 186 WATERFRONT . and buildings of historic importance. Greenwich Peninsula and the Millennium Dome 10.15 A Masterplan for the future of the Peninsula has been granted outline planning permission (the MDL Masterplan). as defined on the Proposals Map.The Council encourages this area be used more intensively for aggregate production.The London Plan recognises the Greenwich Peninsula as an Opportunity Area and the Millennium Village as an example of a new brownfield site urban village development based on a new public transport interchange. This also relieves wharves in less appropriate locations. encompassing land between the Thames and East Greenwich district centre. which is expected to remain in use for river-based freight.The Masterplan envisages a new urban quarter based on the principles of sustainable mixed use. The Peninsula is served by major investments in public transport. Alcatel and Amylum. 10. and a new school and health centre have been built. have been designated for employment-led redevelopment.000 new homes. under review) sets out a vision and plans for future development over the next 15 to 20 years. Lovell’s and Granite Wharves. The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002.17 The majority of the Charlton riverside area east of the Aggregates Zone is within a Defined Industrial Area. also designated a Preferred Industrial Location the London Plan. old Riverside industrial structures. and is home to the flagship Millennium Dome and Millennium Village. amongst others. yet traditional working environment. to take full advantage of its potential for river and rail for transport of raw and finished products. It benefits from improved accessibility following the Woolwich Road widening. This includes Angerstein and Murphy’s Wharves.16 The Angerstein Wharf area at Bugsby’s Reach. Charlton Riverside and The Thames Barrier 10. It will therefore be protected from land speculation pressures and safeguarded for long-term business/industrial use. which are protected by a Safeguarding Direction. The potential of the area will be enhanced by the radically improved public transport networks proposed in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001). Regeneration funding is also available for industrial activities and other improvements (see Chapter 2 Jobs and the Local Economy). applying the principles of Sustainable Residential Quality and urban intensification. It has strong community ties and contains picturesque cottages. hotel and community uses including schools and health care provision.

but the Council has also adopted the following specific policies: WATERFRONT 187 . Waterfront schemes will be subject to the policies set out elsewhere in this Plan. Woolwich Town Centre and Woolwich Royal Arsenal 10. It is a mixed business location and a preferred location for light industry. It is projected that 3.The London Plan identifies Thamesmead as an Opportunity Area and provides for a range of transport infrastructure works improving accessibility to the wider Thames Gateway.This.22 While the rest of the Waterfront area is a mixture of established communities and town centres and former and existing industrial areas.18 Charlton Business Park is within a Strategic Employment Location identified in the London Plan. These projects are supported in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001) and in the London Plan. enhancing links to the Green Chain Walk.The Arsenal is a unique part of Britain’s industrial and military heritage. 10. Phase 2 is proposed to extend Transit to the DLR at Greenwich. These include the Waterfront Transit scheme and the Thames Gateway (Gallions Reach) Bridge.The latter will have segregated public transport lanes to connect the proposed Greenwich Waterfront and East London Transit schemes. and to the Jubilee Line.The Council also supports the proposed DLR extension from City Airport to Woolwich opening 2009.21 During the Plan period the Waterfront Transit will connect Woolwich to other waterfront attractions and town centres. Thamesmead is a relatively new community undergoing rapid redevelopment. an important landmark and tourist attraction. Woolwich is identified as being an Area for Intensification in the London Plan and is undergoing unprecedented change and renewal. complementing the range of uses in line with the Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (1996 & updates. including the major new Urban Village at Gallion’s Reach and a new urban quarter at Tripcock Point. community and commercial office activities. under review). Policies 10. 10. distributive. Thamesmead 10.20 Woolwich contains the Borough’s largest concentration of retail.10. and wholesale trade uses. and the adjoining proposed mixed-use Warren Lane ‘Teardrop’ site (Site Schedule mu13) will substantially consolidate and diversify the Town Centre.23 The Waterfront Area is defined on Map 12. It offers scope for employment-based diversification including provision of ancillary local service facilities for both business and visitor markets.000 new homes and accompanying facilities will be completed in Thamesmead between 2003 and 2016. The town centre will be complemented by development of a heritage tourism and leisure quarter on the waterfront in the Royal Arsenal and adjoining land. The approach to the Barrier has benefited from a programme of landscaping and environmental improvements.19 The Charlton Riverside is also home to Riverside Wharf (Safeguarded) and the Thames Barrier. and the Sites Schedules identify appropriate uses for the main waterfront opportunity sites.

The Borough’s Thames Policy Area boundaries have been defined in consultation with neighbouring Local Authorities and are in general conformity with the London Plan. Develop and enhance the area’s links with the river. The Plan details the content of the area surveys. required analysis and recommendations. This intention was at the core of the Council’s original vision in the 1991 Waterfront Strategy. Incorporate sustainable modes of passenger.The Council also supports construction of buildings that are energy efficient to build and run. Integrate and connect new proposals with the existing pattern of development. iv. and provided a framework for future development in the Waterfront.The Strategy is ongoing but has largely been implemented.D27). providing new uses for old buildings. freight and tourist transport as appropriate (see Policies M7. avoid unnecessary encroachment and contribute positively to the improvement of the local environment. 10. Conserve and enhance the area’s historical heritage and biodiversity. Build on and strengthen existing local communities and area character. The appraisals are being undertaken as part of the Thames Strategy East project. Reason 10. physical and economic legacy that enhances the cohesion and character of existing communities. improves the environment. integrated into the 188 WATERFRONT . ii.24 The Council aims to ensure that physical and infrastructural developments translate into a lasting social. It is anticipated the final report will be published in 2007/8. Consider strategic and local views (Policies D25 . iii. Have regard to adopted Council planning briefs. Developments within the Borough’s TPA should be of a high quality design. iii. and gives the area a strong physical and functional identity.26 The London plan states that the Boroughs must designate a Thames Policy Area. v. Thameside Policy Area W2 The Council will seek a high quality of design respecting the special character of the River Thames within the Thames Policy Area defined on the Proposals Map.Development Principles W1 Developments in the Waterfront must: i.25 For larger sites. ecological. identify detailed boundaries and prepare character appraisals of the river and its environs. and Protect and enhance the river and its foreshore for wildlife and nature conservation. and the inclusion of waste separation and recycling facilities. that use materials from sustainable sources. Urban design guidelines were the cornerstone of the Strategy. Proposals within the Area will be expected to satisfy the development principles under Policy W1 and: i. Reason 10. planning for a balance of facilities at an early stage will be encouraged. iv. design guides and urban design guidelines including major development requirement for a Design Statement (see Policy D2). v. Assist the improvement and regeneration of existing built up areas. and contribute to the completion of a continuous public riverside footpath and cycleway from Deptford to Thamesmead (Policy O16). ii. and Encourage active use of the riverfront especially in Town Centres. It approached regeneration through a series of development initiatives and new forms of partnership. M37).

business/employment activity will be resisted. social and environmental consequences of the decline of heavy industry or port activity in the Borough. any Use Class that provides employment) will be permitted provided they comply with relevant Site Schedules and other Plan policies. conditions will be attached. Deptford Creekside (West Greenwich) Greenwich Peninsula Woolwich Royal Arsenal Reason 10.29 The Site Schedules. It can also mar the visual character of the water space.e. including its banks and foreshore.The Council will seek an overall increase in employment generating uses and proposals that reduce the level of. or legal agreements negotiated. Encroachment into the Thames or Deptford Creek. visitor attractions including the Millennium Dome and the Firepower Museum. to ensure a development provides a balanced mixed of uses and range of employment opportunities for existing and future residents within a reasonable timeframe. Redevelopment proposals for under-used sites often seek greater intensities than those existing. employment-generating uses (i. and the changing nature of the East London and Borough profile and economy. being updated) and West Greenwich Development Framework (2000) provide more detailed advice on appropriate uses and WATERFRONT 189 . 10.The only exception to this policy will be where the applicant can demonstrate a requirement for river-dependent use such as for water-borne transport or to enable water-foreshore recreation. are designated for mixed-use redevelopment to include business. transport and recreation. Proposals must comply with the Site Schedules. Waterfront locations should be viewed as opportunity sites for landmark buildings and design innovation. diversity and business activity can be sterilised. Accordingly. where applicable. and this should be reflected in the choice of quality materials. sometimes including a substantial residential element. open spaces.existing pattern of development and consider existing ecology. iii. Upon planning permissions.The designation seeks to capitalise on the opportunity presented by new transport infrastructure. should be avoided as the progressive narrowing of a river channel increases the likelihood of flooding and can destroy the essential habitats and food sources for fish.The Council will also seek to ensure that the scale of development is commensurate with existing or proposed infrastructure.28 In Mixed Use Areas. with uses mixed both horizontally and vertically. including an overall increase in B-Class floorspace on sites currently or last occupied by B Class uses and not re-allocated for other uses (see Policy J5). 10. especially public transport. ii. where redevelopment takes place the Council will seek to ensure that there is a significant rise in employment. birds and other wildlife. and that affordable housing and other community benefits are provided wherever appropriate (see Policy SC2). or potential for. Major proposals should be accompanied by a Design statement as set out in Policy D2. residential and other appropriate uses. take into account more detailed guidance in planning briefs or approved master plans. Mixed Use Areas W3 The Mixed Use Areas below. Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002. If residential elements are overly dominant. These areas contain many of the most significant waterfront redevelopment sites remaining in the Borough. as defined on the Proposals Map. i. other Plan policies and. so it is critical to ensure that they are re-used in an appropriate manner to secure the long term regeneration of the waterfront and improve the quality of life and opportunities for waterfront communities and other Borough residents.27 Mixed Use Areas have been designated to facilitate the continuing transformation to more productive uses of waterfront areas blighted by the physical.

and is consistent with the principle of sustainable developments. accessible and mixed community with a good quality of life and environment. public open space and a mix of dwellings including affordable housing. Where development takes place on a Safeguarded Wharf or an adjoining site. who has a duty to periodically 190 WATERFRONT . Masterplans that benefit from planning permission set the tone for redevelopment on Greenwich Peninsula and Woolwich Royal Arsenal. a balanced range of facilities to serve the local community.The development will be characterised by a high quality of sustainable urban design. limited additional provision may be appropriate providing it is at a scale in keeping with Thamesmead’s role as a District Centre and the needs of its local catchment (mostly within 5 minutes drive of the centre). 10. Thamesmead W4 The Council supports the ongoing development of Thamesmead to form a distinctive. Thamesmead centre will almost fully utilise its allocated area. as amended 2005) affecting six wharves in Greenwich.32 The extension of the Waterfront Transit to Thamesmead within the Plan period is a priority. Murphy’s. including 2. the Council will seek to ensure that all practicable measures are employed to minimise the potential conflicts between wharf operations and adjoining uses.Tunnel Glucose wharves and the Victoria Deep Water Terminal are safeguarded for river-based cargo handling. The most significant recent scheme in Thamesmead is the Gallions Reach Urban Village.other requirements for their respective areas. air and noise pollution. The Secretary of State has issued a Direction Notice (1998.22). adopted by the Council as Supplementary Planning Guidance. or exceptionally for a strategic proposal of essential benefit to London that cannot be provided for elsewhere in Greater London.5 km of river frontage which when complete will be home to over 3.500 residents. covering 55 hectares in western Thamesmead. subject to further consideration and clarification of matters agreed by the Council in August 2003. Safeguarded Wharves W5 Angerstein. Proposals for specific areas within Thamesmead are set out in the Site Schedules. A modest range of neighbourhood shopping and service facilities will also be provided in the Gallions Reach Local Centre. Following guidance in PPS6 Planning for Town Centres and the London Plan. to have regard to their maintenance for cargo use. Reason 10. It will include around 2.33 Wharf facilities are a finite resource.31 In turn.The last major residential area to be developed in Thamesmead will be Tripcock Point. Development proposals for all these wharves are referable to the Mayor of London. 10. including its residential and open space uses is likely to approach completion (see paragraph 10. Reason 10.000 homes. and the Council supports the principle of the Thames Gateway Bridge. Detailed guidance is provided in the Tripcock Point Development Framework (2003). The movement of goods by water rather than road can help reduce traffic congestion. population growth has stimulated proposals for additional commercial development within Thamesmead district centre. which has largely preceeded the completion of residential areas which will support it.They seek to ensure future waterfront uses deliver the Council’s vision for a revitalised and sustainable waterfront.30 Over the Plan period the Thamesmead development.Alternative uses will only be considered if the wharf is no longer capable of being made viable for river-based cargo handling. a primary school and public open space. Brewery. Riverside. Once unimplemented retail permissions are developed. and does not compromise the vitality and viability of Woolwich.

The Thames is also an important recreational and amenity resource. Appropriate measures include enabling continued highway access to the wharf. including the use of any additional areas to service or support activities on a moored vessel. This amounts to a dual responsibility on both wharf owners/operators and occupiers/developers of adjoining land to employ the best practicable means to minimise the potential for land use conflict. must: i. the provision of new facilities should be WATERFRONT 191 . industrial and employment-generating activities. Positively contribute to the River’s life and scene. pollution. particularly along site boundaries. and is integral to the setting of historic areas including the World Heritage Site at Greenwich. nor adversely effect existing or potential wharfage operations. iv. as well as the use of buffers and other mitigation techniques (see Policy E3). In addition. a source of enjoyment for residents and visitors. use of the River for tourism and recreation. proposals for uses other than river-based cargo handling on safeguarded wharves should be supported by an operational viability assessment of the wharf against the criteria in the London Plan. transport.review wharf safeguarding and make recommendations to the Secretary of State with regards to existing or possible additional safeguarding directions. Floating Vessels W6 Proposals to moor temporary or permanent floating vessels on the Thames. To promote activities such as angling and uses such as boat servicing (yards exist at Badcock’s Wharf and Cory Barge Works). Detailed guidance for floating vessels is set out in Advice Note 4 Planning Criteria for Floating Vessels. recreation or other river-dependent uses. disposition and selection of uses. and the policy seeks to minimise or avoid conflicts between moored vessels and river traffic. v. iii. noise and refuse generation. its tributaries and other waterways for passenger.The London Plan suggests the Mayor and the Boroughs identify wharves to be safeguarded against development that could preclude their future use for cargo handling. and Not conflict with residential amenity. Reason 10. Not unduly impact on the River. Historical sections of the river are not suitable for the mooring of vessels. Not compromise existing or potential River transportation. Other than in the exceptional circumstances identified in the Policy. the River forms a backdrop to significant areas of residential and employment activity. On vacant wharves temporary uses that would not preclude freight use will be considered on merit. ii. and careful attention to the design. its foreshore and environs through ecological disruption. Sympathetically relate to historic waterfront and riverside areas.34 The policy also seeks to ensure that operations on safeguarded wharves or development adjoining sites do not unduly fetter each other.36 Maintaining waterway support facilities and infrastructure is vital to sustaining uses on and adjacent to the Borough’s waterways. will be protected and encouraged. nor with other policies in the Plan and other Council strategies. unless they are of related historic character and do not obscure important riverside settings and historic views. and proposals for moored vessels should not conflict with these established patterns of land use. 10. Reason 10. subject to ecological considerations.35 The main active River use is for passenger and freight transport. Support facilities for water-based uses W7 Support facilities and infrastructure required to enable the use of the River Thames.

boat hoists and cranes. navigation and biodiversity.encouraged. facilities and infrastructure generally will also be identified through the appraisals in the Thames Strategy East (final report expected 2007/8). dry docks. slipways. The Borough’s support infrastructure includes mooring and land storage facilities. 192 WATERFRONT . subject to their impact upon flood-risk. piers and other landing stages. stairs and other waterway access points.Those relevant to riverbus sites are shown on the proposals maps.

statutory agencies and householders (supplemented as necessary by planning obligations) 11. SIM3 To use relevant planning powers in the implementation of the plan. Best Value requirements are a means by which local authorities are held accountable by their communities for the quality and efficiency of their services.2 The successful implementation of the plan will depend on the commitment of the Council.3 11. relevant trends.4 ii. Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies 11. partnership working. Consultation is necessary to ensure that the requirements of Best Value in Local Government and the Human Rights Act (2000) are met.The general policies for Implementation are: SIM1 To monitor and review the UDP regularly to ensure it remains up-to-date. Planning System reforms under the 2004 Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act. the Council will use enforcement powers to ensure compliance with planning policies. SIM2 To attract the necessary resources to implement the plan. other public sector agencies and the private. as set out in Planning Policy Statement 12: Local Development Frameworks (2004). the Council will consult widely on the UDP and other planning documents and planning applications. The Council’s own resources iv. to aid the implementation of the plan. The Council will use its planning powers. or on behalf of. Investment decisions by private developers. including monitoring and reviewing. where relevant and appropriate. will need to be monitored. consultation and community liaison. For the policies in the plan to remain up-to-date and relevant to the changing circumstances of the Borough. Land owners.5 In order to ensure that everybody has an opportunity to participate in the planning process.6 11. attracting resources. community and voluntary sectors to improving the living and working environment. The resources necessary to implement the Plan include the following: i.11. These would contain various Local Development Documents 11.7 IMPLEMENTATION 193 . 11. European and national government funds and grants iii. On the basis of these trends the Council can reach a judgement about the continuing usefulness of the Plan’s policies and when a further review or replacement Plan is required. such as the rate of house building.This will be carried out by.1 The implementation of the plan can be carried out in number of ways. and through enforcement. the Council. include the introduction of Local Development Frameworks. government. including the Council and public sector agencies All of the above need to be mobilised through partnerships and co-operative working between the Council and others. its Strategic Partners. corporate initiatives. IMPLEMENTATION GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT 11. In particular where development is carried out without planning permission or contrary to conditions attached to a permission. continue to work in partnerships and consult widely on the UDP and other planning documents.

8 The Annual Monitoring Report.These will be used to monitor the effectiveness of the plan through an Annual Monitoring Report. setting the standards for community participation. including progress assessment against the indicators and targets in this Chapter. the proposed changes to the planning system would require the Council to replace this UDP with a Local Development Framework.10 To assist in this process and in accordance with Best Value Performance Indicators a comprehensive set of key targets and indicators have been set out in Table IM1.the London-wide mechanism for data collection on planning permissions and completions. v. 11. Changing national. The availability and uptake of developable land in the Borough. iii. industrial restructuring.Targets and indicators derived from the Greenwich Strategy (2003) are also included where appropriate. the policies and proposals of the Plan will be monitored and reviewed on a regular basis.11 The Council needs both to observe and analyse changes that are taking place in the planning environment and to assess whether the Plan’s policies and proposals are being successfully implemented.(LDDs) that replace the Unitary Development Plan. will report on a range of matters. The results of more detailed local studies such as planning briefs. not least the extent to which policies are being successfully implemented. maintained or changed or where the policy is serving no useful purpose. Continued public consultation. and provide a projection for future housing delivery. National and European legislative changes. shopping and recreational behaviour. In addition. The aim of the reforms. It will also report on progress against the LDS production schedule for LDDs.g.These LDDs propose to involve the community at an early stage of preparation. Local trends and problems such as changes in traffic movement. This approach to LDF/UDP performance measurement is supported by the London Plan (2004). local employment and condition of dwellings. Policies Monitoring and Review IM1 The Council will both monitor changes in the planning environment and review the effectiveness of the policies and proposals of the Plan. One of the Documents would be a Statement of Community Involvement.9 Planning Policy Statement 12: Local Development Frameworks (2004) recommends the use of objectives and targets to assist in monitoring whether the Plan is achieving its objectives. 194 IMPLEMENTATION . another LDD. 11. and amend them where necessary. External influences such as demographic and economic trends e. and in part derive from. the Sustainability Appraisal indicates the impact each policy in the plan is likely to have on the environment. as well as those required by government. ii. This can help to identify where policies need to be strengthened. The Council is also required to keep under review matters that may affect the development and use of land within the Borough over the Plan period.These changes are made up of a number of factors: i. vitality of shopping centres. vi. iv. In addition. usually within three years of its formal adoption. Accordingly. regional and strategic planning guidance. the London Development Database . Monitoring information will also feed into. and national trends such as birth and death rates. amongst others. 11. is to achieve greater local ownership and legitimacy for the Council’s land use policies. Reason 11. and vii.

at all levels of implementation of this Plan. the Sustainable Communities Plan in the Thames Gateway could make a significant contribution to UDP implementation resources as it is likely to receive considerable Government funding. In addition to private investment by households and businesses. • Spending by Government Departments and other public service providers including the Housing Corporation and English Partnerships. These funds will assist in addressing issues including skills and training. • Regional and sub-regional government spending including Transport for London and the London Development Agency. public and private.13 The Council’s Economic Development Strategy 2002-07 identifies that over £180 million regeneration funding has been secured along with an estimated £2 billion of public and private sector investment.17 The Greenwich Partnership is the Local Strategic Partnership for Greenwich Borough. • Investment by infrastructure and utilities service providers.14 The availability of developable land is an important resource to implement the UDP. Partnership IM3 The Council will work in partnership with the community and voluntary sector as well as with other bodies and private businesses.16 The Council is committed to working in partnership. SRB) and the National Lottery. 11. 11. • Investment by private land-owners and developers. • Council Capital and Revenue Spending Strategies. with the community and voluntary sector as well as with other bodies and private businesses. Most land in the borough is privately owned. housing.Resources IM2 The Council will seek all available resources. Financial resources include: • European Social Fund and European Regional Development Fund grant funding.15 Finally. community safety. the public sector contribution in Greenwich is likely to provide a substantial amount of development investment over the Plan period. although the Council and the London Development Agency are two of a number of public sector agencies that own land which will become available for development in the Borough. and • Community benefits secured via planning obligation (see Policy SC2). 11. for the implementation of the policies and proposals in this Plan. Reason 11.12 The 2004 Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act requires planning authorities to have regard to the likely availability of resources when preparing their Plans. the Single Programme (incorporating remaining Single Regeneration Budget. 11. environmental improvements and community capacity building. building on the success of the former Greenwich Waterfront Development Partnership. The availability of resources is one of the main determinants of what the Plan can achieve. community and voluntary sectors with the Council and the public sector as a IMPLEMENTATION 195 . • Targeted regeneration funding sources including Neighbourhood Renewal. access. business support. It brings together the Borough’s business. It is Council policy to pursue all available funding for appropriate schemes. Reason 11.

It will oversee implementation of the Greenwich Strategy (2003) (See Part 1 paragraph 5. older people and minority ethnic groups are given an opportunity to participate in planning decisions. These include the Thames Gateway London Partnership and Thames Estuary Partnership covering parts of the Thames Gateway.20 The Council is also a member of a number of partnerships that cover areas larger than the Borough.18 Town Centre Managers for the Greenwich area.The Thames Gateway London Partnership will play a key role in the development of the East London Sub Regional Development Framework. a partnership between local authorities. Area strategies. Consult with adjoining occupiers. advice and guidance to those interested in or affected by development in Greenwich. people with disabilities.The Partnership includes members from the Council. 11. transport providers. 11. Government legislation requires all planning authorities to consult local populations. It is particularly important to ensure that disadvantaged groups such as women.The Council participates in the activities of the Partnership to bring about sustainable physical. and adjoining areas of Essex and Kent and English Partnerships. London. iii. the Greenwich Public Services Forum. 196 IMPLEMENTATION .21 An integral part of the planning system is regular public consultation and liaison.There is also a town centre manager for Thamesmead who oversees the long term development of Thamesmead town centre. businesses and passenger interests to improve bus and rail services.The Council is also a member of SELTRANS (The South East London Transport Strategy). the public. Consultation and Community Liaison IM4 The Council will: i. and the Greenwich Community Network Steering Group. other planning studies including Conservation Area designation and on major transport infrastructure and traffic management schemes. London Development Agency and the Council. ii. The Council will seek to provide planning information. statutory authorities and other stakeholders when preparing a land use plan. 11. operators. Reason 11. In particular. Thames Gateway London Partnership is a sub-regional alliance comprising local authorities and Training and Enterprise Councils in east and southeast London.19 A Woolwich Regeneration Agency was set up with support from the Department for Communities and Local Government. social and environmental regeneration of Thames Gateway. and Engage with statutory bodies and other agencies as appropriate.Woolwich and Eltham work to improve their town centres to better serve local communities and businesses.whole. Engage with the community. 11. and proposed legislative changes would further strengthen consultation arrangements. ranging from neighbour consultations for small residential extensions to widespread public consultations on major applications. This consultation is essential to ensure that everyone who may be affected by a Plan has an opportunity to put their point of view and have an opportunity to influence the process of change.22 The Council will maintain its policy of consulting those affected on planning applications. and ensure that their views are taken into account in making planning decisions. with specialist advice from the Greenwich Council for Racial Equality and the Greenwich Association of Disabled People. community and environmental groups as relevant on planning applications. economic. the Bexley and Greenwich Chamber of Commerce.26). local businesses and other stakeholders in preparing Planning briefs. to reduce dependence on the car and increase accessibility to jobs. the Council will seek to improve the quality and quantity of planning material available online by the end of 2005.

To enter on privately-owned land for enforcement purposes. Following the landowners default. IMPLEMENTATION 197 . Strategies adopted or being prepared by the Council are identified in Part One paragraph 5. 11. To serve a stop notice. to enter land and carry out the remedial work required by an enforcement notice. and vi. in particular their spatial and land use dimensions. Enforcement IM5 In circumstances where it is considered necessary in the public interest. On a wider level the Council will carry out consultations and have regular liaison with various statutory bodies. 11. if conditions attached to a permission are not complied with. any activity to which the accompanying enforcement notice relates. through to more focused strategies on capital expenditure as expressed in Housing Investment Programmes and the Local Implementation Plan (for transport). the Council will not hesitate to take planning enforcement action where appropriate. and in compliance with government guidance. a planning injunction. or where conditions attached to consents or permissions are not observed or where other breaches of planning control have been committed.23 The Council will also carry out public consultations in the preparation of planning briefs for individual development sites and on other proposals.28 In the interests of the general implementation of this Plan. iv.28. To serve an enforcement notice.1 and 5. v. and to charge the owner for the costs incurred. from Council wide strategies on issues such as regeneration. which can prohibit. jointly and through individual services (see Part One paragraphs 2. Reason 11. almost immediately.11. To serve a breach of condition notice if there is a failure to comply with a condition imposed on a grant of planning permission.25 Policies in the UDP draw on a range of other Council strategies.The Greenwich Strategy is the overarching plan for all these strategies.26 The Council has powers granted under the Town and Country Planning Acts to take action when development is started without planning permission.27 The Council’s main enforcement powers are: i. Corporate Initiatives 11. the Council will take enforcement action against those who undertake development or carry out works without the appropriate consent or permission under the Planning and related Acts. ii. 11. The Council and its partners will contribute to at many levels. plans and initiatives.There are a wide range of such initiatives that can be pursued. To serve a listed building enforcement notice. stating the required steps to remedy an alleged breach within a time limit. iii. or when other breaches of planning control have been committed. specifying the alleged contravention and requiring steps to be taken within a stated period to remedy it.26). and in turn the UDP assists in the delivery of those strategies.24 The implementation of the Plan can also be achieved through corporate initiatives within the Council.

Number and percentage of dwellings completed annually that achieve the Building Research Establishment’s ‘EcoHomes’ excellent rating.3 Provide at least 35% of total housing provision Additional number of affordable units provided annually. Benefits & Services To ensure adequate land use provision for Number of relevant planning applications granted/ refused community. Indicator and Monitoring Information 2 2. Percentage of new build dwellings (including affordable housing) on developments of 25 units or more at full wheelchair standard or capable of being so adapted.100 net additional dwellings over the period 1997 to 2016 (target inclusive of vacant and non-selfcontained accommodation) (Policy SH1). 2016 (Policy SH5). B1.000 m2 gross).2 3 3. Source: the Building Research Establishment.1 3. To provide a mix of dwellings by size and type Number and percentage of dwellings by number of (Policy H15). Additional number of dwellings permitted and completed annually. Jobs & the Local Economy To protect sites in designated employment areas.5 3. and sites elsewhere in active employment use. to serve areas experiencing significant new development (Policy SC3).1 2.1 Community Needs.6 198 IMPLEMENTATION . To ensure 10 per cent of new build dwellings (including affordable housing) on developments of 25 units or more are at full wheelchair standard or capable of being so adapted (Policy H19).2 3. from change of use to non-employment activity (‘employment uses’ as defined in para 2. B2. 3.25 hectares). To increase the quantity of modern business floorspace in the borough (Policy SJ1). monitored by permissions and completion data.1) (Policy SJ4). health care and education facilities which involve a change of use. as affordable housing between 1997 and monitored from planning permissions and completions. The percentage of dwellings delivered on previously developed land through planning permissions and completions (Best Value Indicator BV106). Housing To make provision for at least 16. monitored from planning permissions and completions. bedrooms and by dwelling type. B8 floorspace (i) permitted (ii) completed (schemes exceeding 1.Table IM1: Targets and Indicators for UDP Monitoring UDP Objective ~ Target 1 1. To achieve a high standard of design quality and environmental performance in new housing development (Policy H7). Area of land designated or in use for employment purposes (including employment Site Schedules) where planning permission is granted for non-employment uses (sites exceeding 0. To exceed 90% of dwellings provided on previously developed land (Policy H1).4 3.

5 To protect Sites of Nature Conservation Importance from inappropriate development (Policy O18).4 4. and those refused that would have caused severence. Greenwich Strategy).1 4. 4.000 sqm and/or proportion of energy generated from 10 residential units. Number of relevant planning permissions granted where they maintain the Green Chain Walk or riverside walk/cycleway networks. Greenwich Strategy). To protect the ‘Green Chain Walk’ and riverside footpath (Policies O14 and O15).This will be assessed by scrutiny of Environmental Impact Assessments (Policy SE2).3 To improve energy efficiency and increase the On developments of at least 1. Indicator and Monitoring Information Designated open space lost to non-ancillary development. Number of applications where an Environmental Impact Assessment concludes there would be an unacceptable impact on the environment. Area (hectares) of land designated as a Sites of Nature Conservation Importance or Site of Special Scientific Interest that is lost to non-ancillary development. Number of planning permissions implemented along the route that make contributions towards the riverside footpath and cycleway. To complete the riverside footpath and cycleway as part of any development proposal adjacent to the route (Policy O17. (Policies E18 and E19) To prevent development that would have an unacceptably damaging impact on the environment. from the forthcoming Borough Open Space Strategy. To protect viable existing and encourage new The percentage of the Borough designated as open space provision for leisure and sports facilities and accessible to the public.3 4.2 5. the percentage and number that renewable sources (Policies E8 and E9) incorporate renewable energy production equipment to provide at least 10% of the predicted energy requirements. SO4).2 Open Spaces To prevent inappropriate development on identified open space (Policies SO2. Monitor via the Green Chain Working Party. 5 5.1 Number of planning permissions granted contrary to the advice of the Environment Agency on either flood defence or water quality grounds. IMPLEMENTATION 199 . 5.UDP Objective ~ Target 4 4. Environmental Protection To prevent development within fluvial flood risk areas or catchment areas where inadequate flood defence or attenuation measures are taken. Baseline data to be derived (Policy SO1.

and reduce the number of listed buildings at risk (Policies SD3. To increase the retail and leisure floorspace in Woolwich.1 8. 6.UDP Objective ~ Target 6 6.TC2.2 200 IMPLEMENTATION .4 To preserve the archaeological heritage of the Number of approved Archaeological Assessment Borough (Policies D30 & D31). Indicator and Monitoring Information Number of Design Statements provided by applicants of major schemes.1 7.TC3. 7 7.D22). non-A1 and vacant units in defined shopping frontages (Source: Experian GOAD and/or bi-annual surveys). Financial or land contribution by Section 106 legal agreement towards Waterfront Transit.TC9 and TC14).1 Design & Conservation To ensure high quality design of all development particularly major schemes. To preserve and enhance the character of Number of published Conservation Area Appraisals and designated Conservation Areas (Policies SD3. Civic Trust).2 6. Eltham and Greenwich Town Centres over the lifetime of the Plan (Policies STC1. Percentage of A1. STC2.2 7. The number of buildings on the English Heritage Listed Buildings at Risk Register Success rate in defending appeals against refusal of consent for inappropriate development requiring Listed Building or Conservation Area Consent.g. Town Centres To maintain viable. Management Proposals.3 8 8. Movement To complete the Docklands Light Railway (DLR) link to Woolwich Arsenal (Policy M8). To implement car-parking provision in accordance with the maximum standards set out in Policies M23 to M27.3 6. Number of schemes nominated for and/or awarded a design award (e. D18 . Statements. vibrant and thriving Town Centres (Major. To complete the Waterfront Transit from Greenwich to Abbey Wood (Policy M12). New A1 retail and D2 indoor leisure floorspace permitted/completed (i) within defined centres and (ii) outside defined centres on sites not allocated for retail use (proposals exceeding 1. Progress of works on the Woolwich DLR extension and station terminus. D16 & D17). District & Local Centres) with a range of shops and services (Policies STC1. STC2). To preserve all Listed Buildings from neglect or inappropriate changes. those located on key development sites and those that contribute strongly to the image of the Borough (Policies SD1.000 m2 gross). The proportion of planning permissions that exceed the maximum applicable parking standards. D1 and D2).

1 Tourism Indicator and Monitoring Information To protect viable existing and encourage Number of Tourism-related planning applications new provision for tourism. and providing new waterway support facilities and infrastructure to enable use of the Thames and Deptford Creek for river-dependent uses (Policy W7) To reduce the amount of vacant and/or derelict land in the Waterfront Area. Number of planning applications for major new tourist facilities granted/refused within. loss of entertainment facilities. (Policy SW1) Number and type of water support facilities gained or lost through planning application decisions. arts. (Policies ST1 and ST2) existing facilities).UDP Objective ~ Target 9 9. Monitor through Planning and Building Control records. Use the National Land Use Database and Council Geographic Information System records to establish a baseline and thereafter continue to monitor.e.1 10. designated Town Centres and other sites designated in the UDP. 9.2 IMPLEMENTATION 201 . or outside. Area of vacant and/or derelict land remaining. cultural and granted/refused that involve a change of use (i.2 10 10. To locate major new tourist facilities within established Town Centres or on sites identified in the Plan (Policy T1) Waterfront Protecting existing.

202 IMPLEMENTATION .

SITE PROPOSAL SCHEDULES Proposals Map Annotation Community Needs and Services Jobs Housing Open Spaces Movement Mixed Uses cb j h o m mu UDP Page 204 205-207 208 209-211 212-213 214-221 SITE PROPOSAL SCHEDULES 203 .

The existing adventure playground to remain in the interim.61) Vacant Significant Community Uses.79) School playing grounds / vacant Secondary school and ancillary uses THAMESMEAD cb3 Community/ Civic site. See the Tripcock Point Development Framework. hotel and ancillary retail.10) Existing Use Adventure Playground Proposal Community buildings Description The long term aim is to provide community buildings on these sites to serve the Meridian Estate. Outline planning permission granted May 2006 for 2000 dwellings. cb2 Thomas Tallis Secondary School (2.COMMUNITY NEEDS AND SERVICES No. Replacement of the existing school with expanded capacity for Year 7 and Post 16.Town Centre uses including residential and B1 (office) uses will be considered. 03/2618/O). Part of an area at risk of Fluvial Flooding. cb4 Tripcock Point school site (1. If the Study concludes that all or part of the site is not needed for Community Facilities. See the proposed Kidbrooke Area Development SPD and Policy H4 (Kidbrooke Development Area). cb1 Site (hectares) Site on the corner of Horseferry Place & Thames Street (0.That part of the site in Metropolitan Open Land should be used for open space activities ancillary to the school. service and business uses (ref. a school. Thamesmere Drive (0. development subject to a Flood Risk assessment in line with Environment Agency advice. and may involve Town Centre uses to facilitate community provision The site is subject to a Community Services Study as part of the Tripcock Point Planning Application Section 106 Agreement.87) Vacant Primary School 204 SITE SCHEDULES: COMMUNITY NEEDS AND SERVICES . adopted September 2003.

car workshops. Multi-storey pre-war industrial / commercial buildings . B8 vacant with Commercial. j4 17-37 & 18-36 Bowater Road. commercial j5 Thames Barrier Approach.31) Storage. B2. Wall and Anchor and Hope including Cory’s B8 Lane (1. B8 Industry B1b/c. 1-3 Faraday Way (1. Was mostly B2. scale ancillary retailing and services. (1.93) barge works/ Warehousing/ Offices/part vacant Angerstein Triangle. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). site. Eastmoor Street and Westmoor Streets (2. j1 Site (hectares) White Hart Triangle. No. Community j2 Riverside between Lombard Industry Industry B1b/c. Listed former Council depot building to be retained and re-used. If buildings retained: Offices. vocational training. and not compromise Deptford Creek ecology. White Hart Lane (14. B2. Proposed uses should exploit the potential of the riverside wharves. 01/1071). Public realm improvements required. studio workshops (B1).retention preferred if practicable.68) Part vacant. Development must relate sympathetically with adjoining listed warehouses and Mumford’s Mill. Business Units (B1) Bookers warehouse and former petrol station SITE SCHEDULES: JOBS 205 . B1 uses. offices. studio industry.87) Business Centre Offices. Construction Industry B1b/c.000sqm industrial uses phased 2003-2010 (ref. Part of the site has planning permission for light industry and associated offices. B8 plus ancillary services. Eastmoor Street is the main visitor access to the Thames Barrier.JOBS NB: Employment uses form a significant part of the uses sought on a number of allocated Mixed Used sites.62) B8 vehicle storage Light industry/ Warehousing B1b/c. j6 25-81 Greenwich High Road Greenwich Light Industry.14) Existing Use Proposal Description Under construction with Site j13 for up to 106.711 sqm office and business redevelopment. Adjoins Crossrail works site to which it provides safeguarded road access (see Site m4a). Scope for higher density and multi-storey business development. Bramshot Avenue (4. small breakers yards. j3 Former railway sidings refurbished as a depot with open storage. Small (Skillions). Preference for the retention of Cory’s works. Greenwich Business Centre should be retained if redevelopment for the permitted or an alternative business redevelopment does not prove viable. Planning permission at Skillions for 26.

JOBS
NB: Employment uses form a significant part of the uses sought on a number of allocated Mixed Used sites.
No. j7 Site (hectares) Brookmarsh Industrial Estate & Phoenix Wharf, Lower Norman Road (0.93) Existing Use Proposal Description Longer term there may be scope for comprehensive redevelopment around Greenwich station, whereupon this site may have scope for more intensive mixed business and residential use. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). 1960-1970’s Light Industry/ Small small business / Business Units/ industrial units, Offices (B1). builders merchant.

j8

55-71 Norman Road & railway arches (0.42)

Builders yard & Light Industry/ Small Longer term there may be scope for railway arches Business Units (B1). comprehensive redevelopment around Greenwich station, whereupon this site may have scope for more intensive mixed business and residential use. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). Various commercial including lorry depot and a vacant site Employment (B class uses) Outline planning permission granted for 18,600 sqm B1c use on the vacant “Gateway site” as part of the Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula (ref. 02/2903). See The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (Nov 2002, being updated). Buffer strip between Aggregates zone and Millennium Urban Village. Outline planning permission for employment use. Small corner site west of Co-op funeral parlour on Woolwich Road roundabout, providing access to industrial uses in Warspite Road; residential and industrial uses under construction in Ruston Road.

j9

Site to east of A102 (M), west of Bugsby’s Way (4.78)

j10

Horn Link Way / Pear Tree Way north of Bugsby’s Way (1.16) J/o Warspite Road and Rushton Road / Woolwich Road (0.40)

Vacant / open storage

Employment / light industry (B1)

j11

Vacant

Industry/ employment (B1b/c, B8)

j12

Harvey’s site, Ramac Way (0.83)

Vacant

Industry (B1b/c, B8) May be affected by Waterfront Transit route. Scope to refurbish/redevelop adjoining Ramac Industrial Estate.

THAMESMEAD j13 Land at Central Way, Nathan Construction Way, Purland Road, east of site previously Belmarsh Prison (10.50) vacant Industry (B1b/c, B2, B8). Under construction with Site j1 for up to 106,000 sqm industrial uses phased 2003-2010 (ref. 01/1071). Site provides safeguarded road access to Crossrail works (see Site m5).

206

SITE SCHEDULES: JOBS

JOBS
NB: Employment uses form a significant part of the uses sought on a number of allocated Mixed Used sites.
No. j14 Site (hectares) Site fronting Nathan Way (1.05) 4-40 Nathan Way Existing Use Vacant Proposal Industry (B1b/c, B2, B8) Industry, offices (B1, B2, B8) Hotel, light industry, business (B1, B8), other non-retail commercial Description Previously safeguarded site for road link to White Hart Triangle Land, now released for industrial use. Close to Plumstead rail station. May be affected by proposed Crossrail safeguarding. Outline planning permission for a hotel and associated A3 use (ref. 01/2523). Partly below level of A206. Close to Plumstead rail station.

j15

Vacant (0.52)

j16

Site to the east of Plumstead Bus Garage (0.86)

Vacant

SITE SCHEDULES: JOBS

207

HOUSING
NB: Housing will form a significant part of the uses sought on most allocated Mixed Use sites.
No. h1 Site (hectares) Site west of Tilfen Offices, Harrow Manor Way (1.12) McMillan Street (0.15) Eltham pools (0.37) National maritime Museum storage site, Nelson Mandela Road (1.72) Existing Use Open Land Proposal Residential Description Scope to develop in conjunction with Gallions Housing Association offices if these become operationally surplus. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). Subject to relocation of the pools as part of the leisure centre permitted in Archery Road (see site mu2) Outline planning permission for residential use (2004). Development will need to include completion of the wildlife link between the two parts of Nature Conservation Site nc7.

h2 h3

Various

Housing

Swimming pool Residential

h4

Museum storage

Residential

h5

Thomas Tallis school site (2.40)

Secondary school and grounds Housing and open space

Predominately See the pending Kidbrooke Area housing, ancillary Development SPD and Policy H4 community services, (Kidbrooke Development Area) retail Predominately See the pending Kidbrooke Area housing, ancillary Development SPD and Policy H4 community services, (Kidbrooke Development Area) Wingfield Primary School Predominately housing, ancillary community services, Holy Family School See the pending Kidbrooke Area Development SPD and Policy H4 (Kidbrooke Development Area). Re-alignment of Kidbrooke Park Road in agreement with TfL. Part of the area is at risk of Fluvial Flooding, development subject to a Flood Risk assessment in line with Environment Agency advice.

h6

West Ferrier precinct (21.88)

h7

East Ferrier Estate (19.58)

Housing, open space, leisure

THAMESMEAD h8 Land adjacent Broadwater Dock (0.77) Vacant Residential Planning permission for 70 flats (2006). Proposals also include improvements to surrounding open space, infilling and renovation of dock.

208

SITE SCHEDULES: HOUSING

OPEN SPACES
No. o1 Site (hectares) Woolwich Common Temporary MoD building site, Ha Ha Road (3.47) Existing Use Temporary open space/ vacant land Proposal Extension to Common Description The site was formerly part of Woolwich Common and has been occupied by temporary buildings used by the MoD since the 2nd World War. It is intended that the site should revert to open space use when the temporary buildings are vacated by the MoD, to reinstate the continuity of the Common. The Hervey Road playing field lies in an area of local park deficiency.The playing field was originally acquired for a new secondary school development. If the site is surplus to educational requirements as a playing field consideration should be given to its reversion to the original purpose for which it was agreed. If the site is surplus to education needs generally, the site should remain in open space uses, consistent with Policies O7 and O9. See the pending Kidbrooke Area Development SPD and Policy H4 (Kidbrooke Development Area)

o2

Hervey Road Playing Field (4.80)

Education/ Playing Field

Local Park

o3

Sutcliffe Park extension (6.50)

Housing and open space

Open space extension from Sutcliffe Park to Kidbrooke railway station

o4

University of Greenwich Avery Hill Campus, Mansion Site (7.49) University of Greenwich Avery Hill Campus, Southwood Site (7.09)

University University accommodation expansion

Major Developed Site in Metropolitan Open Land for University expansion. See Policy O3. Major Developed Site in Metropolitan Open Land. Planning permission (2003) for 6,500m2 net increase in teaching floorspace. See Policy O3.

o5

University University accommodation expansion

FOOTPATH AND CYCLEWAY PROPOSALS o6 Riverside Walk, Borough boundary to Millennium Quay (N/A) Industry Riverside Walkway It is the Council’s objective to create a continuous riverside walkway alongside the River Thames from Deptford to Thamesmead. It is proposed that the ‘missing links’ will be completed as and when proposals are brought forward for redevelopment of riverside sites. (Policy O16). See also Site Proposal mu32.

SITE SCHEDULES: OPEN SPACES

209

OPEN SPACES
No. o7 Site (hectares) Riverside Walk, Deptford Creek to Horseferry Place) (N/A) Riverside Walk, Anchor Wharf to Point Wharf (N/A) Existing Use Industry/ vacant Riverside footpath, industrial uses Proposal Riverside Walkway Description As proposal o6

o8

Walkway improvement including riverside amenity open spaces and viewing area.

Environmental improvements will be carried out to the existing riverside footpath. Opportunities will be taken to realign the footpath alongside the River whenever possible. Small riverside open spaces and viewing areas will be created where opportunities arise. (Policy O16). As for proposal o6.

o9

Riverside Walk,Thames Barrier to Warspite Road (N/A) Riverside Walk, Woolwich Dockyard to Woolwich Ferry (N/A) Riverside Walk, Ferry Approach Link (N/A) Green Chain Walk, Butterfly Lane to Footscray Road (N/A)

Industry

Riverside Walkway

o10

Industry

Riverside Walkway

As for proposal o6. See site proposal mu6. As for proposal o6. The Council, in co-operation with the other constituent authorities of the GCJC, has way-marked a spinal network in the Green Chain (“Green Chain Walk”). Most of the network already exists in the form of public footpaths or pathways through public open space.These proposals cover various ‘missing links’ which will extend or improve the network and create circular and continuous routes through the Green Chain open land within GC.The Council intends to implement them as and when the opportunity arises and subject to reaching agreement with the landowners. (Policy O15). As for proposal o12.

o11 o12

Depot Private sportsground and playing fields

Riverside Walkway Link Footpath

o13

Green Chain Walk, Footscray Road to Court Road (N/A) Green Chain Walk, Dothill Road to Oxleas Wood and to Bexley at Woodlands Farm (N/A)

Private Golf Course Community farm, footpath

Footpath

o14

Footpath

As for proposal o12.

210

SITE SCHEDULES: OPEN SPACES

The canal will in parts be provided with “wet margins” for ecological reasons. The proposal includes Thameside Walk landscaping. Canals provide a setting for footpath and cycleway links adjacent development. O9.) Vacant District Park (part) o17 Riverside Walk. adjacent to Tripcock Park Areas 6/7 (N/A) Canal system. O18. level and type of public access are to be determined (Policies W4.6 ha.20 ha.OPEN SPACES No. SITE SCHEDULES: OPEN SPACES 211 . Layout of park must take account of Thames Gateway Bridge (Site m2). Park includes site of Nature Conservation Importance where management arrangements. o16 Tripcock Park East (c.) Vacant District Park (part) This proposed District Park will serve the Western part of Thamesmead. Area 4 & 6 North (N/A) Riverside Walk. Layout of park must take account of Thames Gateway Bridge (Site m2). Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description THAMESMEAD o15 Tripcock Park West (c. Proposal forms part of Gallions Reach Urban Village. O24). Area 6 (N/A) Vacant Riverside Promenade Riverside Footpath o18 Vacant Footpath Vacant o19 Drainage canal The canal system in Area 6 will Link to Thamesmere Extension Lake in Area 4 via the Twin Tumps.The system also links through to the Gallions Reach Urban village. It will include Riverside Walk. The proposed District Park with Tripcock Park West will serve western part of Thamesmead. Landscaping of river walk to include footpaths Landscaping to include footpath.

MOVEMENT
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description RIVER CROSSINGS m1 Woolwich Rail Crossing (N/A) Various Extension from the Royal Docks to Woolwich Arsenal Options include heavy rail link. Remains safeguarded but may be reviewed as the DLR Woolwich extension is being implemented (see m4). Road crossing with fixed public transport link - possibly DLR or guided bus/tram. Public Inquiry closed 2006, decision awaited. A new crossing between North Greenwich and Silvertown Way in L.B. Newham. Should the crossing proceed the Council will require tunnels not a bridge. Tunnel under the River Thames, terminus in Woolwich town centre adjacent Woolwich Arsenal mainline station (see site mu14). Scheduled to open 2009.

m2

Thames Gateway Bridge (N/A)

Various

Multi-modal bridge crossing

m3

Blackwall Crossing (N/A)

Various

River Crossing

m4

Docklands Light Railway Woolwich (N/A)

Various

Extension from City Airport to Woolwich

m5

Crossrail (N/A)

Various

New cross-London Tunnel under the Thames emerging rail link at Plumstead where it joins existing surface line. Station at Abbey Wood. Potential for a station at Woolwich Arsenal. Note the Safeguarding direction also secures access to works sites through the Woolwich Arsenal (Arsenal Way and Wallis Road via Duke of Wellington Avenue) and the White Hart Triangle (White Hart Avenue and North Road).

ROAD SCHEMES m6 Deptford Church Street (N/A) Road Junction Realignment Junction realignment to promote use of Deptford Church Street/A2, and assist in relieving Greenwich of through traffic. See Policy M15. Filter lane provision from Well Hall Road into Shooters Hill Road to enable better bus movement. Subject to TfL approval.

m7

Shooters Hill Road / Well Hall Road (N/A)

Road

Filter lane

212

SITE SCHEDULES: MOVEMENT

MOVEMENT
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description RIVERBUS m8 m9 Thamesmead (N/A) Greenwich Pier (N/A) Vacant Pier Pier / shore facilities To serve Thamesmead town centre and Tripcock Point (see Site mu40). Enhancement of pier/shore facilities Planning Permission granted subject to a legal agreement.

RAIL FREIGHT m10 Land at Angerstein Wharf (4.62) Aggregates Site to continue to be used for rail freight Grant aid available under Section 8 of the Railways act 1974. See Policy M37.

m11

Former Plumstead Coal Yard Storage and (3.21) builders yard

Site with rail sidings Temporary planning permission for with potential for storage and aggregates use. rail freight use Adjacent White Hart Triangle industrial development (see Site j1). Safeguarded works and tunnel portal site for the Crossrail project (see Site m5). Also a Strategic Rail Freight Site.

CYCLING m12 Riverside Walk (N/A) River Frontage Thames Cycle Route Cycle route to be incorporated into the existing proposed riverside walk. See also relevant open space proposals. Detailed examination of schemes required.

SITE SCHEDULES: MOVEMENT

213

MIXED USES
No. mu1 Site (hectares) Coronet Cinema & Tudor Parade, Well Hall Road (0.43) Existing Use Vacant cinema, retail use and residential units above the shops, petrol filling station Proposal Community uses, retail and housing including a significant element of affordable housing Description See the Coronet Cinema Site Planning Brief (2004). Development must include retention of grade II listed cinema building. Residential will need to form part of an integrated and comprehensive regeneration of the site. Planning permission for a leisure centre and Council local service centre (2005, ref.05/2105). Under construction. Site located with the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site and in a Conservation Area. See the Stockwell Street Development Brief (2000). Planning permission for offices, industrial, work/live units, residential and A1/A3 retail (ref. 02/2786).

mu2

Former depot, Archery Road (0.63) Stockwell Street Site (0.81)

Council Depot Leisure centre with swimming pool

mu3

Offices, indoor market, outdoor weekend market Vacant

Mix of town centre uses

mu4

Deals Gateway, 6-42 Blackheath Road (0.51)

Commercial use including B1 on road frontage, elsewhere residential, educational or commercial Residential-led mixed use development, supporting amenity space including a continuous public walk and cycleway along the Thames, and activitygenerating service, leisure and community uses especially on the riverfront. Potential for a hotel and cruise liner terminal. Flats, hotel or other water-frontanimating uses and riverside walk

mu5

Greenwich Reach East (3.14)

Vacant industry/ scrap/ aggregates depot

Creekmouth offers a deep water mooring suitable for cruise liners. Strategic view needs to be safeguarded. Riverwall improvements required. Resolution to grant planning permission (ref. 05/1386) for 980 flats, retail including supermarket and food & drink uses, subject to a legal agreement. Scheme includes a Creekmouth pedestrian bridge.

mu6

St Mary’s and Mastpond Wharves, Woolwich Church Street (1.50)

Vacant

Planning permission for 4 storey hotel (99/0136) and 181 flats (99/0959). Development to retain slipways and safeguard river views from St. Mary’s church. Flood defence improvements required. Flats completed 2006.

214

SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES

MIXED USES
No. mu7 Site (hectares) Blackwall Lane / Pelton Street (0.28) Existing Use Various, vacant school Proposal Description Commercial uses, Development should enhance and residential including support East Greenwich District affordable housing Centre. See Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002, being updated). Town centre commercial/ business use(s) See Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 update, being updated) and Town Centre Policies. Scope for site assembly including Riverside House. Development should complement and form an activity link between Powis Street and the leisure/tourism uses in Warren Lane and the Royal Arsenal. See Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 draft, being updated) and Town Centre Policies. Active uses including retail and leisure at ground floor level on Hare Street and Powis Street. Former Co-op store is locally listed. Development of sub-areas should not compromise a more comprehensive development approach. See Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 draft, being updated). Site is in Metropolitan Open Land and a Conservation Area. No proposals to exceed existing footprint of buildings. Presumption in favour of conversion where practicable rather than demolition and new build. See Goldie Leigh Hospital Planning Brief (2000).

mu8

Callis Yard (0.28)

Council depot

mu9

Macbean Centre and former Temporary Woolwich Polytechnic school, market (1.06) pound and community uses

Mixed development of town centre uses including retail, possible covered shopping mall

mu10 Land enclosing Mortgramit Square (Hare & Powis Street) (1.27)

Various commercial, retail and residential uses & vacant premises.

Mixed retail and town centre uses, residential above including affordable housing

mu11 Goldie Leigh Hospital (7.32)

Hospital

Continued health provision, surplus footprint potentially residential

mu12 Land to north of Eltham High Street (1.85)

Various

Town Centre uses See Eltham Town Centre Development including residential, Framework (1997, being updated). principally retail at ground level

SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES

215

MIXED USES
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Various commercial, part vacant Proposal Mixed use development including leisure A3, hotel/tourist facilities, residential. Ancillary A1 only. Description Development should complement and form an activity link between Powis Street and the Royal Arsenal, and must respect the setting of the adjacent Royal Arsenal listed buildings and conservation area. See Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 draft, being updated). Resolution to grant outline planning permission for 2,517 flats, hotel, leisure including 10-screen cinema and ancillary retail/food& drink uses (ref. 05/2363/O, also covers part of Site mu24). The Secretary of State granted powers for the construction of the DLR Woolwich extension in February 2004. Listed buildings including the former Woolwich Building Society boardrooms to be retained. Scheduled to open in 2009. See the Woolwich Interchange Planning Brief (2002). mu13 Warren Lane ‘teardrop’ site (1.54)

mu14 Woolwich Arsenal mainline station and land south of Spray Street, Woolwich town centre (3.14)

Various

DLR interchange with North Kent line, Waterfront Transit and bus routes.To include retail, commercial and residential development as part of a comprehensive station redevelopment. Retail with housing above, including a significant element of affordable housing Light Industry, Small business Units, Cultural Industries, residential within a mix.

mu15 Grove Market Place (0.51)

Shopping parade with residential above Part offices/ commercial, part vacant

Planning permission to amalgamate and enclose an underused 1960's open shopping arcade to provide a large retail unit, re-providing flats above (2003, ref. 00/1091). Site must include a significant proportion of non-residential uses and public access to the Creek. Adjoining Brewery Wharf is safeguarded by the Secretary of State for river-based freight use. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). Development to be linked to improvements to openness and landscaping of St. Alfege’s Park, which could include limited reconfiguration of open space. Gateway site into the World Heritage Site requiring sensitive design solutions. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000).

mu16 Hilton’s, Lion & Saxon Wharves, Upper Norman Road (0.90)

mu17 Creek Road / Bardsley Lane Part open (0.64) space, some commercial premises including former woodyard

Retail, A3 and community uses, civic open space with residential and/or small offices above.

216

SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES

000 sqm offices. hotel. 02/2903) See The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002 being updated.72) parking for the Dome Uses as permitted for the Dome Central. Uses as permitted for the Parkside districts in the Meridian Delta Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula (ref. mu22 Site between A102M and West parkside. riverside conference. part mixed use vacant development with ancillary local services.000 sqm retail & leisure (Meridian Gateway). event park and leisure centre within the Dome. See The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002. Revised scheme being prepared. west of Deptford Creek (Meridian Gateway. Central Park retained. See The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002. Dome. Millennium Square and East Riverside districts in the Meridian Delta Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula (ref. mu20 Site south of Dome adjacent Ancillary North Greenwich Station facilities and (19. 02/2903). Uses as permitted for the Meridian Gardens district in the Meridian Delta Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula (ref.41) SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES 217 . mu21 Delta/Blackwall Wharf and land west of North Greenwich Station (9. Site (hectares) Existing Use Vacant former commercial/ industrial buildings.000 sqm offices over and around a retail and leisure focal point and public transport interchange. being updated). 30. north of Millennium Village (9. 02/2903): up to 325. 5. 1. south side. including residential predominately on the eastern waterfront and Dome car-parking. being updated).54) Millennium Sports arena. leisure and other uses. open space accessible to the public and ecological area along the Dome waterfront Central Business District business/ commercial uses and balanced and appropriately scaled mix of retail. Cultural Industries Description Non-residential elements must comprise a significant proportion of the total floorspace.86) Industrial uses.37) mu19 Millennium Dome and the tip of Greenwich Peninsula (16. mu18 Creek Road. Ancillary storage facilities for Millennium Dome Residential led mixed use development including secondary school with ancillary local services. Proposal Mixed use development to include residential and a substantial mix of Commercial or educational uses.MIXED USES No. 02/2903) See The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002. Resolution to grant planning permission for 600 flats. Uses as permitted for the Dome Waterfront district in the Meridian Delta Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula (ref. being updated). Residential-led aggregates. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000).

and includes a number of important listed buildings. which must be preserved and enhanced. entertainment and education functions (See Policy TC4). office. mu23 East Parkside/ Bugsby’s Reach (8.The remainder is being developed with Site mu13 (The Warren). Above Commercial and some residential To include convenience and other retail facilities for local residents.85) Vacant hospital Mixed use including residential and activity and employment generating town centre uses mu27 Woolwich Campus “island” site. See The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002. Building 10 has planning permission for residential use. Site identified as capable of accommodating retail. Residential acceptable to the rear. and residential within a mix. mu25 Royal Hill Court. off Greenwich High Road (0. Northern part of site affected by safeguarding for the proposed third Blackwall river crossing (see site proposal m3). including retail and/or leisure along Woolwich Road and Vanburgh Hill frontages.44) mu24 Woolwich Royal Arsenal (7. Prominent gateway site where uses should complement and reinforce East Greenwich District Centre. residential. leisure. 02/2903).MIXED USES No. being updated). Woolwich Campus closed 2002. Site (hectares) Existing Use Ancillary facilities for Millennium Dome Proposal Residential led mixed use development with ancillary local services.13) Former Greenwich University campus. Vanburgh health clinic to be retained. Description Uses as permitted for the Bugsby’s Reach districts in the Meridian Delta Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula (ref. Retail at ground level with customer parking.17) Vacant Commercial leisure Part of mixed-use development of including ancillary the Royal Arsenal. to include a significant proportion of affordable housing. residential conservation area. Part of the western end of the block is Grade II listed. Design commensurate with a World heritage Site buffer zone location required. Central Park too be retained. Calderwood Street (1. and their setting protected.39) Retail with commercial and residential above and car parking mu26 Former Greenwich District Hospital (2. Suitable for a mix of employment and activity generating town centre uses.The site is within a retail. 218 SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES .

Granite Mixed use Piper’s & Badcock’s Wharves & Piper’s mainly development (4. Commercial use required to buffer adjoining Defined Industrial Area. north side (0. Scale and nature of development to be commensurate with the site’s public transport accessibility. Granite. other employment generating. Vacant Bathway Greenwich (0. Activities and layout must be compatible with the ongoing use of parts of Badcocks’ Wharf and foreshore for boat repairs and associated operations.MIXED USES No. SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES 219 .24) Various commercial B1. The site is located adjacent to statutorily listed buildings which must be preserved and enhanced and their setting protected through any development. with active commercial/ community uses at ground level.14) vacant.33) Retail warehousing and small industrial / business units Bulky goods retailing and B1b. under review) Single Masterplan required for the whole site to incorporate riverside walk and riverside public open space (Local Park Deficiency Area). Lovell’s. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Suitable for re-use for appropriate Town Centre activity Description Locally listed building former Greenwich University Student Union. parts of incorporating a Badcock Wharf significant and its proportion of foreshore employment uses. Reconfiguration without increase of existing net retail area.2) University Student Union mu29 Maritime Industrial Estate. educational or vocational uses. road access constraints and residential context.c/B8 industrial / Business units mu30 Lovell’s. Bugsby’s Way (2. 1980's retail premises reaching the end of their economic life. creative industries. Residential element may be appropriate on the northern elevations if suitably buffered and designed. Substantial weight will be given to the retention of the building in accordance with Policy D23. Site close to DLR station south of Lewisham College on a busy junction environmentally unsuitable for residential use on the street frontage. boatyard operations on Badcock’s Wharf and foreshore. plus riverside public open space and walk. Potential for links with Lewisham College mu28 Former public baths building. unless a relocation package securing the use of a financially and operationally viable alternative site is implemented before Badcock’s Wharf is cleared for redevelopment. occupied by a including the boat repair retention of works. residential within a wider mix. Main customer and servicing access to be provided off Bugsby’s Way See The Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (Nov 2002. mu31 Deptford Bridge.

g. See Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 Draft. mu33 131-161 Greenwich High Road (j/o Norman Road) (1. offices Mixed use development and interchange enhancement including a significant proportion of B1 office/ business space. Riverfront public access required. multi-storey car park A mix of residential. Payne’s Wharf is Grade 2 listed and should be sensitively incorporated in any redevelopment. workshops.52) Various uses including Davy’s wine bar and cellar Gateway location to World Heritage Site requiring sensitive design solutions. Planning application for mixed use including 247 flats. safeguarded Convoys Wharf (LB Lewisham). 161-171 Greenwich High Road (0. Post office is locally listed and its retention is encouraged. active uses including retail at street level. studios. Large scale retailing proposals would need frontage on General Gordon Square. The Greenwich High Road frontage buildings are a mix of statutorily and locally listed. Description Uses must not prejudice the potential for river freight operations on the adjoining. retail and/or business/ employment uses 220 SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES . Crown building & Post Office (2. Site layout and access arrangements should prioritise pedestrian access along Waller Way (the western site boundary) to Greenwich mainline and DLR station. See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000). halls of residence.57) Various commercial mu34 Davy’s site. mu32 Payne & Borthwick Wharves Document (0.MIXED USES No. being updated).81) Council and government offices. and residential as part of a mix Mixed use development of residential with a significant proportion of commercial floorspace (e. Retail and other town centres uses would also be appropriate on the lower Woolwich New Road frontage. A2 & A3 at street level). See West Greenwich Development Framework (2000.g. studio/office space above A1. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Mixed use development of residential with a significant proportion of commercial floorspace e.87) storage. and former student accommodation. mu35 Peggy Middleton House. update pending). Refurbishment/ development is likely to include re-provision of premises for Davy’s Wine Bar. Gateway location to World Heritage Site requiring sensitive design solutions.

local centre. Thamesmead SE28 (27. to be preserved and its setting enhanced. SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES 221 . community and commercial uses. being updated). being updated). Parade ground and Metropolitan Open Land to be retained without built encroachment nor use for car parking.49) Military academy. parade ground and open space Grade II Listed building built in 1804. open space Description Possible department store site.) Vacant land and temporary aggregates processing Residential led mixed use development with ancillary local retailing and services. residential transport and part vacant interchange.MIXED USES No. See the pending Kidbrooke Development Area SPD and Policy H4 (Kibrooke Development Area).74) Car Park mu38 Royal Military Academy. Outline planning permission for mixed use including 2. Local centre to include medium to large supermarket and a range of smaller shops and services mu39 Kidbrooke station area (4.87) mu37 Waterfront Leisure Centre Car Park (0. SPG adopted September 2003. 125-151 Powis Street (south side) (0. Parking would need to be provided within the scheme if the parking area were utilised. residential above.46) Railway station. to include replacement public car parking Conversion for residential-led mix of uses and/or institutional/ community use. Potential for limited infill development elsewhere. See Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 Draft.51 ha. Kidbrooke station retail. Woolwich Common SE18 (8. housing THAMESMEAD mu40 Tripcock Point. See Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 Draft. See the Tripcock Point Development Framework. Site (hectares) Existing Use Council offices and car park Proposal Major non-food retail use with possible mixed use including residential on upper floors Mixed use with active uses at street and river level.000 dwellings (03/2618/O). Riverside walk to be maintained mu36 Co-op site.

222 SITE PROPOSAL SCHEDULES .

local and unitary development plans to include policies in respect of: APPENDIX 1: LEGISLATIVE BACKGROUND 223 .” 4 In addition. a reasoned justification of the general policies in Part I of the Plan and of proposals in Part II. 5 6 A Unitary Development Plan shall also contain such other matters as may be prescribed or as the Secretary of State may in any other case direct. which sets out guidance on the procedure and content of the UDP. d. the UDP takes account of Planning Policy Guidance Note 12: Development Plans (1999). a map showing those proposals on a geographical basis. to the resources likely to be available.APPENDICES A P P E N D I X 1 : L E G I S L AT I V E B AC K G R O U N D Preparation of the Unitary Development Plan (UDP) was commenced by the Council under the provisions of the Town and Country Planning Act (1990). b. to such other matters as the Secretary of State may direct the authority to take into account. b. 7 The Proposals in Part II of a Unitary Development Plan shall be in general conformity with Part I. It follows the requirements set out in the Act and in The Town and Country Planning (Development Plan) (England) Regulations 1999. illustrations or other descriptive or explanatory matter in respect of the general Policies in Part I of the Plan or the Proposals in Part II as the authority think appropriate or as may be prescribed. and d. PPG12 sets out a UDP’s function and format as follows: “[The UDP] should contain the local planning authority’s policies and proposals for the development and use of land. to current national and regional policies. Part II of a Unitary Development Plan shall consist of:a.The 1990 Act also requires structure. to any strategic guidance given by the Secretary of State to assist them in the preparation of the Plan. c. In formulating the general Policies in Part 1of a Unitary Development Plan the authority shall have regard:a. such diagrams. a written statement formulating in such detail as the authority think appropriate (and so as to be readily distinguishable from the other contents of the Plan) their proposals for the development and other use of land in their area or for any description of development or other use of such land. Part Two of the Town and Country Planning Act sets out the following requirements for a UDP: “2 A Unitary Development Plan shall comprise two parts. c. 3 Part I of a Unitary Development Plan shall consist of a written statement formulating the authority’s general policies in respect of the development and other use of land in their area (including measures for the improvement of the physical environment and the management of traffic).

and has prepared. It should not contain policies and proposals which will be used in themselves for taking decisions on planning applications.7) “UDP part II sets out the local planning authority’s detailed policies and specific proposals for the development and use of land which will guide its day-to-day planning decisions.” (Paragraph 3.” (Paragraph 3.The London Plan (2004).11) “Part II of a plan must be in general conformity with policies in Part I.” (Appendix A. a spatial development strategy for London (SDS). 224 APPENDIX 1: LEGISLATIVE BACKGROUND . The improvement of the physical environment. paragraph 24) Under the Greater London Authority Act 1999 and the Town and Country Planning (London Spatial Development Strategy) Regulations 2000. It has replaced strategic planning guidance for London Planning Authorities (RPG3) and the London Parts of RPG3b/9b (strategic planning guidance for the River Thames). UDPs are required to be in general conformity with the Plan. paragraph 7) “The written statement should also include a reasoned justification of the plan’s policies and proposals. forms the Development Plan for the Borough.” (Appendix A. The Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004 gave the London Plan ‘development plan’ status.• • • The conservation of the natural beauty and amenity of the land. was published in February 2004.The SDS.The reasoned justification should only contain an explanation behind the policies and proposals in the plan. and The management of traffic. known as the London Plan.2) “Part 1 of UDP’s … should concentrate of providing a strategic framework within which detailed policies can then be framed in Part II of the UDP.” (Paragraph 3. the Mayor has responsibility for. together with the UDP (2006).

Also referred to as ‘durable goods’. cosmetics. and newspapers. jewellery. the differences found within a species and the ecosystems and habitats within which species occur. Bulky goods are generally considered to comprise furniture. Backland development Development of land surrounded by existing properties. AOD Above Ordinance Datum. from a defined area. APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY 225 . Density (residential) The amount of residential accommodation in any given area. either as an individual item or in the quantity typically purchased. It includes species.g.The Greenwich UDP is the statutory Development Plan for the London Borough of Greenwich. which Local Planning Authorities have a statutory duty to produce. flooring and DIY goods. also including the Social Exclusion Unit and the Neighbourhood Renewal Unit. comprising both Social Rented housing and Intermediate housing including Key Worker housing. animals and other living things in a particular area or region. often using back gardens and creating a new vehicular access. where shoppers typically prefer to have a choice of retail outlets in order to compare an article with others of the same type. to the extent that the average shopper could not reasonably be expected to carry the purchase. Conservation Area An area of special architectural or historic interest. Controlled Parking Zone (CPZ) An area in which on-street parking restrictions apply. Comparison Goods Items such as clothing. Biodiversity The variety of plants. Government Department responsible for national policy on housing. major electrical items and appliances. Article 4 Direction The Local Planning Authority may make a direction under Article 4 of the Town and Country Planning General Permitted Development Order 1995 (GPDO). typified by parking meters. the character or appearance of which is desirable to preserve or enhance. Bulky goods A retail product subcategory of Comparison or durable goods referring to items that are bulky and/or heavy. measured in habitable rooms per hectare (HRH) of residential site area.A P P E N D I X 2 : G L O S S A RY A N D A B B R E V I AT I O N S Affordable Housing Housing to meet the needs of households whose incomes are not sufficient to allow them to access appropriate housing in the Borough housing market. Height above sea level.This removes specified Permitted Development Rights. Convenience Goods Goods bought frequently or out of necessity e. planning. granted under the Order. regional and local government. Development Plan A plan for the use of land for a specified area. DCLG Department for Communities & Local Government. tobacco. resident only parking bays/permits etc. food. footwear and electrical goods.

and will be subject to independent examination.uk) provides a fuller description. in-store cafes or concessions. Site Allocations. the Proposals Map and Area Action Plans. Environment Agency Set up by the 1995 Environment Act. Government Department responsible for national transport policy. Green Belt A stretch of open land encircling Greater London in which development is strictly controlled. staff amenity facilities. The Mayor has responsibility for producing strategic planning guidance for London. sales counters. the Environment Agency are a non-departmental public body with responsibility as environmental advisors and regulators. DLR Docklands Light Railway DoT Department of Transport. Floorspace (net retail) Area of a shop that is accessible to the public . giving definition to the built up area and limiting urban sprawl. EU European Union Floorspace (gross) All floorspace enclosed within the building envelope. Footprint (of building) Ground area on a given site occupied by permanent buildings.There are five types of DPD:The Core (Spatial) Strategy.g. plant rooms. Greater London Authority (GLA) Established in 2000. They will be the main basis upon which planning decisions are made. the GLA is made up of a Mayor and a separately elected Assembly. Government Circulars Periodic Guidance on specific topics relevant to planning which sets out Government policy and guidance on planning matters. DPDs have legal status under the Town and Country Planning (Local Development) (England) Regulations 2004.gov.sales floor. 226 APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY . Development Control Policies. The Greenwich Local Development Scheme (www. published as the London Plan (See Spatial Development Strategy). checkouts / circulation / lobby areas. not including areas of hardstanding (e.greenwich. and ancillary facilities such as public seating. Excludes goods storage / delivery / preparation areas. GAD Greenwich Association for the Disabled General Permitted Development Order (GPDO) The GPDO lists a number of operations to which planning permission is given automatically and where no application to the Local Planning Authority is required. Durable Goods See Comparison Goods. public toilets and enclosed public stairwells / lifts between shop floors.Development Plan Document Once prepared Development Plan Documents (DPD) will replace the adopted UDP as the heart of the Local Development Framework (see LDF entry below). tarmac carparking) or temporary structures / outbuildings. staff offices.

Key Worker Workers such nurses. Intermediate housing Subsidised rented or shared ownership (part owned.g. High Building A building. m. bus) to another (e. including bedrooms. Greenwich. rail). Provided for those on moderate incomes (such as key workers) who cannot afford to rent or buy at London prices. are unable to buy or rent in the private market. which significantly exceeds the height of its surroundings. pylons. Kitchens will be counted as habitable where they have an overall floor area greater than 13 sq. train). HMO Houses in Multiple Occupation. teachers. chimneys etc.Green Chain A chain of open spaces through South-East London extending in a virtually continuous arc through Lewisham. policies and priorities.g. HRA Habitable Rooms per Acre. Workers in these groups are typically on relatively low pay. for example and the journey is continued by another means of transport (e. Occupation of a dwelling by more than one household. Kiss and Ride Where one is driven to the station. Used as a measure of housing density. Bexley and Bromley. toilets. ILIP (Interim Local Implementation Plan) and LIP (Local Implementation Plan) A document of Greenwich Council’s transport policies and schemes for the Borough reviewed on a regular basis. but excluding bathrooms. (140sq. HRH Habitable Rooms per Hectare. ft. and emergency services providers that have clearly identified recruitment and retention problems which are undermining service delivery and the economic well-being of the city.g. Used as a measure of housing density. Green Travel Plan Where an employer has produced a plan of practical measures to reduce car-use for travel to. It is accompanied by a Borough Spending Plan that details the Borough’s annual transport spending bid. also houses sold at a discount. Housing Strategy and Investment Programme (HIP) The rolling programme of expenditure that the Local Authority submits annually for Central Government funding. but who also are unlikely to qualify for social rented housing. landings. but less than the private cost of purchasing / renting. halls and lobbies. from and for work. and whilst not in any ordinary sense in housing need. ONS 2001). part rented) housing costing more than social rent levels. Habitable Room Habitable Rooms will include all separate living rooms. Statements accompany the programmes on local housing need. Household One person living alone or a group of people (who may or may not be related) living or staying temporarily at the same address with common housekeeping (definition derived from The Census 2001 definitions. This is a Central Government initiative implemented through local authorities by a travel plan advisor. including all types of structures such as masts. Interchange A point/location where a traveller can switch from one form of transport (e.). APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY 227 .

greenwich. London Plan See Spatial Development Strategy Low Emissions Zone (LEZ) A defined area from which polluting vehicles that do not comply with set emissions standards are barred from entering.uk) provides a fuller description. each occupying a single-use building) ODPM Following reorganisation in 2006. Local Development Framework (LDF) A Local Development Framework (LDF) is a portfolio of more specific documents that will replace traditional and wider-ranging old-style ‘development plans’ such as the Greenwich UDP. It will generally give details of the favoured land uses for the site and the 228 APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY . and the second or additional uses comprise a significant proportion of the total floorspace. The Greenwich Local Development Scheme (www. Listed Building Consent is required for any proposal to alter. Media and Sport.The level of protection afforded to MOL is the same as that afforded to Green Belt land. Listed Building (Statutory) A building (and any other fixed object within its curtilage of special architectural or historical interest which is on a list prepared by the Secretary of State for Culture. It principally comprises Development Plan Documents with legal/statutory status. and non-statutory Supplementary Planning Documents.Listed Building (Local) A building or structure of architectural or historic interest which does not qualify for inclusion in the statutory list but which in the opinion of the Local Authority make a valuable contribution to the character of the area. now known as the Department for Communities & Local Government (see DCLG). An area of local interest to which there is a commitment for conservation declared under the National Parks and Access to Countryside Act 1949. ONS The Office of National Statistics Permitted Development Rights Small-scale developments which do not require planning permission in accordance with the General Permitted Development Order 1995. Planning Brief A statement of the land use opportunities and constraints presented by a particular site. recognised has having more than Borough significance.gov. extend or demolish the whole or part of the interior or exterior of any structure within the curtilage of that building. Pinch Points Narrowing of the road carriageway to prevent passage by certain large/wide vehicles.These buildings are protected under the Town and Country Planning (Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas) Act 1990. LNR Local Nature Reserve. Mixed Use A development that includes more than one land use. LWT London Wildlife Trust Metropolitan Open Land (MOL) Land of predominantly open character. prepared for the guidance of potential developers. The mix can be vertical (a mix of uses within one building) and/or horizontal (a range of uses across a site.

Safeguarding Generally. Being replaced by Planning Policy Statements (PPS’s). can only considered if there are no more central alternatives available.standards that any development should reach. Developers are required to give first preference to locations within town centres. Previous guidance RPG3 (1996) was replaced by the London Mayor’s Spatial Development Strategy (SDS) in February 2004. issued by the London Mayor.They are responsible for housing provision. fauna. improvement and management. Sequential Approach Approach to selecting suitable sites for activity generating uses that attract the visiting public. to which Greenwich UDP will have to be in general conformity with. Single Programme (formerly Single Regeneration Budget. Residential Site Area Area wholly within the Curtilage (boundary) of the site including internal access roads and incidental open space (see also Annex C of PPG3 Housing). geology or physiographical features. construction. Planning Guidance for London. to concentrate these uses within town centres wherever possible. Strategic Guidance Planning Guidance for London that provides a framework for the preparation of Unitary Development Plans. For mixed use schemes residential density can be estimated by apportioning the site area between different uses. Registered Social Landlord A non-profit making organisation who allocate housing on the basis of need and are registered with the Housing Corporation (a Government organisation who provide funding to deliver affordable housing). Sites identified as being of importance for nature conservation purposes. Planning Policy Guidance Notes (PPG's) Government advice on various planning policy matters issued from time to time to guide Local Planning Authorities in their operation of the planning system. Social rented housing Housing typically owned and/or managed by a registered Social Landlord for subsidised rent to households on low incomes who would otherwise be unable to access suitable housing. Planning Briefs are usually adopted as Supplementary Planning Guidance. APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY 229 . SNCI Sites of Nature Conservation Importance. Edge-of-centre sites. SRB) National government funding programme administered by Regional Development Agencies with the aim of supporting regeneration initiatives carried out by local regeneration partnerships. and in particular retail and indoor leisure developments. Site of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) Sites notified to the Local Planning Authority by the Nature Conservancy Council under section 28 of the Wildlife and Countryside Act 1981 as being of national importance by reason of any of their flora. and in the last instance out of centre sites. Planning Obligations A legal undertaking entered into in connection with a planning permission under Section 106 of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990. Spatial Development Strategy (SDS) Spatial Development Strategy –known as The London Plan. which serve the same purpose. for rent and sale. and are subject to a range of additional policy tests. the reserving of land for a particular purpose. Published February 2004.

They provide further detail on the implementation of particular policies and proposals contained in the UDP (or successor Development Plan Document). Traffic Management Physical or other changes to roads in order to slow traffic. SPD is a material consideration in the determination of planning applications. comprises the UDP. give preferential treatment to certain users. Traffic calming Traffic management geared to reducing the environmental impact and speeds of vehicles. which. Prepared by a process incorporating public consultation and formal adoption by Council.see above). very similar in scope. Orders are served in accordance with the Town and Country Planning Act of 1990. 230 APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY . improve the environment. together with the Proposals Map.gov. reduce traffic volumes. Supplementary Planning Guidance (SPG) Predecessor to SPD. but adopted prior to the 2004 Planning & Compensation Act. etc. One adopted. purpose and status.greenwich. All SPG that remains relevant will be updated and re-adopted as SPD. Written Statement The document setting out a Local Planning Authority's policies and proposals for development within its area. although the UDP will remain the primary policy basis for decision-making. Tree Preservation Order (TPO) Individual or groups of trees which the Local Planning Authority consider make a positive contribution to the amenity of the area and which are worthy of preservation.uk) provides a fuller description.Supplementary Planning Document (SPD) A non-statutory Local Development Document forming part of the Borough’s Local Development Framework (LDF . Examples include area.or issue-specific planning guidance (such as a planning brief).The Greenwich Local Development Scheme (www.

shops.g. or use as a hospital or nursing home. B2 General Industrial Use.Use Classes Order (UCO) Town and Country Planning (Use Classes) Order 1987 and subsequent updates. C2 Residential Institutions. Sui generis Other uses that do not fall within the categories specified above (including some hybrid uses). An industrial use which cannot be carried out in any residential area without detriment to the amenity of that area B8 A building or land primarily for the purpose of storage / distribution of goods.This order groups buildings of similar uses (e. theatres. boarding. day nurseries. APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY 231 . Uses for the purposes of offices (other than A2 use). no significant element of care is provided. Uses such as cinemas. Use for provision of residential accommodation and care to people in need. D2 Assembly and Leisure. residential school or training centre C3 Self contained residential dwelling D1 Non-residential institution. research and development or light industry. Some of the more frequently used use classes are: A1 Shops A2 Financial or Professional Services A3 Restaurants and Cafés A4 Drinking Establishments A5 Hot Food Take-away’s B1 Business Use. offices) within which certain changes of use may take place which will not require planning permission. Government is examining proposals to designate nightclubs as a separate use (Class D3). C1 Hotel. medical services museums etc. bingo halls and indoor sport complexes. and potentially sensitive uses that are excluded from any category of the Use Classes Order (1987) and subsequent updates specifically to ensure that proposals for that use will in all instances require planning permission. in each case. Uses for places of worship. providing that such a use can be carried out in a residential area without detriment to the amenity of that area. guest house or hostel where.

232 APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful